From 9d4a39a5654c975a504467407224f34d9806d0f4 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Uwe Fischer Date: Wed, 13 Jan 2010 16:01:27 +0100 Subject: hcshared25: i 108108 applied --- .../source/text/sbasic/guide/translation.xhp | 10 +- .../source/text/sbasic/shared/01050300.xhp | 10 +- .../source/text/sbasic/shared/01170101.xhp | 14 +- .../source/text/sbasic/shared/main0211.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02140600.xhp | 30 ++-- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02150000.xhp | 16 +-- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02160000.xhp | 8 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02180000.xhp | 6 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04020000.xhp | 8 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04050000.xhp | 20 +-- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060000.xhp | 24 ++-- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04070100.xhp | 16 +-- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04070200.xhp | 4 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04070300.xhp | 8 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04070400.xhp | 12 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04080000.xhp | 8 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04090000.xhp | 8 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05020600.xhp | 8 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05030200.xhp | 4 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05040200.xhp | 4 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05050100.xhp | 4 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05050300.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05070500.xhp | 28 ++-- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05080300.xhp | 12 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05110000.xhp | 18 +-- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05120000.xhp | 36 ++--- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06040000.xhp | 6 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06050000.xhp | 12 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12010000.xhp | 8 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12010100.xhp | 8 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12030100.xhp | 18 +-- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12030200.xhp | 24 ++-- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12040201.xhp | 36 ++--- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12040300.xhp | 4 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12050200.xhp | 16 +-- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12060000.xhp | 6 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12070000.xhp | 16 +-- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12070100.xhp | 6 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12080300.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090100.xhp | 6 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090101.xhp | 6 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090102.xhp | 28 ++-- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090103.xhp | 10 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090104.xhp | 6 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090105.xhp | 22 +-- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090106.xhp | 22 +-- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12120100.xhp | 12 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12120200.xhp | 8 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12120300.xhp | 12 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0202.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0210.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0218.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/04010000.xhp | 20 +-- helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/04020000.xhp | 18 +-- helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/04030000.xhp | 16 +-- helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/04040000.xhp | 10 +- helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/04050000.xhp | 42 +++--- helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/04060000.xhp | 20 +-- helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/04070000.xhp | 12 +- helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05020201.xhp | 16 +-- helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05040201.xhp | 30 ++-- helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05040202.xhp | 34 ++--- .../source/text/schart/01/three_d_view.xhp | 8 +- helpcontent2/source/text/schart/main0000.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000001.xhp | 120 ++++++++-------- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000202.xhp | 8 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000203.xhp | 10 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000204.xhp | 18 +-- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000205.xhp | 10 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000206.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000207.xhp | 10 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000208.xhp | 28 ++-- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000210.xhp | 8 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000212.xhp | 8 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000213.xhp | 16 +-- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000214.xhp | 12 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000215.xhp | 12 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/01010000.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/01050000.xhp | 4 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010100.xhp | 4 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010201.xhp | 20 +-- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010202.xhp | 22 +-- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010203.xhp | 14 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010302.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010303.xhp | 16 +-- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010304.xhp | 12 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01020000.xhp | 28 ++-- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01020103.xhp | 4 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01100100.xhp | 8 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01100200.xhp | 6 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01100300.xhp | 10 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01100400.xhp | 4 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01100500.xhp | 18 +-- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01110100.xhp | 10 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01110101.xhp | 6 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01110300.xhp | 10 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01130000.xhp | 36 ++--- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01140000.xhp | 6 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01190000.xhp | 16 +-- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02070000.xhp | 50 +++---- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02100000.xhp | 84 +++++------ helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02100100.xhp | 12 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02100200.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02100300.xhp | 4 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02180000.xhp | 12 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02180100.xhp | 6 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02210101.xhp | 48 +++---- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02220000.xhp | 6 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02220100.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02230200.xhp | 6 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02230402.xhp | 4 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02250000.xhp | 62 ++++---- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/03010000.xhp | 34 ++--- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/03150100.xhp | 8 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04050000.xhp | 6 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04100000.xhp | 8 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04140000.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04150100.xhp | 14 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04150200.xhp | 8 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020100.xhp | 32 ++--- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020200.xhp | 34 ++--- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020300.xhp | 20 +-- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020400.xhp | 16 +-- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020500.xhp | 28 ++-- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020600.xhp | 6 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020700.xhp | 6 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030100.xhp | 20 +-- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030300.xhp | 28 ++-- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030500.xhp | 22 +-- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030600.xhp | 20 +-- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030700.xhp | 24 ++-- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030800.xhp | 22 +-- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05040100.xhp | 12 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05040200.xhp | 42 +++--- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05040300.xhp | 18 +-- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05040400.xhp | 18 +-- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05060000.xhp | 24 ++-- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05100200.xhp | 8 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05140100.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05150101.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05190000.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05190100.xhp | 4 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05200100.xhp | 30 ++-- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05200200.xhp | 28 ++-- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05200300.xhp | 12 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210100.xhp | 48 +++---- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210300.xhp | 28 ++-- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210400.xhp | 18 +-- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210500.xhp | 16 +-- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210600.xhp | 8 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210700.xhp | 22 +-- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05220000.xhp | 22 +-- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05230100.xhp | 22 +-- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05230300.xhp | 6 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05230400.xhp | 4 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05230500.xhp | 14 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05280000.xhp | 10 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05290100.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05290200.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05320000.xhp | 28 ++-- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340100.xhp | 8 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340200.xhp | 4 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340300.xhp | 18 +-- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05350200.xhp | 26 ++-- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05350300.xhp | 12 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05350400.xhp | 26 ++-- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05350500.xhp | 24 ++-- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05350600.xhp | 18 +-- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05360000.xhp | 20 +-- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06010000.xhp | 34 ++--- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06020000.xhp | 14 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06030000.xhp | 30 ++-- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040100.xhp | 4 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040200.xhp | 16 +-- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040300.xhp | 32 ++--- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040400.xhp | 32 ++--- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040600.xhp | 40 +++--- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040700.xhp | 4 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050400.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050500.xhp | 32 ++--- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050600.xhp | 38 ++--- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06130000.xhp | 50 +++---- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06130100.xhp | 6 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06130500.xhp | 4 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140100.xhp | 20 +-- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140200.xhp | 16 +-- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140402.xhp | 4 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140500.xhp | 12 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06200000.xhp | 22 +-- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06201000.xhp | 16 +-- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06202000.xhp | 18 +-- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/08060100.xhp | 12 +- .../source/text/shared/01/digitalsignatures.xhp | 12 +- .../source/text/shared/01/extensionupdate.xhp | 6 +- .../source/text/shared/01/gallery_files.xhp | 12 +- .../source/text/shared/01/online_update.xhp | 6 +- .../source/text/shared/01/packagemanager.xhp | 26 ++-- .../source/text/shared/01/password_dlg.xhp | 4 +- .../source/text/shared/01/password_main.xhp | 6 +- .../source/text/shared/01/ref_pdf_export.xhp | 156 ++++++++++----------- .../source/text/shared/01/securitywarning.xhp | 2 +- .../source/text/shared/01/selectcertificate.xhp | 4 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/xformsdata.xhp | 4 +- .../source/text/shared/01/xformsdataadd.xhp | 26 ++-- .../source/text/shared/01/xformsdataaddcon.xhp | 4 +- .../source/text/shared/01/xformsdataname.xhp | 6 +- .../source/text/shared/01/xformsdatatab.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170004.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170101.xhp | 4 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170203.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170300.xhp | 12 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170801.xhp | 4 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170802.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170901.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170902.xhp | 4 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170903.xhp | 4 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170904.xhp | 6 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/09070100.xhp | 56 ++++---- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/09070200.xhp | 8 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/09070300.xhp | 6 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/09070400.xhp | 10 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12000000.xhp | 4 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12070100.xhp | 30 ++-- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12070200.xhp | 10 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12070300.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12090100.xhp | 44 +++--- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12100200.xhp | 10 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/14010000.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/14020100.xhp | 6 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/20090000.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/20100000.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/24010000.xhp | 24 ++-- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000130.xhp | 4 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000140.xhp | 12 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000150.xhp | 4 +- .../source/text/shared/3dsettings_toolbar.xhp | 12 +- .../source/text/shared/autopi/01020200.xhp | 6 +- .../source/text/shared/autopi/01020300.xhp | 20 +-- .../source/text/shared/autopi/01020400.xhp | 6 +- .../source/text/shared/autopi/01020500.xhp | 8 +- .../source/text/shared/autopi/01040200.xhp | 6 +- .../source/text/shared/autopi/01050000.xhp | 6 +- .../source/text/shared/autopi/01050100.xhp | 12 +- .../source/text/shared/autopi/01050200.xhp | 12 +- .../source/text/shared/autopi/01050300.xhp | 14 +- .../source/text/shared/autopi/01050400.xhp | 6 +- .../source/text/shared/autopi/01050500.xhp | 2 +- .../source/text/shared/autopi/01090100.xhp | 24 ++-- .../source/text/shared/autopi/01110100.xhp | 8 +- .../source/text/shared/autopi/01110200.xhp | 30 ++-- .../source/text/shared/autopi/01110300.xhp | 16 +-- .../source/text/shared/autopi/01110400.xhp | 10 +- .../source/text/shared/autopi/01110500.xhp | 2 +- .../source/text/shared/autopi/01110600.xhp | 16 +-- .../source/text/shared/autopi/01120100.xhp | 8 +- .../source/text/shared/autopi/01120200.xhp | 6 +- .../source/text/shared/autopi/01120300.xhp | 4 +- .../source/text/shared/autopi/01120500.xhp | 2 +- .../source/text/shared/autopi/01170000.xhp | 16 +-- .../source/text/shared/autopi/01170400.xhp | 4 +- .../text/shared/explorer/database/02010100.xhp | 4 +- .../text/shared/explorer/database/05000003.xhp | 8 +- .../text/shared/explorer/database/05010100.xhp | 6 +- .../text/shared/explorer/database/05020100.xhp | 20 +-- .../text/shared/explorer/database/05030100.xhp | 12 +- .../text/shared/explorer/database/05030200.xhp | 12 +- .../text/shared/explorer/database/05030300.xhp | 6 +- .../text/shared/explorer/database/05030400.xhp | 12 +- .../text/shared/explorer/database/11020000.xhp | 2 +- .../text/shared/explorer/database/11030000.xhp | 2 +- .../text/shared/explorer/database/11030100.xhp | 14 +- .../text/shared/explorer/database/11080000.xhp | 8 +- .../text/shared/explorer/database/11170000.xhp | 12 +- .../text/shared/explorer/database/11170100.xhp | 12 +- .../text/shared/explorer/database/30100000.xhp | 2 +- .../shared/explorer/database/dabaadvpropdat.xhp | 2 +- .../text/shared/explorer/database/dabapropgen.xhp | 8 +- .../text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz01.xhp | 12 +- .../shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02jdbc.xhp | 6 +- .../shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02oracle.xhp | 4 +- .../text/shared/explorer/database/menuedit.xhp | 4 +- .../text/shared/explorer/database/menufilesave.xhp | 8 +- .../shared/explorer/database/migrate_macros.xhp | 4 +- .../text/shared/explorer/database/password.xhp | 6 +- .../text/shared/explorer/database/rep_datetime.xhp | 16 +-- .../shared/explorer/database/rep_navigator.xhp | 10 +- .../shared/explorer/database/rep_pagenumbers.xhp | 10 +- .../text/shared/explorer/database/rep_prop.xhp | 42 +++--- .../text/shared/explorer/database/rep_sort.xhp | 18 +-- .../source/text/shared/fontwork_toolbar.xhp | 8 +- .../text/shared/guide/digitalsign_receive.xhp | 10 +- .../source/text/shared/guide/digitalsign_send.xhp | 6 +- .../source/text/shared/optionen/01010000.xhp | 2 +- .../source/text/shared/optionen/01010100.xhp | 70 ++++----- .../source/text/shared/optionen/01010200.xhp | 28 ++-- .../source/text/shared/optionen/01010300.xhp | 4 +- .../source/text/shared/optionen/01010301.xhp | 4 +- .../source/text/shared/optionen/01010400.xhp | 30 ++-- .../source/text/shared/optionen/01010401.xhp | 8 +- .../source/text/shared/optionen/01010500.xhp | 18 +-- .../source/text/shared/optionen/01010501.xhp | 26 ++-- .../source/text/shared/optionen/01010600.xhp | 28 ++-- .../source/text/shared/optionen/01010700.xhp | 24 ++-- .../source/text/shared/optionen/01010800.xhp | 46 +++--- .../source/text/shared/optionen/01010900.xhp | 38 ++--- .../source/text/shared/optionen/01011000.xhp | 24 ++-- .../source/text/shared/optionen/01012000.xhp | 6 +- .../source/text/shared/optionen/01013000.xhp | 20 +-- .../source/text/shared/optionen/01014000.xhp | 8 +- .../source/text/shared/optionen/01020100.xhp | 18 +-- .../source/text/shared/optionen/01020200.xhp | 26 ++-- .../source/text/shared/optionen/01020300.xhp | 4 +- .../source/text/shared/optionen/01020400.xhp | 2 +- .../source/text/shared/optionen/01030300.xhp | 64 ++++----- .../source/text/shared/optionen/01030500.xhp | 64 ++++----- .../source/text/shared/optionen/01040200.xhp | 36 ++--- .../source/text/shared/optionen/01040300.xhp | 22 +-- .../source/text/shared/optionen/01040400.xhp | 42 +++--- .../source/text/shared/optionen/01040500.xhp | 28 ++-- .../source/text/shared/optionen/01040600.xhp | 34 ++--- .../source/text/shared/optionen/01040700.xhp | 16 +-- .../source/text/shared/optionen/01040900.xhp | 20 +-- .../source/text/shared/optionen/01041000.xhp | 12 +- .../source/text/shared/optionen/01041100.xhp | 18 +-- .../source/text/shared/optionen/01050000.xhp | 2 +- .../source/text/shared/optionen/01050100.xhp | 14 +- .../source/text/shared/optionen/01060100.xhp | 44 +++--- .../source/text/shared/optionen/01060300.xhp | 20 +-- .../source/text/shared/optionen/01060400.xhp | 12 +- .../source/text/shared/optionen/01060401.xhp | 6 +- .../source/text/shared/optionen/01060500.xhp | 24 ++-- .../source/text/shared/optionen/01060600.xhp | 8 +- .../source/text/shared/optionen/01060700.xhp | 4 +- .../source/text/shared/optionen/01070100.xhp | 8 +- .../source/text/shared/optionen/01070300.xhp | 20 +-- .../source/text/shared/optionen/01070400.xhp | 28 ++-- .../source/text/shared/optionen/01070500.xhp | 24 ++-- .../source/text/shared/optionen/01090100.xhp | 18 +-- .../source/text/shared/optionen/01110100.xhp | 8 +- .../source/text/shared/optionen/01140000.xhp | 36 ++--- .../source/text/shared/optionen/01150100.xhp | 18 +-- .../source/text/shared/optionen/01150200.xhp | 4 +- .../source/text/shared/optionen/01150300.xhp | 10 +- .../source/text/shared/optionen/01160100.xhp | 14 +- .../source/text/shared/optionen/01160200.xhp | 6 +- .../source/text/shared/optionen/01160201.xhp | 4 +- .../source/text/shared/optionen/improvement.xhp | 6 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/java.xhp | 10 +- .../source/text/shared/optionen/javaclasspath.xhp | 10 +- .../source/text/shared/optionen/javaparameters.xhp | 8 +- .../text/shared/optionen/macrosecurity_sl.xhp | 8 +- .../text/shared/optionen/macrosecurity_ts.xhp | 10 +- .../source/text/shared/optionen/mailmerge.xhp | 20 +-- .../source/text/shared/optionen/online_update.xhp | 10 +- .../text/shared/optionen/serverauthentication.xhp | 22 +-- .../source/text/shared/optionen/testaccount.xhp | 4 +- .../text/shared/optionen/viewcertificate_c.xhp | 2 +- .../text/shared/optionen/viewcertificate_d.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/00/00000004.xhp | 4 +- helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/02120000.xhp | 18 +-- helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/02150000.xhp | 6 +- helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/02160000.xhp | 10 +- helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03151100.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03151200.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04010000.xhp | 4 +- helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04020000.xhp | 8 +- helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04030000.xhp | 10 +- helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04030100.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04110100.xhp | 4 +- helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/05120000.xhp | 6 +- helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/05120100.xhp | 16 +-- helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/05150000.xhp | 24 ++-- helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/05170000.xhp | 16 +-- helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/06040000.xhp | 8 +- helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/06050000.xhp | 32 ++--- helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/06070000.xhp | 16 +-- helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/06080000.xhp | 34 ++--- helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/06100000.xhp | 12 +- helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/06100100.xhp | 8 +- helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/13050200.xhp | 10 +- .../source/text/simpress/01/animationeffect.xhp | 6 +- .../text/simpress/01/effectoptionseffect.xhp | 18 +-- .../source/text/simpress/01/effectoptionstext.xhp | 10 +- .../text/simpress/01/effectoptionstiming.xhp | 16 +-- helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/taskpanel.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/13040000.xhp | 2 +- .../source/text/simpress/guide/table_insert.xhp | 4 +- helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0210.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/05010000.xhp | 18 +-- helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/05010100.xhp | 8 +- helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/05020000.xhp | 14 +- helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/05030000.xhp | 6 +- helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/05040000.xhp | 8 +- helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/06010000.xhp | 6 +- helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/06010100.xhp | 22 +-- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/01150000.xhp | 36 ++--- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/01160300.xhp | 4 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02110100.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02120000.xhp | 26 ++-- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02120100.xhp | 6 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02140000.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02150000.xhp | 6 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02160000.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02170000.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04010000.xhp | 12 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04020000.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04020100.xhp | 42 +++--- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04020200.xhp | 4 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04030000.xhp | 12 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04040000.xhp | 4 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04060000.xhp | 12 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04060100.xhp | 12 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04070100.xhp | 10 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04070200.xhp | 18 +-- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04070300.xhp | 10 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090001.xhp | 14 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090002.xhp | 10 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090003.xhp | 34 ++--- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090004.xhp | 6 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090005.xhp | 18 +-- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090006.xhp | 16 +-- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090100.xhp | 4 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120100.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120201.xhp | 10 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120211.xhp | 18 +-- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120212.xhp | 20 +-- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120213.xhp | 8 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120215.xhp | 10 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120217.xhp | 4 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120219.xhp | 4 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120221.xhp | 26 ++-- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120222.xhp | 12 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120227.xhp | 28 ++-- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04150000.xhp | 18 +-- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04180400.xhp | 4 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04200000.xhp | 18 +-- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05030200.xhp | 32 ++--- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05030400.xhp | 14 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05030800.xhp | 16 +-- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05040500.xhp | 28 ++-- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05040600.xhp | 16 +-- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05040700.xhp | 28 ++-- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05040800.xhp | 22 +-- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060100.xhp | 70 ++++----- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060200.xhp | 28 ++-- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060201.xhp | 4 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060300.xhp | 14 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060700.xhp | 10 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060800.xhp | 12 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060900.xhp | 24 ++-- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05090100.xhp | 26 ++-- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05090200.xhp | 22 +-- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05090300.xhp | 24 ++-- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05110100.xhp | 4 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05120100.xhp | 4 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05120400.xhp | 8 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05130000.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05130100.xhp | 8 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05150101.xhp | 20 +-- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05150104.xhp | 4 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05170000.xhp | 16 +-- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05190000.xhp | 10 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05200000.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06030000.xhp | 10 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06060000.xhp | 4 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06060100.xhp | 16 +-- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06080100.xhp | 26 ++-- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06080200.xhp | 16 +-- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06090000.xhp | 24 ++-- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06100000.xhp | 46 +++--- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06180000.xhp | 22 +-- .../source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge00.xhp | 2 +- .../source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge01.xhp | 16 +-- .../source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge02.xhp | 4 +- .../source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge03.xhp | 14 +- .../source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge04.xhp | 24 ++-- .../source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge05.xhp | 12 +- .../source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge06.xhp | 14 +- .../source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge07.xhp | 12 +- .../source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge08.xhp | 46 +++--- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_copyto.xhp | 4 +- .../source/text/swriter/01/mm_cusgrelin.xhp | 16 +-- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_emabod.xhp | 20 +-- .../source/text/swriter/01/mm_seladdblo.xhp | 14 +- .../source/text/swriter/01/mm_seladdlis.xhp | 10 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_seltab.xhp | 2 +- .../source/text/swriter/01/selection_mode.xhp | 6 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/10070000.xhp | 6 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/10110000.xhp | 22 +-- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/19010000.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/19020000.xhp | 2 +- 491 files changed, 3611 insertions(+), 3611 deletions(-) mode change 100755 => 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050400.xhp (limited to 'helpcontent2') diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/guide/translation.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/guide/translation.xhp index 03e6ef33a6..2c7c36bfb0 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/guide/translation.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/guide/translation.xhp @@ -52,11 +52,11 @@ The Language toolbar in the Basic IDE dialog editor shows controls to enable and manage localizable dialogs. By default, any dialog that you create only contains string resources for one language. You may want to create dialogs that automatically show localized strings according to the user's language settings.current language listbox Select the language for the strings that you want to edit. Click the Manage Languages icon to add languages.Manage Language icon is in sbasic/shared/02/20000000.xhppresent languages box in manage user interface language dialog -Click a language, then click Default to set the language as default, or click Delete to remove the language from the list.add -Opens a dialog where you can add a language to the list.delete -Select a language in the list and click Delete to remove that language. When you remove all languages, the string resources for localizable dialogs are removed from all dialogs in the current library.default -Select a language in the list and click Default to set the language as default language.set default user interface dialog -The default language will be used as a source for all other language strings.available languages box +Click a language, then click Default to set the language as default, or click Delete to remove the language from the list.add +Opens a dialog where you can add a language to the list.delete +Select a language in the list and click Delete to remove that language. When you remove all languages, the string resources for localizable dialogs are removed from all dialogs in the current library.default +Select a language in the list and click Default to set the language as default language.set default user interface dialog +The default language will be used as a source for all other language strings.available languages box Add UI languages for your dialog strings. To enable localizable dialogs diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/01050300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/01050300.xhp index 137537170d..0393bf2b1d 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/01050300.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/01050300.xhp @@ -49,20 +49,20 @@ Manage Breakpoints Specifies the options for breakpoints. - + Breakpoints Enter the line number for a new breakpoint, then click New. - + Active Activates or deactivates the current breakpoint. - + Pass Count Specify the number of loops to perform before the breakpoint takes effect. - + New Creates a breakpoint on the line number specified. - + Delete Deletes the selected breakpoint. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/01170101.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/01170101.xhp index fe1b244344..11d294bea8 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/01170101.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/01170101.xhp @@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ Define the properties for the selected control or dialog. The available properties depend on the type of control selected. The following properties therefore are not available for every type of control.
-Alignment +Alignment Specify the alignment option for the selected control.
@@ -191,7 +191,7 @@
-Editable +Editable Specifies whether the nodes of the tree control are editable. The default value is FALSE.
@@ -216,7 +216,7 @@ Specify the increment and decrement interval for spin button controls.
-Invokes stop mode editing +Invokes stop mode editing Specifies what happens when editing is interrupted by selecting another node in the tree, a change in the tree's data, or by some other means. Setting this property to TRUE causes the changes to be automatically saved when editing is interrupted. FALSE means that editing is canceled and changes are lost. The default value is FALSE. @@ -315,7 +315,7 @@ Repeats trigger events when you keep the mouse button pressed on a control such as a spin button.
-Root displayedsee http://specs.openoffice.org/appwide/dialog_ide/New_Tree_Control_in_IDE.odt +Root displayedsee http://specs.openoffice.org/appwide/dialog_ide/New_Tree_Control_in_IDE.odt Specifies if the root node of the tree control is displayed. If Root displayed is set to FALSE, the root node of a model is no longer a valid node for the tree control and can't be used with any method of XTreeControl. The default value is TRUE. @@ -349,13 +349,13 @@ Specify the minimum value of a scrollbar control.
-Show handles +Show handles Specifies whether the handles of the nodes should be displayed. The handles are dotted lines that visualize the hierarchy of the tree control. The default value is TRUE.
-Show root handles +Show root handles Specifies whether the handles of the nodes should also be displayed at root level. The default value is TRUE.
@@ -366,7 +366,7 @@ Click the item or items that you want to select. To select more than one item, ensure that the Multiselection option is selected.
-Selection typesee http://specs.openoffice.org/appwide/dialog_ide/New_Tree_Control_in_IDE.odt +Selection typesee http://specs.openoffice.org/appwide/dialog_ide/New_Tree_Control_in_IDE.odt Specifies the selection mode that is enabled for this tree control.
UFI: removed help idSpin Button diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/main0211.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/main0211.xhp index 9c51ab843f..d8ba1d0f56 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/main0211.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/main0211.xhp @@ -44,7 +44,7 @@
- toolbars; Basic IDEmacro toolbarMacro Toolbar + toolbars; Basic IDEmacro toolbarMacro Toolbar The Macro Toolbar contains commands to create, edit, and run macros.
diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02140600.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02140600.xhp index 25380d19c5..394982fc11 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02140600.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02140600.xhp @@ -55,30 +55,30 @@ To automatically continue a series using the assumed completion rules, choose the AutoFill option after opening the Fill Series dialog. Direction Determines the direction of series creation. - + Down Creates a downward series in the selected cell range for the column using the defined increment to the end value. - + Right Creates a series running from left to right within the selected cell range using the defined increment to the end value. - + Up Creates an upward series in the cell range of the column using the defined increment to the end value. - + Left Creates a series running from right to left in the selected cell range using the defined increment to the end value. Series Type Defines the series type. Choose between Linear, Growth, Date and AutoFill. - + Linear Creates a linear number series using the defined increment and end value. - + Growth Creates a growth series using the defined increment and end value. - + Date Creates a date series using the defined increment and end date. - + AutoFill Forms a series directly in the sheet. The AutoFill function takes account of customized lists. For example, by entering January in the first cell, the series is completed using the list defined under %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Sort Lists. AutoFill tries to complete a value series by using a defined pattern. The series 1,3,5 is automatically completed with 7,9,11,13, and so on. Date and time series are completed accordingly; for example, after 01.01.99 and 15.01.99, an interval of 14 days is used. @@ -87,25 +87,25 @@ Unit of Time In this area you can specify the desired unit of time. This area is only active if the Date option has been chosen in the Series type area. - + Day Use the Date series type and this option to create a series using seven days. - + Weekday Use the Date series type and this option to create a series of five day sets. - + Month Use the Date series type and this option to form a series from the names or abbreviations of the months. - + Year Use the Date series type and this option to create a series of years. - + Start Value Determines the start value for the series. Use numbers, dates or times. - + End Value Determines the end value for the series. Use numbers, dates or times. - + Increment The term "increment" denotes the amount by which a given value increases. Determines the value by which the series of the selected type increases by each step. Entries can only be made if the linear, growth or date series types have been selected. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02150000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02150000.xhp index f30277b54b..e3d0a16727 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02150000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02150000.xhp @@ -60,21 +60,21 @@ Use Cut on the Standard bar to delete contents and formats without the dialog. Selection This area lists the options for deleting contents. -Delete All +Delete All Deletes all content from the selected cell range. -Texti50439 +Texti50439 Deletes text only. Formats, formulas, numbers and dates are not affected. -Numbers +Numbers Deletes numbers only. Formats and formulas remain unchanged. -Date & time +Date & time Deletes date and time values. Formats, text, numbers and formulas remain unchanged. -Formulas +Formulas Deletes formulas. Text, numbers, formats, dates and times remain unchanged. -Comments +Comments Deletes comments added to cells. All other elements remain unchanged. -Formats +Formats Deletes format attributes applied to cells. All cell content remains unchanged. -Objects +Objects Deletes objects. All cell content remains unchanged. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02160000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02160000.xhp index cf75986115..43ad731659 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02160000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02160000.xhp @@ -68,15 +68,15 @@ Selection This area contains options for specifying how sheets are displayed after deleting cells. - + Shift cells up Fills the space produced by the deleted cells with the cells underneath it. - + Shift cells left Fills the resulting space by the cells to the right of the deleted cells. - + @@ -84,7 +84,7 @@ Delete entire row(s) After selecting at least one cell, deletes the entire row from the sheet. - + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02180000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02180000.xhp index f1e4e16311..eb2afe4513 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02180000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02180000.xhp @@ -59,13 +59,13 @@
When you copy and paste cells containing date values between different spreadsheets, both spreadsheet documents must be set to the same date base. If date bases differ, the displayed date values will change! - + To Document Indicates where the current sheet is to be moved or copied to. Select new document if you want to create a new location for the sheet to be moved or copied. - + Insert Before The current sheet is moved or copied in front of the selected sheet. The move to end position option places the current sheet at the end. - + Copy Specifies that the sheet is to be copied. If the option is unmarked, the sheet is moved. Moving sheets is the default. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04020000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04020000.xhp index 93558010bd..31aaa6b9b4 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04020000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04020000.xhp @@ -58,21 +58,21 @@ This area contains the options available for inserting cells into a sheet. The cell quantity and position is defined by selecting a cell range in the sheet beforehand. -Shift cells down +Shift cells down Moves the contents of the selected range downward when cells are inserted. -Shift cells right +Shift cells right Moves the contents of the selected range to the right when cells are inserted. -Entire row +Entire row Inserts an entire row. The position of the row is determined by the selection on the sheet. The number of rows inserted depends on how many rows are selected. The contents of the original rows are moved downward. -Entire column +Entire column Inserts an entire column. The number of columns to be inserted is determined by the selected number of columns. The contents of the original columns are shifted to the right. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04050000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04050000.xhp index 78ad2f2957..ad772800dd 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04050000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04050000.xhp @@ -43,7 +43,7 @@ sheets;creating - + Insert Sheet @@ -54,34 +54,34 @@ Position Specifies where the new sheet is to be inserted into your document. - + Before current sheet Inserts a new sheet directly before the current sheet. - + After current sheet Inserts a new sheet directly after the current sheet. Create Specifies whether a new sheet or an existing sheet is inserted into the document. - + Create Creates a new sheet. Enter a sheet name in the Name field. Allowed characters are letters, numbers, spaces, and the underline character. - + No. of Sheets Specifies the number of sheets to be created. - + Name Specifies the name of the new sheet. - + From File Inserts a sheet from an existing file into the current document. - + Browse Opens a dialog for selecting a file. - + Available Sheets If you selected a file by using the Browse button, the sheets contained in it are displayed in the list box. The file path is displayed below this box. Select the sheet to be inserted from the list box. - + Link Select to insert the sheet as a link instead as a copy. The links can be updated to show the current contents. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060000.xhp index 9678b90697..376030c483 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060000.xhp @@ -60,14 +60,14 @@ The Function Wizard has two tabs: Functions is used to create formulas, and Structure is used to check the formula build. Functions Tab List of Categories and Functions - + Category Lists all the categories to which the different functions are assigned. Select a category to view the appropriate functions in the list field below. Select "All" to view all functions in alphabetical order, irrespective of category. "Last Used" lists the functions you have most recently used. - + Function Displays the functions found under the selected category. Double-click to select a function. A single-click displays a short function description. - + Array Specifies that the selected function is inserted into the selected cell range as an array formula. Array formulas operate on multiple cells. Each cell in the array contains the formula, not as a copy but as a common formula shared by all matrix cells. The Array option is identical to the CommandCtrl+Shift+Enter command, which is used to enter and confirm formulas in the sheet. The formula is inserted as a matrix formula indicated by two braces { }. @@ -78,25 +78,25 @@ Function Result As soon you enter arguments in the function, the result is calculated. This preview informs you if the calculation can be carried out with the arguments given. If the arguments result in an error, the corresponding error code is displayed. The required arguments are indicated by names in bold print. - - - - + + + + f(x) (depending on the selected function) Allows you to access a subordinate level of the Function Wizard in order to nest another function within the function, instead of a value or reference. - + Argument/Parameter/Cell Reference (depending on the selected function) The number of visible text fields depends on the function. Enter arguments either directly into the argument fields or by clicking a cell in the table. Result Displays the calculation result or an error message. - + Formula Displays the created formula. Type your entries directly, or create the formula using the wizard. - + Back Moves the focus back through the formula components, marking them as it does so. To select a single function from a complex formula consisting of several functions, double-click the function in the formula window. - + Next Moves forward through the formula components in the formula window. This button can also be used to assign functions to the formula. If you select a function and click the Next button, the selection appears in the formula window. Double-click a function in the selection window to transfer it to the formula window. @@ -108,7 +108,7 @@ Structure tab On this page, you can view the structure of the function. If you start the Function Wizard while the cell cursor is positioned in a cell that already contains a function, the Structure tab is opened and shows the composition of the current formula. - + Structure Displays a hierarchical representation of the current function. You can hide or show the arguments by a click on the plus or minus sign in front. Blue dots denote correctly entered arguments. Red dots indicate incorrect data types. For example: if the SUM function has one argument entered as text, this is highlighted in red as SUM only permits number entries. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04070100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04070100.xhp index 000d38c154..a52ede763b 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04070100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04070100.xhp @@ -51,32 +51,32 @@ The Sheet Area box on the Formula bar contains a list of defined names for the ranges. Click a name from this box to highlight the corresponding reference on the spreadsheet. Names given formulas or parts of a formula are not listed here. - + Name Enter the name of the area for which you want to define a reference. All area names already defined in the spreadsheet are listed in the text field below. If you click a name on the list, the corresponding reference in the document will be shown with a blue frame. If multiple cell ranges belong to the same area name, they are displayed with different colored frames. - + Assigned to The reference of the selected area name is shown here as an absolute value. To insert a new area reference, place the cursor in this field and use your mouse to select the desired area in any sheet of your spreadsheet document. - + More Allows you to specify the Area type (optional) for the reference. Area type Defines additional options related to the type of reference area. - + Print range Defines the area as a print range. - + Filter Defines the selected area to be used in an advanced filter. - + Repeat column Defines the area as a repeating column. - + Repeat row Defines the area as a repeating row. - + Add/Modify Click the Add button to add the defined name to the list. Click the Modify button to enter another name for an already existing name selected from the list. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04070200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04070200.xhp index 186f608a3b..9fcb1674b8 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04070200.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04070200.xhp @@ -55,10 +55,10 @@
- + Insert name Changed in #102078# Lists all defined cell areas. Double-click an entry to insert the named area into the active sheet at the current cursor position. - + Insert All Inserts a list of all named areas and the corresponding cell references at the current cursor position. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04070300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04070300.xhp index 762369332d..141243f5c7 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04070300.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04070300.xhp @@ -57,16 +57,16 @@ Select the area containing all the ranges that you want to name. Then choose Insert - Names - Create. This opens the Create Names dialog, from which you can select the naming options that you want. Create names from Defines which part of the spreadsheet is to be used for creating the name. - + Top row Creates the range names from the header row of the selected range. Each column receives a separated name and cell reference. - + Left Column Creates the range names from the entries in the first column of the selected sheet range. Each row receives a separated name and cell reference. - + Bottom row Creates the range names from the entries in the last row of the selected sheet range. Each column receives a separated name and cell reference. - + Right Column Creates the range names from the entries in the last column of the selected sheet range. Each row receives a separated name and cell reference. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04070400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04070400.xhp index 5a69e9fc00..f6b0ebc824 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04070400.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04070400.xhp @@ -56,22 +56,22 @@ The cell contents of a label range can be used like names in formulas - $[officename] recognizes these names in the same manner that it does the predefined names of the weekdays and months. These names are automatically completed when typed into a formula. In addition, the names defined by label ranges will have priority over names defined by automatically generated ranges. You can set label ranges that contain the same labels on different sheets. $[officename] first searches the label ranges of the current sheet and, following a failed search, the ranges of other sheets. - - + + Range Displays the cell reference of each label range. In order to remove a label range from the list box, select it and then click Delete. - + Contains column labels Includes column labels in the current label range. - + Contains row labels Includes row labels in the current label range. - + For data range Sets the data range for which the selected label range is valid. To modify it, click in the sheet and select another range with the mouse. - + Add Adds the current label range to the list. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04080000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04080000.xhp index 13e1a4f289..8d98ee655b 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04080000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04080000.xhp @@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ function list window inserting functions; function list window - + Function List @@ -57,13 +57,13 @@ The Function List window is a resizable dockable window. Use it to quickly enter functions in the spreadsheet. By double-clicking an entry in the functions list, the respective function is directly inserted with all parameters. - + Category List - + Function List Displays the available functions. When you select a function, the area below the list box displays a short description. To insert the selected function double-click it or click the Insert Function into calculation sheet icon. - + Insert Function into calculation sheet diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04090000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04090000.xhp index 33d32d1017..32fc1804b3 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04090000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04090000.xhp @@ -44,7 +44,7 @@
- + Locate the file containing the data you want to insert. @@ -59,11 +59,11 @@ URL of external data source. Enter the URL or the file name that contains the data that you want to insert, and then press Enter.only after Enter the URL will be requested from the net. - + Available tables/ranges Select the table or the data range that you want to insert. - - + + Update every Enter the number of seconds to wait before the external data are reloaded into the current document. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05020600.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05020600.xhp index f7e5e8017a..ff1b24a58a 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05020600.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05020600.xhp @@ -52,19 +52,19 @@
Protection - + Hide all Hides formulas and contents of the selected cells. - + Protected Prevents the selected cells from being modified. This cell protection only takes effect if you also protect the spreadsheet (Tools - Protect Document - Sheet). - + Hide formula Hides formulas in the selected cells. Print Defines print options for the sheet. - + Hide when printing Keeps the selected cells from being printed. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05030200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05030200.xhp index a51aea827a..b48d043e19 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05030200.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05030200.xhp @@ -55,10 +55,10 @@
- + Add Sets additional spacing between the largest character in a row and the cell boundaries. - + Default value Restores the default value for the optimal row height. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05040200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05040200.xhp index 89b9883593..845673d0ac 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05040200.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05040200.xhp @@ -57,10 +57,10 @@
- + Add Defines additional spacing between the longest entry in a column and the vertical column borders. - + Default value Defines the optimal column width in order to display the entire contents of the column. The additional spacing for the optimal column width is preset to 0.1 in. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05050100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05050100.xhp index df262cb4c3..dd1f8aba52 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05050100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05050100.xhp @@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ changing; sheet names sheets; renaming - + @@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ - + Name Enter a new name for the sheet here. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05050300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05050300.xhp index d12efaa328..cb428e585c 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05050300.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05050300.xhp @@ -49,7 +49,7 @@
- Hidden sheets + Hidden sheets Displays a list of all hidden sheets in your spreadsheet document. To show a certain sheet, click the corresponding entry on the list and confirm with OK. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05070500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05070500.xhp index 8e5e10a79c..bd072647d1 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05070500.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05070500.xhp @@ -55,38 +55,38 @@ Print Defines which elements of the spreadsheet are to be printed. -Column and row headers +Column and row headers Specifies whether you want the column and row headers to be printed. -Grid +Grid Prints out the borders of the individual cells as a grid. For the view on screen, make your choice under %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - View - Grid lines. -Comments +Comments Prints the comments defined in your spreadsheet. They will be printed on a separate page, along with the corresponding cell reference. -Objects/graphics +Objects/graphics Includes all inserted objects (if printable) and graphics with the printed document. -Charts +Charts Prints the charts that have been inserted into your spreadsheet. -Drawing Objects +Drawing Objects Includes all drawing objects in the printed document. -Formulas +Formulas Prints the formulas contained in the cells, instead of the results. -Zero Values +Zero Values Specifies that cells with a zero value are printed. Page Order Defines the order in which data in a sheet is numbered and printed when it does not fit on one printed page. -Top to bottom, then right +Top to bottom, then right Prints vertically from the left column to the bottom of the sheet. -Left to right, then down +Left to right, then down Prints horizontally from the top row of the sheet to the right column. -First page number +First page number Select this option if you want the first page to start with a number other than 1. -Enter the number of the first page. +Enter the number of the first page. Scale Defines a page scale for the printed spreadsheet. Scaling mode Select a scaling mode from the list box. Appropriate controls will be shown at the side of the list box. Reduce/enlarge printout Specifies a scaling factor to scale all printed pages. -Scaling factor +Scaling factor Enter a scaling factor. Factors less than 100 reduce the pages, higher factors enlarge the pages. Fit print range(s) to width/height Specifies the maximum number of pages horizontally (width) and vertically (height) on which every sheet with the current Page Style is to be printed. @@ -107,7 +107,7 @@ Enter the maximum number of pages to be printed vertically stacked. Fit print range(s) on number of pages Specifies the maximum number of pages on which every sheet with the current Page Style is to be printed. The scale will be reduced as necessary to fit the defined number of pages.UFI: fixes #112585# -Number of pages +Number of pages Enter the maximum number of pages to be printed. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05080300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05080300.xhp index bd107d4d5e..39040a5280 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05080300.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05080300.xhp @@ -53,21 +53,21 @@ - - + + Print range Allows you to modify a defined print range. Select -none- to remove a print range definition for the current spreadsheet. Select -entire sheet- to set the current sheet as a print range. Select -selection- to define the selected area of a spreadsheet as the print range. By selecting -user-defined-, you can define a print range that you have already defined using the Format - Print Ranges - Define command. If you have given a name to a range using the Insert - Names - Define command, this name will be displayed and can be selected from the list box. In the right-hand text box, you can enter a print range by reference or by name. If the cursor is in the Print range text box, you can also select the print range in the spreadsheet with your mouse. - - + + Rows to repeat Choose one or more rows to print on every page. In the right text box enter the row reference, for example, "1" or "$1" or "$2:$3". The list box displays -user defined-. You can also select -none- to remove a defined repeating row. You can also define repeating rows by dragging the mouse in the spreadsheet, if the cursor is in the Rows to repeat text field in the dialog. - - + + Columns to repeat Choose one or more columns to print on every page. In the right text box enter the column reference, for example, "A" or "AB" or "$C:$E". The list box then displays -user defined-. You can also select -none- to remove a defined repeating column. You can also define repeating columns by dragging the mouse in the spreadsheet, if the cursor is in the Columns to repeat text field in the dialog. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05110000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05110000.xhp index 0e8560a7b4..3b922e4823 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05110000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05110000.xhp @@ -50,37 +50,37 @@
- + Format Choose a predefined AutoFormat to apply to a selected area in your sheet. - + Add Allows you to add the current formatting of a range of at least 4 x 4 cells to the list of predefined AutoFormats. The Add AutoFormat dialog then appears. Enter a name and click OK. - + More Opens the Formatting section, which displays the formatting overrides that can be applied to the spreadsheet. Deselecting an option keeps the format of the current spreadsheet for that format type. Formatting In this section you can select or deselect the available formatting options. If you want to keep any of the settings currently in your spreadsheet, deselect the corresponding option. - + Number format When marked, specifies that you want to retain the number format of the selected format. - + Borders When marked, specifies that you want to retain the border of the selected format. - + Font When marked, specifies that you want to retain the font of the selected format. - + Pattern When marked, specifies that you want to retain the pattern of the selected format. - + Alignment When marked, specifies that you want to retain the alignment of the selected format. - + AutoFit width and height When marked, specifies that you want to retain the width and height of the selected cells of the selected format. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05120000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05120000.xhp index fe6bde6aeb..5961133feb 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05120000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05120000.xhp @@ -52,25 +52,25 @@ To apply conditional formatting, AutoCalculate must be enabled. Choose Tools - Cell Contents - AutoCalculate (you see a check mark next to the command when AutoCalculate is enabled). conditional formatting; conditions - - - + + + Condition 1/2/3 Mark the boxes corresponding to each condition and enter the corresponding condition. To close the dialog, click OK. - - - + + + Cell Value / Formula Specifies if conditional formatting is dependent on a cell value or a formula. If you select a formula as a reference, the Cell Value Condition box is displayed to the right of the Cell value/Formula field. If the condition is "Formula is", enter a cell reference. If the cell reference is a value other than zero, the condition matches. - - - + + + Cell Value Condition Choose a condition for the format to be applied to the selected cells. - - - + + + Cell Style Choose the style to be applied if the specified condition matches. @@ -78,12 +78,12 @@ New Style If you haven't already defined a style to be used, you can click New Style to open the Organizer tab page of the Cell Style dialog. Define a new style there and click OK. - - - - - - + + + + + + Parameter field Enter a reference, value or formula. Enter a reference, value or formula in the parameter field, or in both parameter fields if you have selected a condition that requires two parameters. You can also enter formulas containing relative references. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06040000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06040000.xhp index 7d1993fffa..6c6c8c5d76 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06040000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06040000.xhp @@ -51,13 +51,13 @@ Default In this section, you can define the variables in your formula. - + Formula cell In the formula cell, enter the reference of the cell which contains the formula. It contains the current cell reference. Click another cell in the sheet to apply its reference to the text box. - + Target value Specifies the value you want to achieve as a new result. - + Variable cell Specifies the reference for the cell that contains the value you want to adjust in order to reach the target. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06050000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06050000.xhp index e21672c52c..3e87974837 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06050000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06050000.xhp @@ -55,24 +55,24 @@ dedr: reviewed - + Name of scenario Defines the name for the scenario. Use a clear and unique name so you can easily identify the scenario. You can also modify a scenario name in the Navigator through the Properties context menu command. - + Comment Specifies additional information about the scenario. This information will be displayed in the Navigator when you click the Scenarios icon and select the desired scenario. You can also modify this information in the Navigator through the Properties context menu command. Settings This section is used to define some of the settings used in the scenario display. - - + + Display borderUFI: #i38688# Highlights the scenario in your table with a border. The color for the border is specified in the field to the right of this option. The border will have a title bar displaying the name of the last scenario. The button on the right of the scenario border offers you an overview of all the scenarios in this area, if several have been defined. You can choose any of the scenarios from this list without restrictions. - + Copy back Copies the values of cells that you change into the active scenario. If you do not select this option, the scenario is not changed when you change cell values. The behavior of the Copy back setting depends on the cell protection, the sheet protection, and the Prevent changes settings. - + Copy entire sheet Copies the entire sheet into an additional scenario sheet. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12010000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12010000.xhp index 90c05ed505..8412317404 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12010000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12010000.xhp @@ -50,18 +50,18 @@
- + Name Enter a name for the database range that you want to define, or select an existing name from the list. - + Range Displays the selected cell range. - + Add/Modify Adds the selected cell range to the database range list, or modifies an existing database range. - + More >> Shows additional options. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12010100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12010100.xhp index f212329415..c79b000084 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12010100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12010100.xhp @@ -44,13 +44,13 @@ Options - Contains column labels + Contains column labels Selected cell ranges contains labels. - Insert or delete cells + Insert or delete cells Automatically inserts new rows and columns into the database range in your document when new records are added to the database. To manually update the database range, choose Data - Refresh Range. - Keep formatting + Keep formatting Applies the existing cell format of headers and first data row to the whole database range. - Don't save imported data + Don't save imported data Only saves a reference to the database, and not the contents of the cells. Source: Displays information about the current database source and any existing operators. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12030100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12030100.xhp index 68852f11b4..09d25d3ca0 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12030100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12030100.xhp @@ -53,23 +53,23 @@
-Sort by +Sort by Select the column that you want to use as the primary sort key. -Ascending +Ascending Sorts the selection from the lowest value to the highest value. The sorting rules are given by the locale. You can define the sort rules on Data - Sort - Options. You define the default on %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Languages. -Descending +Descending Sorts the selection from the highest value to the lowest value. You can define the sort rules on Data - Sort - Options. You define the default on %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Languages. -Then by +Then by Select the column that you want to use as the secondary sort key. -Ascending +Ascending Sorts the selection from the lowest value to the highest value. You can define the sort rules on Data - Sort - Options. You define the default on %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language settings - Languages. -Descending +Descending Sorts the selection from the highest value to the lowest value. You can define the sort rules on Data - Sort - Options. You define the default on %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language settings - Languages. -Then by +Then by Select the column that you want to use as the third sort key. -Ascending +Ascending Sorts the selection from the lowest value to the highest value. You can define the sort rules on Data - Sort - Options. You define the default on %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language settings - Languages. -Descending +Descending Sorts the selection from the highest value to the lowest value. You can define the sort rules on Data - Sort - Options. You define the default on %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language settings - Languages. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12030200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12030200.xhp index 0d2ad0c9cb..d7d8830125 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12030200.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12030200.xhp @@ -62,43 +62,43 @@ YJ: checked again
- + Case Sensitivity Sorts first by uppercase letters and then by lowercase letters. For Asian languages, special handling applies. Note for Asian languages: Check Case Sensitivity to apply multi-level collation. With multi-level collation, entries are first compared in their primitive forms with their cases and diacritics ignored. If they evaluate as the same, their diacritics are taken into account for the second-level comparison. If they still evaluate as the same, their cases, character widths, and Japanese Kana difference are considered for the third-level comparison.UFI: see #112590# and #112507# - + Range contains column/row labels Omits the first row or the first column in the selection from the sort. The Direction setting at the bottom of the dialog defines the name and function of this check box. - + Include formats Preserves the current cell formatting.<BOOKMARK branch="hid/SC:CHECKBOX:RID_SCPAGE_SORT_OPTIONS:BTN_NATURALSORT" id="bm_id3149412" localize="false"/>Enable natural sort<AVIS hid="."> Natural sort is a sort algorithm that sorts string-prefixed numbers based on the value of the numerical element in each sorted number.</AVIS>When this option is not checked, a series of values such as Number1, Number2, Number3, ..., Number19, Number20, Number21 will be sorted as Number1, Number11, Number12, ..., Number19, Number2, Number20, Number21, Number3, and so on. With the natural sort feature enabled, the result will be Number1, Number2, Number3, ..., Number19, Number20, Number21. - + Copy sort results to: Copies the sorted list to the cell range that you specify. - + Sort results Select a named cell range where you want to display the sorted list, or enter a cell range in the input box. - + Sort results Enter the cell range where you want to display the sorted list, or select a named range from the list. - + Custom sort order Click here and then select the custom sort order that you want. - + Custom sort order Select the custom sort order that you want to apply. To define a custom sort order, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Sort Lists . Language - + Language Select the language for the sorting rules. - + Options Select a sorting option for the language. For example, select the "phonebook" option for German to include the umlaut special character in the sorting. Direction - + Top to Bottom (Sort Rows) Sorts rows by the values in the active columns of the selected range. - + Left to Right (Sort Columns) Sorts columns by the values in the active rows of the selected range. Data area diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12040201.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12040201.xhp index dea806d13c..874996fe3e 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12040201.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12040201.xhp @@ -42,42 +42,42 @@ More - - + + Shows additional filter options.
Options - - + + Case sensitive Distinguishes between uppercase and lowercase letters when filtering the data. - - + + Range contains column labels Includes the column labels in the first row of a cell range. - - - - - - + + + + + + Copy results to Select the check box, and then select the cell range where you want to display the filter results. You can also select a named range from the list. - - + + Regular expression Allows you to use wildcards in the filter definition. For a list of the regular expressions that $[officename] supports, click here. If the Regular Expressions check box is selected, you can use regular expressions in the Value field if the Condition list box is set to '=' EQUAL or '<>' UNEQUAL. This also applies to the respective cells that you reference for an advanced filter. - - + + No duplication Excludes duplicate rows in the list of filtered data. - - + + Keep filter criteria Select the Copy results to check box, and then specify the destination range where you want to display the filtered data. If this box is checked, the destination range remains linked to the source range. You must have defined the source range under Data - Define range as a database range. Following this, you can reapply the defined filter at any time as follows: click into the source range, then choose Data - Refresh Range. Data range diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12040300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12040300.xhp index caa3965d50..8d337cace9 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12040300.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12040300.xhp @@ -52,8 +52,8 @@ - - + + Read filter criteria from Select the named range, or enter the cell range that contains the filter criteria that you want to use. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12050200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12050200.xhp index 9ce3f6e0d0..53781c09b6 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12050200.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12050200.xhp @@ -52,21 +52,21 @@
-Page break between groups +Page break between groups Inserts a new page after each group of subtotaled data. -Case sensitive +Case sensitive Recalculates subtotals when you change the case of a data label. -Pre-sort area according to groups +Pre-sort area according to groups Sorts the area that you selected in the Group by box of the Group tabs according to the columns that you selected. Sort -Include formats +Include formats Considers formatting attributes when sorting. - -Custom sort order + +Custom sort order Uses a custom sorting order that you defined in the Options dialog box at %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Sort Lists. -Ascending +Ascending Sorts beginning with the lowest value. You can define the sort rules on Data - Sort - Options. You define the default on Tools - Options - Language settings - Languages. -Descending +Descending Sorts beginning with the highest value. You can define the sort rules on Data - Sort - Options. You define the default on Tools - Options - Language settings - Languages. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12060000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12060000.xhp index 8bff0c78ff..88551138f9 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12060000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12060000.xhp @@ -53,13 +53,13 @@ The Row or Column box must contain a reference to the first cell of the selected range. If you export a spreadsheet containing multiple operations to Microsoft Excel, the location of the cells containing the formula must be fully defined relative to the data range. Defaults - + Formulas Enter the cell references for the cells containing the formulas that you want to use in the multiple operation. - + Row Enter the input cell reference that you want to use as a variable for the rows in the data table. - + Column Enter the input cell reference that you want to use as a variable for the columns in the data table. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12070000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12070000.xhp index 7a8e2d9fce..782d21ec4b 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12070000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12070000.xhp @@ -49,26 +49,26 @@
- + Function Select the function that you want to use to consolidate the data. - + Consolidation ranges Displays the cell ranges that you want to consolidate. - - + + Source data range Specifies the cell range that you want to consolidate with the cell ranges listed in the Consolidation ranges box. Select a cell range in a sheet, and then click Add. You can also select a the name of a predefined cell from the Source data range list. - - + + Copy results to Displays the first cell in the range where the consolidation results will be displayed. - + Add Adds the cell range specified in the Source data range box to the Consolidation ranges box. - + More >> Shows additional options. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12070100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12070100.xhp index 382804fb2e..72ecc5a254 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12070100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12070100.xhp @@ -46,12 +46,12 @@ Consolidate by Consolidate by Use this section if the cell ranges that you want to consolidate contain labels. You only need to select these options if the consolidation ranges contain similar labels and the data arranged is arranged differently. - Row labels + Row labels Uses the row labels to arrange the consolidated data. - Column labels + Column labels Uses the column labels to arrange the consolidated data. Options - Link to source data + Link to source data Links the data in the consolidation range to the source data, and automatically updates the results of the consolidation when the source data is changed. More << Hides the additional options. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12080300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12080300.xhp index 71e95db7ad..19ff703dc2 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12080300.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12080300.xhp @@ -44,7 +44,7 @@
- + Group
Defines the selected cell range as a group of rows or columns. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090100.xhp index ae39206f3c..ecf43d3bbd 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090100.xhp @@ -54,14 +54,14 @@ Selection Select a data source for the DataPilot table. - + Current Selection Uses the selected cells as the data source for the DataPilot table. The data columns in the DataPilot table use the same number format as the first data row in the current selection. - + Data source registered in $[officename] Uses a table or query in a database that is registered in $[officename] as the data source for the DataPilot table. - + External source/interface Opens the External Source dialog where you can select the OLAP data source for the DataPilot table. DataPilot dialog diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090101.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090101.xhp index 14e2da8b2e..674a5d2441 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090101.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090101.xhp @@ -52,13 +52,13 @@ Selection You can only select databases that are registered in %PRODUCTNAME. To register a data source, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Base - Databases. - + Database Select the database that contains the data source that you want to use. - + Data source Select the data source that you want to use. - + Type Click the source type of for the selected data source. You can choose from four source types: "Table", "Query" and "SQL" or SQL (Native).
diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090102.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090102.xhp index 47127050f1..c81fedabde 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090102.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090102.xhp @@ -63,51 +63,51 @@ To define the layout of a DataPilot table, drag and drop data field buttons onto the Page Fields, Row Fields, Column Fields, and Data Fields areas. You can also use drag and drop to rearrange the data fields on a DataPilot table. $[officename] automatically adds a caption to buttons that are dragged into the Data Fields area. The caption contains the name of the data field as well as the formula that created the data. To change the function that is used by a data field, double-click a button in the Data Fields area to open the Data Field dialog. You can also double-click buttons in the Row Fields or Column Fields areas. - + Remove Removes the selected data field from the table layout. - + Options Opens the Data Field dialog where you can change the function that is associated with the selected field. - + More Displays or hides additional options for defining the DataPilot table. Result Specify the settings for displaying the results of the DataPilot table. - - + + Selection from Select the area that contains the data for the current datapilot table. - - + + Results to Select the area where you want to display the results of the DataPilot table. If the selected area contains data, the DataPilot overwrites the data. To prevent the loss of existing data, let the DataPilot automatically select the area to display the results. - + Ignore empty rows Ignores empty fields in the data source. - + Identify categories Automatically assigns rows without labels to the category of the row above.i93137 - + Total columns Calculates and displays the grand total of the column calculation. - + Total rows Calculates and displays the grand total of the row calculation. - + Add filter Adds a Filter button to DataPilot tables that are based on spreadsheet data. Opens the Filter dialog. - + Enable drill to details Select this check box and double-click an item label in the table to show or hide details for the item. Clear this check box and double-click a cell in the table to edit the contents of the cell. To examine details inside a DataPilot table @@ -121,7 +121,7 @@ If you double-click a field which has adjacent fields at the same level, the Show Detail dialog opens: - + Show Detail Choose the field that you want to view the details for.
diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090103.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090103.xhp index fee06503c0..c52b9b9663 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090103.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090103.xhp @@ -47,11 +47,11 @@ Set the filtering options for the data. Filter Criteria You can define a default filter for the data by filtering, for example, field names, using a combination of logical expressions arguments. - Operator + Operator Select a logical operator for the filter. - Field name + Field name Select the field that you want to use in the filter. If field names are not available, the column labels are listed. - Condition + Condition Select an operator to compare the Field name and Value entries. The following operators are available:
@@ -116,9 +116,9 @@
- Value + Value Select the value that you want to compare to the selected field. - More>> + More>> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090104.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090104.xhp index b179157087..8dbc35cbcb 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090104.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090104.xhp @@ -47,12 +47,12 @@ Options Displays or hides additional filtering options. Options - Case sensitive + Case sensitive Distinguishes between uppercase and lowercase letters. - Regular Expression + Regular Expression Allows you to use wildcards in the filter definition. If the Regular Expression check box is selected, you can use EQUAL (=) and NOT EQUAL (<>) also in comparisons. You can also use the following functions: DCOUNTA, DGET, MATCH, COUNTIF, SUMIF, LOOKUP, VLOOKUP and HLOOKUP. - Unique records only + Unique records only Excludes duplicate rows in the list of filtered data. Data area Displays the name of the filtered data area in the table. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090105.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090105.xhp index fbb2ded83f..30d5b2cda4 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090105.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090105.xhp @@ -51,34 +51,34 @@ YJ: checked The contents of this dialog is different for data fields in the Data area, and data fields in the Row or Column area of the DataPilot dialog. Subtotals Specify the subtotals that you want to calculate. - + None Does not calculate subtotals. - + Automatic Automatically calculates subtotals. - + User-defined Select this option, and then click the type of subtotal that you want to calculate in the list. - - + + Function Click the type of subtotal that you want to calculate. This option is only available if the User-defined option is selected. - + Show elements without data Includes empty columns and rows in the results table. Name: Lists the name of the selected data field. - + More Expands or reduces the dialog. The More button is visible for data fields only. - + Options Opens the Data Field Options dialog. The Options button is visible for column, row, or page fields only. If the dialog is expanded by the More button, the following items are added to the dialog: Displayed value For each data field, you can select the type of display. For some types you can select additional information for a base field and a base item. - + Type Select the type of calculating of the displayed value for the data field. @@ -174,10 +174,10 @@ YJ: checked
- + Base field Select the field from which the respective value is taken as base for the calculation. - + Base item Select the item of the base field from which the respective value is taken as base for the calculation. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090106.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090106.xhp index 236b99b568..2cab271734 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090106.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090106.xhp @@ -49,33 +49,33 @@ data field options for Data Pilot mw changed "hiding..." entryData Field Options You can specify additional options for column, row, and page data fields in the DataPilot. -Sort by +Sort by Select the data field that you want to sort columns or rows by. -Ascending +Ascending Sorts the values from the lowest value to the highest value. If the selected field is the field for which the dialog was opened, the items are sorted by name. If a data field was selected, the items are sorted by the resultant value of the selected data field. -Descending +Descending Sorts the values descending from the highest value to the lowest value. If the selected field is the field for which the dialog was opened, the items are sorted by name. If a data field was selected, the items are sorted by the resultant value of the selected data field. -Manual +Manual Sorts values alphabetically.UFI: see spec doc. Currently set to alphabetically. Display options You can specify the display options for all row fields except for the last, innermost row field. -Layout +Layout Select the layout mode for the field in the list box. -Empty line after each item +Empty line after each item Adds an empty row after the data for each item in the DataPilot table. Show automatically Displays the top or bottom nn items when you sort by a specified field. -Show +Show Turns on the automatic show feature. -items +items Enter the maximum number of items that you want to show automatically. -From +From Shows the top or bottom items in the specified sort order. -Using field +Using field Select the data field that you want to sort the data by. Hide items Select the items that you want to hide from the calculations. -Hierarchy +Hierarchy Select the hierarchy that you want to use. The DataPilot must be based on an external source data that contains data hierarchies. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12120100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12120100.xhp index 657f9ddd7a..632102dfc2 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12120100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12120100.xhp @@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ YJ: checked
selection lists;validity UFI added index entry for new list feature. Guide needed. MW changed index entry - + Criteria Specify the validation rules for the selected cell(s).
@@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ YJ: checked For example, you can define criteria such as: "Numbers between 1 and 10" or "Texts that are no more than 20 characters". - + Allow Click a validation option for the selected cell(s). The following conditions are available: @@ -136,7 +136,7 @@ YJ: checked - + Allow blank cells In conjunction with Tools - Detective - Mark invalid Data, this defines that blank cells are shown as invalid data (disabled) or not (enabled). @@ -151,15 +151,15 @@ YJ: checked Entries Enter the entries that will be valid values or text strings. - + Data Select the comparative operator that you want to use. The available operators depend on what you selected in the Allow box. If you select "between" or "not between", the Minimum and Maximum input boxes appear. Otherwise, only the Minimum, the Maximum, or the Value input boxes appear. Value Enter the value for the data validation option that you selected in the Allow box. - + Minimum Enter the minimum value for the data validation option that you selected in the Allow box. - + Maximum Enter the maximum value for the data validation option that you selected in the Allow box. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12120200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12120200.xhp index 1282c7a6cc..32b2d77e57 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12120200.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12120200.xhp @@ -44,22 +44,22 @@
- + Input Help Enter the message that you want to display when the cell or cell range is selected in the sheet.
- + Show input help when cell is selected Displays the message that you enter in the Contents box when the cell or cell range is selected in the sheet. If you enter text in the Contents box of this dialog, and then select and clear this check box, the text will be lost. Contents - + Title Enter the title that you want to display when the cell or cell range is selected. - + Input help Enter the message that you want to display when the cell or cell range is selected. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12120300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12120300.xhp index 12e0229a76..2533ac67b9 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12120300.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12120300.xhp @@ -44,7 +44,7 @@
- + Error Alert Define the error message that is displayed when invalid data is entered in a cell.
@@ -52,21 +52,21 @@
- + Show error message when invalid values are entered. Displays the error message that you enter in the Contents area when invalid data is entered in a cell. If unchecked, the message is displayed to prevent an invalid entry. In both cases, if you select "Stop", the invalid entry is deleted and the previous value is reentered in the cell. The same applies if you close the "Warning" and "Information" dialogs by clicking the Cancel button. If you close the dialogs with the OK button, the invalid entry is not deleted. Contents - + Action Select the action that you want to occur when invalid data is entered in a cell. The "Stop" action rejects the invalid entry and displays a dialog that you have to close by clicking OK. The "Warning" and "Information" actions display a dialog that can be closed by clicking OK or Cancel. The invalid entry is only rejected when you click Cancel. - + Browse Opens the Macro dialog where you can select the macro that is executed when invalid data is entered in a cell. The macro is executed after the error message is displayed. - + Title Enter the title of the macro or the error message that you want to display when invalid data is entered in a cell. - + Error message Enter the message that you want to display when invalid data is entered in a cell.
diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0202.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0202.xhp index dd6c569e48..338b0fa2ab 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0202.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0202.xhp @@ -46,7 +46,7 @@
- + Formatting Bar The Formatting bar contains basic commands for applying manually formatting.
diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0210.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0210.xhp index 2a3bd0c150..641cd6d405 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0210.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0210.xhp @@ -44,7 +44,7 @@
- + Page Preview Bar The Page Preview Bar is displayed when you choose File - Page Preview. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0218.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0218.xhp index 9f73693fd3..a7726a3c4d 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0218.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0218.xhp @@ -46,7 +46,7 @@
- + Tools Bar Use the Tools bar to access commonly used commands.
diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/04010000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/04010000.xhp index 3f79c5d42f..ff4e6e4f0b 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/04010000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/04010000.xhp @@ -49,23 +49,23 @@
- -Main Title + +Main Title Marking the Main Title option activates the main title. Enter the desired title in the corresponding text field. - -Subtitle + +Subtitle Marking the Subtitle option activates the subtitle. Enter the desired title in the corresponding text field. Click Title On/Off on the Formatting bar to show or hide the title and subtitle. - -X axis + +X axis Marking the X axis option activates the X axis title. Enter the desired title in the corresponding text field. - -Y axis + +Y axis Marking the Y axis option activates the Y axis title. Enter the desired title in the corresponding text field. - -Z axis + +Z axis Marking the Z axis option activates the Z axis title. Enter the desired title in the corresponding text field. This option is only available for 3-D charts. Click Axes Title On/Off on the Formatting bar to show or hide the axis labels. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/04020000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/04020000.xhp index 881ea35a3e..aaf53e799e 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/04020000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/04020000.xhp @@ -69,28 +69,28 @@
- + Display Specifies whether to display a legend for the chart. This option is only visible if you call the dialog by choosing Insert - Legend. Position Select the position for the legend: - - + + Left Positions the legend at the left of the chart. - - + + Top Positions the legend at the top of the chart. - - + + Right Positions the legend at the right of the chart. - - + + Bottom Positions the legend at the bottom of the chart. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/04030000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/04030000.xhp index 68c33ce303..715f63d73e 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/04030000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/04030000.xhp @@ -60,8 +60,8 @@
- - + + Number format Opens a dialog to select the number format. - - + + Show value as percentage @@ -79,14 +79,14 @@ Percentage format Opens a dialog to select the percentage format. - - + + Show category Shows the data point text labels. - - + + Show legend key diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/04040000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/04040000.xhp index da476ab884..25dd7d4e24 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/04040000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/04040000.xhp @@ -58,21 +58,21 @@
Major axis - + X axis Displays the X axis as a line with subdivisions. - + Y axis Displays the Y axis as a line with subdivisions. - + Z axis Displays the Z axis as a line with subdivisions. This axis can only be displayed in 3D charts. Secondary axis Use this area to assign a second axis to your chart. If a data series is already assigned to this axis, $[officename] automatically displays the axis and the label. You can turn off these settings later on. If no data has been assigned to this axis and you activate this area, the values of the primary Y axis are applied to the secondary axis. - + X axis Displays a secondary X axis in the chart. - + Y axis Displays a secondary Y axis in the chart. The major axis and the secondary axis can have different scaling. For example, you can scale one axis to 2 in. and the other to 1.5 in. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/04050000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/04050000.xhp index 582a853fbb..d1867d7d74 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/04050000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/04050000.xhp @@ -52,26 +52,26 @@ The Insert - Y Error Bars menu command is only available for 2D charts. Error category In the Error category area, you can choose different ways to display the error category. - - + + None Does not show any error bars. - - - - - - + + + + + + Constant value Displays constant values that you specify in the Parameters area. - - - - + + + + Percentage @@ -81,18 +81,18 @@ Functions Select a function to calculate the error bars. Standard Error: Displays the standard error. - - + + Variance: Displays the variance calculated from the number of data points and respective values. - - + + Standard Deviation: Displays the standard deviation (square root of the variance). - - - - + + + + Error Margin: Displays the highest error margin in percent according to the highest value of the data group. Set the percentage in the Parameters area. @@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ Same value for both Enable to use the positive error values also as negative error values. You can only change the value of the "Positve (+)" box. That value gets copied to the "Negative (-)" box automatically. - + Error indicator Specifies the error indicator. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/04060000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/04060000.xhp index 15536a17e1..e6a66e480d 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/04060000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/04060000.xhp @@ -54,30 +54,30 @@ Align data series to: In this area you can choose between two Y axis scaling modes. The axes can only be scaled and given properties separately. - + Primary Y axis This option is active as default. All data series are aligned to the primary Y axis. - + Secondary Y axis Changes the scaling of the Y axis. This axis is only visible when at least one data series is assigned to it and the axis view is active. Settings Define the settings for a bar chart in this area. Any changes apply to all data series of the chart, not to the selected data only. - + Spacing Defines the spacing between the columns in percent. The maximal spacing is 600%. - + Overlap Defines the necessary settings for overlapping data series. You can choose between -100 and +100%. - + Connection Lines For "stacked" and "percent" column (vertical bar) charts, mark this check box to connect the column layers that belong together with lines. - + Show bars side by side If two axes are shown in a bar chart, and some data series are attached to the first axis, while some other data series are attached to the second axis, then both sets of data series are shown independently, overlapping each other. As a result, bars attached to the first y-axis are partly or completely hidden by bars attached to the second y-axis. To avoid this, enable the option to display bars side by side. The bars from different data series are shown as if they were attached only to one axis. @@ -94,16 +94,16 @@ Enter the starting angle between 0 and 359 degrees. You can also click the arrows to change the displayed value. Plot missing values Sometimes values are missing in a data series that is shown in a chart. You can select from different options how to plot the missing values. The options are available for some chart types only. - + Leave gap For a missing value, no data will be shown. This is the default for chart types Column, Bar, Line, Net. - + Assume zero For a missing value, the y-value will be shown as zero. This is the default for chart type Area. - + Continue line For a missing value, the interpolation from the neighbor values will be shown. This is the default for chart type XY. - + Include values from hidden cells Check to also show values of currently hidden cells within the source cell range. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/04070000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/04070000.xhp index 0b1b170a4f..333ce25e26 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/04070000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/04070000.xhp @@ -57,34 +57,34 @@ Major grids Defines the axis to be set as the major grid. - + X axis Adds gridlines to the X axis of the chart. The Horizontal Grid On/Off icon on the Formatting bar toggles the visibility of the grid display for the X axis. Note: This only works if the Minor grid check boxes in Insert - Grids are cleared. Otherwise, the minor grid remains visible when the major grid is turned off. - + Y axis Adds gridlines to the Y axis of the chart. The Vertical Grid On/Off icon on the Formatting bar toggles the visibility of the grid display for the Y axis. Note: This only works if the X-axis Minor grid is not selected in Insert - Grids. Otherwise, the minor grid remains visible when the major grid is turned off. - + Z axis Adds gridlines to the Z axis of the chart. This option is only available if you're working with 3D charts. Minor grids Use this area to assign a minor grid for each axis. Assigning minor grids to the axis reduces the distance between the major grids. - + X axis Adds gridlines that subdivide the X axis into smaller sections. - + Y axis Adds gridlines that subdivide the Y axis into smaller sections. - + Z axis Adds gridlines that subdivide the Z axis into smaller sections. This option is only available if you're working with 3D charts. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05020201.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05020201.xhp index e69fc55dae..6736525591 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05020201.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05020201.xhp @@ -49,7 +49,7 @@
- + Show labels Specifies whether to show or hide the axis labels. @@ -73,37 +73,37 @@ Text flow Determines the text flow of the data label. - + Overlap Specifies that the text in cells may overlap other cells. This can be especially useful if there is a lack of space. This option is not available with different title directions. - + Break Allows a text break. The following options are not available for all chart types: Order The options on this tab are only available for a 2D chart, under Format - Axis - Y Axis or X Axis. In this area, you can define the alignment of the number labels on the X or Y axis. - + Tile Arranges numbers on the axis side by side. - + Stagger odd Staggers numbers on the axis, even numbers lower than odd numbers. - + Stagger even Stagger numbers on the axes, odd numbers lower than even numbers. - + Automatic Automatically arranges numbers on the axis. Problems may arise in displaying labels if the size of your chart is too small. You can avoid this by either enlarging the view or decreasing the font size. - + need to create a new Equation dialog box main page with links to sub pages later. This page then contains only the Text Direction control. Text Direction Specify the text direction for a paragraph that uses complex text layout (CTL). This feature is only available if complex text layout support is enabled. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05040201.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05040201.xhp index 801d22d5cc..f370ad1682 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05040201.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05040201.xhp @@ -58,50 +58,50 @@ To achieve specific results, you can manually change the axis scaling. For example, you can display only the top areas of the columns by shifting the zero line upwards. Scale You can enter values for subdividing axes in this area. You can automatically set the properties Minimum, Maximum, Major interval, Minor interval count and Reference value. - + Minimum Defines the minimum value for the beginning of the axis. - + Maximum Defines the maximum value for the end of the axis. - + Major interval Defines the interval for the main division of the axes. The main interval cannot be larger than the value area. - - + + Minor interval count Defines the interval for the subdivision of the axes. - + - + Reference value Specifies at which position to display the values along the axis. - - - - - + + + + + - + Automatic You must first deselect the Automatic option in order to modify the values. Disable this feature if you are working with "fixed" values, as it does not permit automatic scaling. - + Logarithmic scale Specifies that you want the axis to be subdivided logarithmically. Use this feature if you are working with values that differ sharply from each other. You can use logarithmic scaling to make the grid lines of the axis equidistant but have values that may increase or decrease. - + Reverse direction Defines where the lower and where the higher values are displayed at the axis. The unchecked state is the mathematical direction. That means for Cartesian coordinate systems that the x-axis shows the lower values on the left and the y-axis shows the lower values at the bottom. For polar coordinate systems the mathematical angle axis direction is counterclockwise and the radial axis is from inner to outer.http://specs.openoffice.org/chart/Chart_Scales_and_Intervals.odt diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05040202.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05040202.xhp index e92a57be53..17427cd759 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05040202.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05040202.xhp @@ -55,50 +55,50 @@ Axis line - + Select where to cross the other axis: at start, at end, at a specified value, or at a category. - + value selected Enter the value where the axis line should cross the other axis. - + category selected Select the category where the axis line should cross the other axis. Labels - + Place labels Select where to place the labels: near axis, near axis (other side), outside start, or outside end. Interval marks Major: Specifies whether the marks are to be on the inner or outer side of the axis. It is possible to combine both: you will then see marks on both sides. - - - + + + Inner Specifies that marks are placed on the inner side of the axis. - - - + + + Outer Specifies that marks are placed on the outer side of the axis. Minor: This area is used to define the marking dashes between the axis marks. It is possible to activate both fields. This will result in a marking line running from the outside to the inside. - - - + + + Inner Specifies that minor interval marks are placed on the inner side of the axis. - - - + + + Outer Specifies that minor interval marks are placed on the outer side of the axis. - + Place marks Select where to place the marks: at labels, at axis, or at axis and labels. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/three_d_view.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/three_d_view.xhp index 83175cd14a..fa0a69850a 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/three_d_view.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/three_d_view.xhp @@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ Select the Perspective check box to view the chart in central perspective as through a camera lens instead of using a parallel projection. Set the focus length with the spin button. 100% gives a perspective view where a far edge in the chart looks approximately half as big as a near edge. Older versions of %PRODUCTNAME cannot display the percentage of perspective the same way as the current version.Right-angled axes - + If Right-angled axes is enabled, you can rotate the chart contents only in X and Y direction, that is, parallel to the chart borders. Right-angled axes is enabled by default for newly created 3D charts. Pie and Donut charts do not support right-angled axes.X rotation Sets the rotation of the chart on the x axis. The preview responds to the new settings.Y rotation @@ -142,11 +142,11 @@ Use the Ambient light list box to define the ambient light which shines with a uniform intensity from all directions. preview right bar - + Drag the right slider to set the vertical height and direction of the selected light source.preview bottom bar - + Drag the bottom slider to set the horizontal position and direction of the selected light source.preview right bottom button - + Click to switch between an illumination model of a sphere or a cube.Light source Click to enable or disable the specular light source with highlights. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/main0000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/main0000.xhp index c401bde8b0..70bb3a7ce7 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/main0000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/main0000.xhp @@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ - + Creates a chart in the current document. To use a continuous range of cells as the data source for your chart, click inside the cell range, and then choose this command. Alternatively, select some cells and choose this command to create a chart of the selected cells. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000001.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000001.xhp index 8a141cf0a7..82451fc4a8 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000001.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000001.xhp @@ -94,37 +94,37 @@
- - - - + + + + - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + + + + + + Delete Deletes the selected element or elements after confirmation.
- - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + + + + + Delete Deletes the selected element or elements without requiring confirmation. @@ -144,41 +144,41 @@ Closes the dialog.
- + Apply Applies the modified or selected values without closing the dialog.
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + Shrink / Maximize Click the Shrink icon to reduce the dialog to the size of the input field. It is then easier to mark the required reference in the sheet. The icons then automatically convert to the Maximize icon. Click it to restore the dialog to its original size. @@ -222,15 +222,15 @@ - + Next Click the Next button, and the wizard uses the current dialog settings and proceeds to the next step. If you are on the last step, this button becomes Create.
- - + + Backin Tools - Options Resets modified values back to the $[officename] default values. @@ -248,9 +248,9 @@ A confirmation query does not appear. If you confirm the dialog with OK all settings in this dialog are reset.
- + - + Standarde.g. in Format - Para StyleUFI: Name is Default on Tools-Options-Writer-Basic Fonts Resets the values visible in the dialog back to the default installation values. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000202.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000202.xhp index 8d3f81d67d..c92fbbc81e 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000202.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000202.xhp @@ -43,20 +43,20 @@ - JPEG Options + JPEG Options Defines the settings for the import/export of files in JPEG format.
Quality Specifies the desired graphic quality. - Quality + Quality Sets the quality for the import/export. The value 1 denotes minimum quality and minimal file size, 100 denotes maximum quality and file size. Color resolution Specifies the desired color resolution. - Grayscale + Grayscale Specifies whether to export or import a graphic object in a grayscale. - True Colors + True Colors Specifies whether to retain the original colors of the JPEG file when importing or exporting. For more details about filters, see Information about Import/Export Filters diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000203.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000203.xhp index 336ade28b7..8fddfc68d8 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000203.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000203.xhp @@ -43,22 +43,22 @@ - SVM/WMF/PICT/MET Options + SVM/WMF/PICT/MET Options Defines the settings for SVM/WMF/PICT/MET export options.
Mode Specifies the mode for file export. - Original + Original Retains the original size. - Size + Size Specifies whether to modify size. Size Defines the width and height. This is only active if the Size option has been selected. - Width + Width Specifies the width. - Height + Height Specifies the height. See Import and Export Filter Information for more information about filters. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000204.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000204.xhp index 95e57ac824..98c67cd56d 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000204.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000204.xhp @@ -45,14 +45,14 @@ - + BMP Options Defines the import/export settings for files in BMP format. Color Resolution Specifies the color resolution of the BMP file to be exported. The Color Resolution command also appears on the context menu of a BMP graphic that has been loaded in %PRODUCTNAME Draw. - + Color Resolution In the Color Resolution list you will find the following color resolution variants: Original @@ -85,25 +85,25 @@ 24-Bit True Colors Allows the object to be converted to a palette of approximately 16 million colors. - + RLE Encoding Applies RLE (Run Length Encoding) to the BMP graphics Mode Determines the type of export mode. - + Original Retains the original mode. - - + + Resolution Allows you to define the resolution for an image. Select the desired DPI from the Resolution list box. - + Size Allows you modify the image size by a given measurement. - + Width Specifies the image width. - + Height Specifies the image height. See Import and Export Filter Information for more information about filters. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000205.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000205.xhp index 2f0861c06f..5188910832 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000205.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000205.xhp @@ -48,18 +48,18 @@ transparency; saving GIF format - + GIF Options In the GIF Options dialog, you can select the settings for the export of files in GIF format. Mode - - + + Interlaced Specifies whether to use interlaced mode for saving the GIF image. Drawing objects - - + + Save transparency Specifies whether to save the background of the picture as transparent. Only objects will be visible in the GIF image. Use the Eyedropper to set the transparent color in the picture. For more information regarding filters, refer to the topic: Information about Import and Export Filters. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000206.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000206.xhp index e2df677712..8ec19f9b5a 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000206.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000206.xhp @@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ Dif Import/Export/ Lotus import/ dBASE import Defines the options for import/export. These dialogs will be automatically shown if the corresponding file type is selected. -Character set +Character set Select the character set from the options used for import/export. For further information regarding filters, refer to the topic: Information about Import and Export Filters. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000207.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000207.xhp index dd2c198338..293c441954 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000207.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000207.xhp @@ -47,15 +47,15 @@ The Export of text files dialog allows you to define the export options for text files. The dialog will be displayed if you save spreadsheet data as file type "Text CSV", and if the Edit filter settings check box is marked in the Save As dialog. Field options Defines the field separator, text separator and character set that is used for the text export. -Character set +Character set Specifies the character set for text export. -Field delimiter +Field delimiter Choose or enter the field delimiter, which separates data fields. -Text delimiter +Text delimiter Choose or enter the text delimiter, which encloses every data field. -Save cell content as shown +Save cell content as shown Enabled by default, data will be saved as displayed, including applied number formats. If this checkbox is not marked, raw data content will be saved, as in older versions of %PRODUCTNAME.i76507, see http://specs.openoffice.org/calc/filters/csv/save-to-csv.odtDepending on the number format, saving cell content as shown may write values that during an import cannot be interpreted as numerical values anymore. -Fixed column width +Fixed column width Exports all data fields with a fixed width. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000208.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000208.xhp index 6107cac36b..90cad8f9c0 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000208.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000208.xhp @@ -43,7 +43,7 @@ -Text Import +Text Import Sets the import options for delimited data.
@@ -54,34 +54,34 @@ Import -Character Set +Character Set Specifies the character set to be used in the imported file. -From Row +From Row Specifies the row where you want to start the import. The rows are visible in the preview window at the bottom of the dialog. Separator Options Specifies whether your data uses separators or fixed widths as delimiters. -Fixed width +Fixed width Separates fixed-width data (equal number of characters) into columns. Click on the ruler in the preview window to set the width. -Separated by +Separated by Select the separator used in your data. -Tab +Tab Separates data delimited by tabs into columns. -Semicolon +Semicolon Separates data delimited by semicolons into columns. -Comma +Comma Separates data delimited by commas into columns. -Space +Space Separates data delimited by spaces into columns. - -Other + +Other Separates data into columns using the custom separator that you specify. Note: The custom separator must also be contained in your data. -Merge delimiters +Merge delimiters Combines consecutive delimiters and removes blank data fields. -Text delimiter +Text delimiter Select a character to delimit text data. You can can also enter a character in the text box. Fields Shows how your data will look when it is separated into columns. -Column type +Column type Choose a column in the preview window and select the data type to be applied the imported data. You can select one of the following options: diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000210.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000210.xhp index 9eca3c1edb..75ae7a7b9a 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000210.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000210.xhp @@ -43,15 +43,15 @@ -Warning Print Options +Warning Print Options The Warning Print Options dialog appears when the page setup does not match the defined print range. This is the case, for example, if you draw a rectangle that is larger than the current page format. Print options -Fit page to print range +Fit page to print range If you select the Fit page to print range option, the Warning Print Options dialog will not appear in subsequent print runs of this document. -Print on multiple pagesi78245 +Print on multiple pagesi78245 Specifies whether to distribute the printout on multiple pages. The print range will be printed on multiple pages. -Trim +Trim Specifies that anything extending beyond the maximum print range will be cut off and not included in the printing. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000212.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000212.xhp index 18d418d595..cccdd5e0f0 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000212.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000212.xhp @@ -51,12 +51,12 @@ Mode - - + + Compression 0..9 Specifies the compression setting from 0 (no compression) to 9 (maximum compression). The calculation time increases with the compression value, while the resulting file is smaller in bytes. - - + + Interlaced Specifies whether the graphic is to be saved in interlaced mode. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000213.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000213.xhp index e589165b64..3e73d9bcd4 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000213.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000213.xhp @@ -53,34 +53,34 @@ Preview Specifies options for embedded preview for the EPS file. - + Image preview (TIFF) Specifies whether a preview image is exported in the TIFF format together with the actual PostScript file. - + Interchange (EPSI) Specifies whether a monochrome preview graphic in EPSI format is exported together with the PostScript file. This format only contains printable characters from the 7-bit ASCII code. Version Determines the PostScript level for exporting the EPS file. - + Level 1 Compression is not available at this level. Select the Level 1 option if your PostScript printer does not offer the capabilities of Level 2. - + Level 2 Select the Level 2 option if your output device supports colored bitmaps, palette graphics and compressed graphics. Color format The Color format option gives you the choice between exporting in color or in grayscale. - + Color Exports the file in color. - + Grayscale Exports the file in grayscale tones. Compression Specifies whether the data is exported with compression. - + LZW encoding LZW compression is the compression of a file into a smaller file using a table-based lookup algorithm invented by Abraham Lempel, Jacob Ziv, and Terry Welch. If you choose to activate this, select the LZW encoding option. - + None Specifies that you do not wish to use compression. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000214.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000214.xhp index f9261891cd..1518cbf918 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000214.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000214.xhp @@ -51,14 +51,14 @@ File format - - - + + + Binary Exports the file in binary format. The resulting file is smaller than a (ASCII) text file. - - - + + + Text Exports the file in the ASCII text format. This file type is larger than a binary. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000215.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000215.xhp index f9b3036d24..f0f3efea8e 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000215.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000215.xhp @@ -52,24 +52,24 @@ Properties Defines the settings for importing or exporting your file. When exporting, only the character set and paragraph break can be defined. - + Character set Specifies the character set of the file for export or import. - + Default fonts By setting a default font, you specify that the text should be displayed in a specific font. The default fonts can only be selected when importing. - + Language Specifies the language of the text, if this has not already been defined. This setting is only available when importing. Paragraph break Defines the type of paragraph break for a text line. - + CR & LF Produces a "Carriage Return" and a "Linefeed". This option is the default. - + CR Produces a "Carriage Return" as the paragraph break. - + LF Produces a "Linefeed" as the paragraph break. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/01010000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/01010000.xhp index 7e43d0ef62..848b93f21a 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/01010000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/01010000.xhp @@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ The Preview command displays the selected graphic. - + Assigns a title to a selected Gallery object. Deletes the selected graphic after confirmation. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/01050000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/01050000.xhp index 6e5869911f..8b665d2ebc 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/01050000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/01050000.xhp @@ -45,11 +45,11 @@ YJ: checked
- + GeneralUFI: this is a tab page of the Gallery. Deleted everything else The General tab page lists the general properties of the current theme.
- + Name Displays the name of the theme. If no name has been assigned, you can type a new name in the text box. Type diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010100.xhp index dfabc71f71..09fdb74636 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010100.xhp @@ -143,10 +143,10 @@
- + Organize Adds, removes, or rearranges templates or sample documents. - + Edit Opens the selected template for editing. Open diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010201.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010201.xhp index 93578356d4..e59ca81f75 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010201.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010201.xhp @@ -52,36 +52,36 @@
Inscription Enter or insert the text that you want to appear on the label(s). - + Label text Enter the text that you want to appear on the label. You can also insert a database field. - + Address Creates a label with your return address. Text that is currently in the Label text box is overwritten. To change your return address, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME, and then click on the User Data tab. - + Database Select the database that you want to use as the data source for your label. - + Table Select the database table containing the field(s) that you want to use in your label. - - + + Database field Select the database field that you want, and then click the arrow to the left of this box to insert the field into the Label text box.. The name of the database field is bounded by brackets in the Label text box. If you want, you can separate database fields with spaces. Press Enter to insert a database field on a new line. Format You can select a pre-defined size format for your label or a size format that you specify on the Format tab.. - + Continuous Prints labels on continuous paper. - + Sheet Prints labels on individual sheets. - + Brand Select the brand of paper that you want to use. Each brand has its own size formats. - + Type Select the size format that you want to use. The available formats depend on the brand on what you selected in the Brand list. If you want to use a custom label format, select [User], and then click the Format tab to define the format. Info diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010202.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010202.xhp index 8accb3bded..e158b38c84 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010202.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010202.xhp @@ -51,38 +51,38 @@
- + Horizontal pitch Displays the distance between the left edges of adjacent labels or business cards. If you are defining a custom format, enter a value here. - + Vertical pitch Displays the distance between the upper edge of a label or a business card and the upper edge of the label or the business card directly below. If you are defining a custom format, enter a value here. - + Width Displays the width for the label or the business card. If you are defining a custom format, enter a value here. - + Height Displays the height for the label or business card. If you are defining a custom format, enter a value here. - + Left margin Displays the distance from the left edge of the page to the left edge of the first label or business card. If you are defining a custom format, enter a value here. - + Upper margin Displays distance from the top edge of the page to the top of the first label or business card. If you are defining a custom format, enter a value here. - + Columns Enter the number of labels or business cards that you want to span the width of the page. - + Rows Enter the number of labels or business cards that you want to span the height of the page. - + Save Saves the current label or business card format. Save Label Format - + Brand Enter or select the desired brand. - + Type Enter or select a label type. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010203.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010203.xhp index baecc54b28..305e66b6c4 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010203.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010203.xhp @@ -50,22 +50,22 @@
- Entire Page + Entire Page Creates a full page of labels or business cards. - Single Label + Single Label Prints a single label or business card on a page. - Column + Column Enter the number of labels or business cards that you want to have in a row on your page. - Row + Row Enter the number of rows of labels or business cards that you want to have on your page. - Synchronize contents + Synchronize contents Allows you to edit a single label or business card and updates the contents of the remaining labels or business cards on the page when you click the Synchronize Labels button. - Synchronize Labels + Synchronize Labels The Synchronize labels button only appears in your document if you selected the Synchronize contents on the Options tab when you created the labels or business cards. Copies the contents of the top left label or business card to the remaining labels or business cards on the page. Printer Displays the name of the currently selected printer. - Setup + Setup Opens the Printer Setup dialog. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010302.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010302.xhp index 6266a53540..f068a5da01 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010302.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010302.xhp @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ Content Select a design layout for your business card. Select a business card category in AutoText - Section box, and then click a layout in the Content list. - AutoText - Section + AutoText - Section Select a business card category, and then click a layout in the Content list. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010303.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010303.xhp index b3fb5b6d1d..5afe5b7a46 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010303.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010303.xhp @@ -52,24 +52,24 @@ Private data Enter the contact information that you want to include on your business card. You can also modify or update these entries by choosing %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - User Data. -First name 2 +First name 2 Enter the first name of the person, whom you want to use as a second contact. -Last name 2 +Last name 2 Enter the last name of the person, whom you want to use as a second contact. -Initials 2 +Initials 2 Enter the initials of the person, whom you want to use as a second contact. -Country +Country Enter the name of the country in which you live. -Profession +Profession Enter the title of your profession. -Phone +Phone Enter your home telephone number. -Mobile +Mobile Enter your mobile telephone number. -Homepage +Homepage Enter the address of your internet homepage. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010304.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010304.xhp index d6bbb26e26..34b7415205 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010304.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010304.xhp @@ -56,25 +56,25 @@ Enter the contact information that you want to include on your business card. If you want to include your name on a business card, enter your name on the Private tab. Then choose a layout on the Business Cards tab that includes a name placeholder. - + Company 2nd line Enter additional company details. - + Slogan Enter the slogan of your company. - + Country Enter the name of the country where your business is located. - + Phone Enter your business telephone number. - + Mobile Enter your mobile telephone number. - + Homepage Enter the address of your company's internet homepage. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01020000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01020000.xhp index c4023ce60f..bb9f1818b1 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01020000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01020000.xhp @@ -66,21 +66,21 @@
The following sections describe the %PRODUCTNAMEOpen dialog box. To activate the %PRODUCTNAMEOpen and Save dialog boxes, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME- General, and then select the Use %PRODUCTNAME dialogs in the Open/Save dialogs area. If the file that you want to open contains Styles, special rules apply. - - + + Up One Level Move up one directory in the directory hierarchy. Long-click to see the higher level directories.UFI: it is still a long-click - - + + Create New Directory Creates a new directory. - - - + + + Default Directory Displays the files in the default user directory. @@ -104,11 +104,11 @@ To rename a file, right-click the file, and then choose Rename. - + Click to delete the file with the name shown in this dialog. - + Click to cancel deletion of the file with the name shown in this dialog. - + Click to delete all selected files. @@ -123,13 +123,13 @@ Version If there are multiple versions of the selected file, select the version that you want to open. You can save and organize multiple versions of a document by choosing File - Versions. The versions of a document are opened in read-only mode. - - + + File type Select the file type that you want to open, or select All Files (*) to display a list of all of the files in the directory. - - + + Open Opens the selected document(s). diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01020103.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01020103.xhp index 9fc9d123a4..62bf4a0bc8 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01020103.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01020103.xhp @@ -50,8 +50,8 @@
- - + + Filter list Select the import filter for the file that you want to open. If $[officename] does not recognize the file type of the document that your want to open, try any of the following: diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01100100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01100100.xhp index e3bd6b1985..0d082a8bf6 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01100100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01100100.xhp @@ -49,16 +49,16 @@
- + Title Enter a title for the document. - + Subject Enter a subject for the document. You can use a subject to group documents with similar contents. - + Keywords Enter the words that you want to use to index the content of your document. Keywords must be separated by commas. A keyword can contain white space characters or semicolons. - + Comments Enter comments to help identify the document. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01100200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01100200.xhp index afaaac061c..40bc54233a 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01100200.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01100200.xhp @@ -55,7 +55,7 @@
- + File Displays the file name. Editing time: Displays the amount of time that the file has been open for editing since the file was created. The editing time is updated when you save the file. - + Apply User Data Saves the user's full name with the file. You can edit the name by choosing %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - User Data. - + Delete Resets the editing time to zero, the creation date to the current date and time, and the version number to 1. The modification and printing dates are also deleted. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01100300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01100300.xhp index 8a8994df9c..8b4cce82a9 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01100300.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01100300.xhp @@ -49,14 +49,14 @@
- - - - + + + + Properties Enter your custom contents. You can change the name, type, and contents of each row. You can add or remove rows. The items will be exported as metadata to other file formats. - + Add Click to add a new row to the Properties list. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01100400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01100400.xhp index 4b68514389..a73f57d8b7 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01100400.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01100400.xhp @@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ OLE objects;number of - + Statistics Displays statistics for the current file. @@ -100,7 +100,7 @@ Number of lines in the file. - + Update Updates the statistics. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01100500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01100500.xhp index d45203ab44..735fa9fb5a 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01100500.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01100500.xhp @@ -58,29 +58,29 @@
- + Do not refresh automatically User must refresh the page manually. - + Refresh this document Reloads the HTML page after the number of seconds that you enter in the seconds box. To observe the result, open the page in a browser. - + Seconds Enter the number of seconds to wait before the page is reloaded. - + Redirect from this document Loads a page that you specify after the number of seconds that you enter in the seconds box. - + after ... seconds Enter the number of seconds to wait before redirecting the browser to a different file. - + to URL Enter the URL address of the file that you want to open. - + ... Locate the file that you want to open, and then click Open. - - + + to frame If the current HTML page uses frames, select the name of the target frame where you want the file to be loaded.
diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01110100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01110100.xhp index 8728dff9d4..3246548e0d 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01110100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01110100.xhp @@ -70,13 +70,13 @@ Left and Right Selection List (Templates / Documents) Displays the available template categories or opened $[officename] files. To change the contents of the list, select Templates or Documents in the box below. To change the default template path, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Paths. - - + + Select Templates or Documents to change the contents that are displayed in the list above. Template categories are represented by folder icons. To view the template files for a category, double-click a folder. To view the styles that are used in a file, double-click the file name, and then double-click the Styles icon. To copy a style, hold down Command Ctrl and drag the style from one file to another file. To move a style, drag the style from one file to another file. - + Commands Contains commands for managing and editing your templates and documents. Depending on the type of file you select in the list, the following commands are available: @@ -110,10 +110,10 @@ Reset Default Template Select a $[officename] document type to reset the default template to the original template. - + Address Book Edit the field assignments and the data source for the address book. - + File Locate a file that you want to add to the document list, and then click Open. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01110101.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01110101.xhp index 37372115b8..e7fe882d4c 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01110101.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01110101.xhp @@ -57,13 +57,13 @@
Address Book Source Set the data source and data table for your address book. - + Data Source Select the data source for your address book. - + Table Select the data table for your address book. - + Configure Add a new data source to the Address Book Source list. Field assignment diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01110300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01110300.xhp index 58d13a1e23..ab80b37742 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01110300.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01110300.xhp @@ -52,21 +52,21 @@
- + New Template Enter a name for the template. Templates Lists templates and template categories. - + Categories Select a category in which to save the new template. To add a new template category, click the Organize button. - + Templates Lists the available template categories. - + Edit Opens the selected template for editing. - + Organize Opens the Template Management dialog where you can organize or create new templates.
diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01130000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01130000.xhp index 3a35753e00..e631d164f7 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01130000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01130000.xhp @@ -65,7 +65,7 @@
- + Printer Lists the default printer for the current document. The information for the printer is displayed below this box. If you select another printer, the information is updated. Name @@ -78,26 +78,26 @@ Displays the port for the selected printer. Comment Displays additional information for the printer. - + Properties Opens the printer properties dialog. The printer properties vary according to the printer that you select.UFI: fix for #i29457# - + Print to File Prints to a file instead of to a printer. Select this box, and then choose a location to save the file.obviously, AVIS embedded help texts AEND are no longer possible inside SWITCHed passages. This is the reason for continuos failure of i83561 - + Enables all sheets to be printed. In the "Print range" area of the dialog, you can restrict this output to some given pages. - + Enables the selected sheets to be printed. In the "Print range" area of the dialog, you can restrict this output to some given pages. - + Enables the selected cells to be printed. In the "Print range" area of the dialog, you can restrict this output to some given pages. - + Select whether you want to print Slides, Handouts, Notes, or Outline. - + For handouts, select the number of slides to print per page of paper. - + For handouts, enable to print in a horizontal order first. - + For handouts, enable to print in a vertical order first. changed Calc print dialog, i83561 @@ -125,27 +125,27 @@ This is the reason for continuos failure of i83561 Print range Defines the print range for the current document. - + All Prints the entire document. - + Pages Prints only the pages that you specify in the Pages box. - + To print a range of pages, use the format 3-6. To print single pages, use the format 7;9;11. If you want, you can print a combination of page ranges and single pages, by using the format 3-6;8;10;12. - + Selection Prints only the selected area(s) or object(s) in the current document. Copies Specify the number of copies that you want to print and the sorting options. - + Number of copies Enter the number of copies that you want to print. - + Collate Preserves the page order of the original document. - - + + Options Changes the printer settings for the current document. To set the default %PRODUCTNAME printer options for text documents, choose %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Print in the Options dialog box. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01140000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01140000.xhp index 77d8dc9307..6b6e0c8080 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01140000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01140000.xhp @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ - + Printer Setup Select the default printer for the current document. @@ -65,7 +65,7 @@ Lists the information that applies to the selected printer. If the list is empty, you need to install a default printer for your operating system. Refer to the online help for your operating system for instructions on how to install and setup a default printer. - + Name Lists the installed printers on your operating system. To change the default printer, select a printer name from the list. Status @@ -84,7 +84,7 @@ Displays additional information for the printer. - + Properties Changes the printer settings of your operating system for the current document. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01190000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01190000.xhp index 9fa195bfb6..a74a24cb10 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01190000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01190000.xhp @@ -58,29 +58,29 @@ If you save a copy of a file that contains version information (by choosing File - Save As), the version information is not saved with the file. New versions Set the options for saving a new version of the document. - + Save New Version Saves the current state of the document as a new version. If you want, you can also enter comments in the Insert Version Comment dialog before you save the new version. - + Insert Version Comment Enter a comment here when you are saving a new version. If you clicked Show to open this dialog, you cannot edit the comment. - + Always save version when closing If you have made changes to your document, $[officename] automatically saves a new version when you close the document. - + Existing versions Lists the existing versions of the current document, the date and the time they were created, the author and the associated comments. - + Open Opens the selected version in a read-only window. - + Show Displays the entire comment for the selected version. - + Delete Deletes the selected version. - + Compare Compare the changes that were made in each version.If you want, you can Accept or Reject Changes. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02070000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02070000.xhp index bb0c8bf539..717f38620c 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02070000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02070000.xhp @@ -41,12 +41,12 @@ - - + + - + - + Paste Special Inserts the contents of the clipboard into the current file in a format that you can specify. @@ -81,8 +81,8 @@ Source Displays the source of the clipboard contents. - - + + Selection Select a format for the clipboard contents that you want to paste. When you paste HTML data into a text document, you can choose "HTML format" or "HTML format without comments". The second choice is the default; it pastes all HTML data, but no comments. @@ -97,42 +97,42 @@ Select a format for the clipboard contents that you want to paste. - + Paste all Pastes all cell contents, comments, formats, and objects into the current document. - + Text i50436 Inserts cells containing text. - + Numbers Inserts cells containing numbers. - + Date & Time Inserts cells containing date and time values. - + Formulas Inserts cells containing formulae. - + Comments Inserts comments that are attached to cells. If you want to add the comments to the existing cell content, select the "Add" operation. - + Formats Inserts cell format attributes. - + Objects Inserts objects contained within the selected cell range. These can be OLE objects, chart objects, or drawing objects. @@ -141,27 +141,27 @@ Select the operation to apply when you paste cells into your sheet. - + None Does not apply an operation when you insert the cell range from the clipboard. The contents of the clipboard will replace existing cell contents. - + Add Adds the values in the clipboard cells to the values in the target cells. Also, if the clipboard only contains comments, adds the comments to the target cells. - + Subtract Subtracts the values in the clipboard cells from the values in the target cells. - + Multiply Multiplies the values in the clipboard cells with the values in the target cells. - + Divide Divides the values in the target cells by the values in the clipboard cells. @@ -170,7 +170,7 @@ Sets the paste options for the clipboard contents. - + Skip empty cells Empty cells from the clipboard do not replace target cells. If you use this option in conjunction with the Multiply or the Divide operation, the operation is not applied to the target cell of an empty cell in the clipboard. @@ -180,12 +180,12 @@ If you select a mathematical operation and clear the Skip empty cells box, empty cells in the clipboard are treated as zeroes. For example, if you apply the Multiply operation, the target cells are filled with zeroes. - + Transpose The rows of the range in the clipboard are pasted to become columns of the output range. The columns of the range in the clipboard are pasted to become rows. i59261 - + Link Inserts the cell range as a link, so that changes made to the cells in the source file are updated in the target file. To ensure that changes made to empty cells in the source file are updated in the target file, ensure that the Insert All option is also selected. @@ -196,17 +196,17 @@ Set the shift options for the target cells when the clipboard content is inserted. - + Don't shift Inserted cells replace the target cells. - + Down Target cells are shifted downward when you insert cells from the clipboard. - + Right Target cells are shifted to the right when you insert cells from the clipboard. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02100000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02100000.xhp index bdf298e0b1..1fd81bb42d 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02100000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02100000.xhp @@ -54,33 +54,33 @@
- - + + Search For Enter the text that you want to search for, or select a previous search from the list. - + Search options are listed in the Options area of the dialog - - + + Replace With Enter the replacement text, or select a recent replacement text or style from the list. - + Replacement options are listed in the Options area of the dialog. Options - - + + Entire Cells Whole words only Searches for whole words or cells that are identical to the search text. - - + + Backwards Search starts at the current cursor position and goes backwards to the beginning of the file. - - + + @@ -98,7 +98,7 @@ Ext help text not found within switches. Solution: Keep switched text for normal - + Match case case sensitivity;searching @@ -107,13 +107,13 @@ Ext help text not found within switches. Solution: Keep switched text for normal finding; selections - - + + Current selection only Searches only the selected text or cells.had to copy extended help to outside of switch construct - see issue 72448 - - + + Searches for text formatted with the style that you specify. Select this checkbox, and then select a style from the Search for list. To specify a replacement style, select a style from the Replace with list. @@ -121,52 +121,52 @@ Ext help text not found within switches. Solution: Keep switched text for normal - - + + Search for Styles / Including Styles Searches for text formatted with the style that you specify. Select this checkbox, and then select a style from the Search for list. To specify a replacement style, select a style from the Replace with list. After you select the attributes that you want to search for, the Search for Styles box in the Options area of the %PRODUCTNAME Writer Find & Replace dialog changes to Including Styles. If you want to search for text in which attributes were set by using direct formatting and styles, select the Including Styles box. - + Comments In Writer, you can select to include the comment texts in your searches. - - + + Match character width (only if Asian languages are enabled) Distinguishes between half-width and full-width character forms. - - + + Sounds like (Japanese) (only if Asian languages are enabled) Lets you specify the search options for similar notation used in Japanese text. Select this checkbox, and then click the ... button to specify the search options. - - + + Sets the search options for similar notation used in Japanese text. Searching in Japanese - + Find All Finds and selects all instances of the text or the format that you are searching for in the document (only in Writer and Calc documents). - + Find Finds and selects the next occurrence of the text or format that you searching for in the document. - + Replace All Replaces all of the occurrences of the text or format that you want to replace.Repeat this command until all replacements on your slide have been made. - + Replace Replaces the selected text or format that you searched for, and then searches for the next occurrence. @@ -185,7 +185,7 @@ Ext help text not found within switches. Solution: Keep switched text for normal Finds specific text formatting features, such as font types, font effects, and text flow characteristics. - + No Format @@ -197,25 +197,25 @@ Ext help text not found within switches. Solution: Keep switched text for normal The search criteria for formatting attributes are displayed under the Search for or the Replace with box. -More Options / Less Options / Fewer Options - name subject to change +More Options / Less Options / Fewer Options - name subject to change Shows more or fewer search options. Click this button again to hide the extended search options. Search in - - + + Formulas Searches for the characters that you specify in formulas and in fixed (not calculated) values. For example, you could look for formulas that contain 'SUM'. - + Values Searches for the characters that you specify in values and in the results of formulas. Searches for the characters that you specify in values and in the results of formulas. - + Comments @@ -227,14 +227,14 @@ Ext help text not found within switches. Solution: Keep switched text for normal Determines the order for searching the cells. - - + + By Rows Searches from left to right across the rows. - - + + By Columns @@ -248,8 +248,8 @@ Ext help text not found within switches. Solution: Keep switched text for normal finding; in all sheets sheets; searching all - - + + Search in all sheets diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02100100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02100100.xhp index 1ebcb43de9..3fc7daf028 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02100100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02100100.xhp @@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ similarity search finding; similarity search - + Similarity Search @@ -55,21 +55,21 @@
- + ... Set the options for the similarity search. Settings Define the criteria for determining if a word is similar to the search term. - + Exchange characters Enter the number of characters in the search term that can be exchanged. For example, if you specify 2 exchanged characters, "black" and "crack" are considered similar. - + Add characters Enter the maximum number of characters by which a word can exceed the number of characters in the search term. - + Remove characters Enter the number of characters by which a word can be shorter than the search term. - + Combine Searches for a term that matches any combination of the similarity search settings. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02100200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02100200.xhp index 16d3a5a27c..e13da12774 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02100200.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02100200.xhp @@ -43,7 +43,7 @@ -Attributes +Attributes Choose the text attributes that you want to search for. For example, if you search for the Font attribute, all instances of text that do not use the default font are found. All text that has a directly coded font attribute, and all text where a style switches the font attribute, are found. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02100300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02100300.xhp index 46cc12b471..b993c999f6 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02100300.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02100300.xhp @@ -66,8 +66,8 @@ had to copy extended help to outside of switch construct - see issue 72448 - -Finds specific text formatting features, such as font types, font effects, and text flow characteristics. + +Finds specific text formatting features, such as font types, font effects, and text flow characteristics.
Attributes
diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02180000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02180000.xhp index 126741bc8e..23e5d11e7b 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02180000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02180000.xhp @@ -41,7 +41,7 @@ - + @@ -72,24 +72,24 @@ Lists the file type, such as graphic, of the source file. Status Lists additional information about the source file. - + Automatic Automatically updates the contents of the link when you open the file. Any changes made in the source file are then displayed in the file containing the link. Linked graphic files can only be updated manually. This option is not available for a linked graphic file. The Automatic option is only available for DDE links. You can insert a DDE link by copying the contents from one file and pasting by choosing Edit - Paste Special, and then selecting the Link box. As DDE is a text based linking system, only the displayed decimals are copied into the target sheet.removed Calc switch: this feature can be used wherever a cell area can be pasted: everywhere - + Manual Only updates the link when you click the Update button. - + Update Updates the selected link so that the most recently saved version of the linked file is displayed in the current document. - + Modify Change the source file for the selected link. - + Break Link Breaks the link between the source file and the current document. The most recently updated contents of the source file are kept in the current document. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02180100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02180100.xhp index 90d2d9154e..a31dbbb0a9 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02180100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02180100.xhp @@ -55,13 +55,13 @@
Edit Links Lets you set the properties for the selected link. - + Application: Lists the application that last saved the source file. - + File: Lists the path to the source file. - + Section Lists the section that the link refers to in the source file. If you want, you can enter a new section here. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02210101.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02210101.xhp index 7f16dc243f..bcc6592438 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02210101.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02210101.xhp @@ -43,16 +43,16 @@ -Floating Frame Properties +Floating Frame Properties Changes the properties of the selected floating frame. Floating frames work best when they contain an html document, and when they are inserted in another html document.
- -Name + +Name Enter a name for the floating frame. The name cannot contain spaces, special characters, or begin with an underscore ( _ ). - -Contents + +Contents Enter the path and the name of the file that you want to display in the floating frame. You can also click the ... button and locate the file that you want to display. For example, you can enter: @@ -62,39 +62,39 @@ file:///c|/Readme.txt - -... + +... Locate the file that you want to display in the selected floating frame, and then click Open. Scrollbar Add or remove a scrollbar from the selected floating frame. - -On + +On Displays the scrollbar for the floating frame. - -Off + +Off Hides the scrollbar for the floating frame. - -Automatic + +Automatic Mark this option if the currently active floating frame can have a scrollbar when needed. Border Displays or hides the border of the floating frame. - -On + +On Displays the border of the floating frame. - -Off + +Off Hides the border of the floating frame. Spacing to contents Define the amount of space that is left between the border of the floating frame and the contents of the floating frame provided that both documents inside and outside the floating frame are HTML documents. - -Width + +Width Enter the amount of horizontal space that you want to leave between the right and the left edges of the floating frame and the contents of the frame. Both documents inside and outside the floating frame must be HTML documents. - -Height + +Height Enter the amount of vertical space that you want to leave between the top and bottom edges of the floating frame and the contents of the frame. Both documents inside and outside the floating frame must be HTML documents. - - -Default + + +Default Applies the default spacing. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02220000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02220000.xhp index 5b6a994072..c2084cedf7 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02220000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02220000.xhp @@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ -ImageMap Editor +ImageMap Editor Allows you to attach URLs to specific areas, called hotspots, on a graphic or a group of graphics. An image map is a group of one or more hotspots.
@@ -263,9 +263,9 @@ -Address: +Address: Enter the URL for the file that you want to open when you click the selected hotspot. If you want to jump to an anchor within the document, the address should be of the form "file:///C/document_name#anchor_name". -Text: +Text: Enter the text that you want to display when the mouse rests on the hotspot in a browser. If you do not enter any text, the Address is displayed. Frame: Enter the name of the target frame that you want to open the URL in. You can also select a standard frame name from the list. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02220100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02220100.xhp index 173fd4a69d..53fab5f98b 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02220100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02220100.xhp @@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ Name: Enter a name for the image. - + Description Enter a description for the hotspot.see http://specs.openoffice.org/appwide/drawing_layer/imagemapdialog.odt
diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02230200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02230200.xhp index 6fc76ea157..8f944fbc34 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02230200.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02230200.xhp @@ -59,18 +59,18 @@
You can change the display properties of the markup elements by choosing %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Changes in the Options dialog box.%PRODUCTNAME Calc - Changes in the Options dialog box. When you rest the mouse pointer over a change markup in the document, a Tip displays the author and the date and time that the change was made. If the Extended Tips are activated, the type of change and any attached comments are also displayed. - + Show changes in spreadsheet Shows or hides recorded changes. - + Show accepted changes Shows or hides the changes that were accepted. - + Show rejected changes Shows or hides the changes that were rejected. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02230402.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02230402.xhp index 5440ae2ee4..01aab22cb8 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02230402.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02230402.xhp @@ -98,8 +98,8 @@ - -Shrink/Max + +Shrink/Max diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02250000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02250000.xhp index 598d11072c..b821002c2d 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02250000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02250000.xhp @@ -130,37 +130,37 @@ Column ArrangementLets you map the column headings to data fields from a different data source. To define a different data source for your bibliography, click the Data Source button on the record Object Bar. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + Select the data field that you want to map to the current Column name. To change the available data fields, select a different data source for your bibliography. Deletes the current record. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/03010000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/03010000.xhp index 944919f1de..b679c6f74a 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/03010000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/03010000.xhp @@ -59,62 +59,62 @@ Zooming is handled differently on Unix, Linux, and Windows platforms. A document saved with a 100% zoom factor in Windows is displayed at a larger zoom factor on Unix/Linux platforms. To change the zoom factor, double-click or right-click the percentage value on the Status bar, and select the zoom factor that you want. Zoom factor Set the zoom factor at which to display the current document and all documents of the same type that you open thereafter. - + Optimal Resizes the display to fit the width of the selected cell area at the moment the command is started. Resizes the display to fit the width of the text in the document at . - + Fit width and height Resizes the display to fit the width and height of the selected cell area at the moment the command is started. Displays the entire page on your screen. - + Fit width Displays the complete width of the document page. The top and bottom edges of the page may not be visible. - + Displays the document at two times its actual size. - + Displays the document at one and a half times its actual size.
- + 100 % Displays the document at its actual size.
- + Displays the document at 75% of its actual size. - + Displays the document at half of its actual size. - - - - + + + + Variable Enter the zoom factor at which you want to display the document. Enter a percentage in the box. View layout For text documents, you can set the view layout. Reduce the zoom factor to see the effects of different view layout settings.for this doc or all docs? answer: it's the same as before for the zoom factor. - + Automatic The automatic view layout displays pages side by side, as many as the zoom factor allows. - + Single page The single page view layout displays pages beneath each other, but never side by side. - - + + Columns In columns view layout you see pages in a given number of columns side by side. Enter the number of columns. - + Book mode In book mode view layout you see two pages side by side as in an open book. The first page is a right page with an odd page number. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/03150100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/03150100.xhp index d59e2cabe1..08144010a0 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/03150100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/03150100.xhp @@ -43,13 +43,13 @@ - Confirm Delete + Confirm Delete Confirms or cancels the deletion. - Delete + Delete Performs the deletion in the current file. - Delete All + Delete All Performs the deletion in all selected files. - Do Not Delete + Do Not Delete Rejects the deletion for the current file. Cancel Cancels the deletion in the current file and any other selected files. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04050000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04050000.xhp index f1322a5f15..29bfdb5100 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04050000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04050000.xhp @@ -70,13 +70,13 @@ The comment box contains an icon with a down arrow. Click the icon to open a menu with some commands to delete comments. - + Delete the current comment. - + Delete all comments by this author in the current document. - + Delete all comments in the current document. Choose a command to delete the current comment, or all comments from the same author as the current comment, or all comments in the document.22500 shown for Reply, which is the same as Delete. If the comment in a text document was written by another author, there is a Reply command in the context menu. This command inserts a new comment adjacent to the comment to which you want to reply. The comment anchor is the same for both comments. Type your reply text in the new comment. Save and send your document to other authors, then those authors can add replies, too.View - Comments command diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04100000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04100000.xhp index bd9cab9c9b..6826462694 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04100000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04100000.xhp @@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ - + Special Character Inserts special characters from the installed fonts. @@ -56,10 +56,10 @@ When you click a character in the Special Characters dialog, a preview and the corresponding numerical code for the character is displayed. - + Font Select a font to display the special characters that are associated with it. - + Subset Select a Unicode category for the current font. The special characters for the selected Unicode category are displayed in the character table. @@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ Click the special character(s) that you want to insert, and then click OK. Characters Displays the special characters that you have selected. - + Delete Clears the current selection of special characters that you want to insert.
diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04140000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04140000.xhp index e4b2ce210f..a7e9738783 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04140000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04140000.xhp @@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ Style Select the frame style for the graphic. - + Link Inserts the selected graphic file as a link. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04150100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04150100.xhp index f5033b7cef..55d57588bb 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04150100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04150100.xhp @@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ inserting; OLE objects objects; inserting OLE objects - + Insert OLE Object Inserts an OLE object into the current document. The OLE object is inserted as a link or an embedded object. @@ -58,19 +58,19 @@ To speed up the display of the document, OLE objects are kept in the program cache. If you want to change the cache settings, choose Tools - Options - $[officename] - Memory. You cannot use the clipboard or drag and drop to move OLE objects to other files. Empty and inactive OLE objects are transparent. -Create new +Create new Creates a new OLE object based on the object type that you select. -Object type +Object type Select the type of document that you want to create. -Create from file +Create from file Creates an OLE object from an existing file. File Choose the file that you want to insert as an OLE object. -File +File Enter the name of the file that you want to link or embed, or click Search, to locate the file. -Search... +Search... Locate the file that you want to insert, and then click Open. -Link to file +Link to file Enable this checkbox to insert the OLE object as a link to the original file. If this checkbox is not enabled, the OLE object will be embedded into your document.which consequences? cannot find featuremail or spec doc diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04150200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04150200.xhp index ae53c8fb12..fab2723781 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04150200.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04150200.xhp @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ MW deleted "adding;" - + @@ -65,15 +65,15 @@
- + File/URL Enter the URL for the plug-in or click Browse, and then locate the plug-in that you want to insert. - + Browse Locate the plug-in that you want to insert, and then click Open. - + Options Enter the parameters for the plug-in using the format parameter1="some text". diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020100.xhp index 107382eeb2..8323f81b1c 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020100.xhp @@ -80,37 +80,37 @@ To enable support for complex text layout and Asian character sets, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Languages, and then select the Enabled box in the corresponding area. - - - - + + + + Font Enter the name of an installed font that you want to use, or select a font from the list. - - - - + + + + Typeface Select the formatting that you want to apply. - - - - + + + + Size Enter or select the font size that you want to apply. For scalable fonts, you can also enter decimal values. If you are creating a Style that is based on another Style, you can enter a percentage value or a point value (for example, -2pt or +5pt). - - - - + + + + Language Sets the language that the spellchecker uses for the selected text or the text that you type. Available language modules have a check mark in front of them. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020200.xhp index 0bac01ea07..8152338e86 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020200.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020200.xhp @@ -69,8 +69,8 @@ - - + + Font Color Sets the color for the selected text. If you select Automatic, the text color is set to black for light backgrounds and to white for dark backgrounds. @@ -100,7 +100,7 @@ Click to apply the current font color to the selected characters. You can also click here, and then drag a selection to change the text color. Click the arrow next to the icon to open the Font color toolbar. - + Effects @@ -127,15 +127,15 @@ - + Relief Select a relief effect to apply to the selected text. The embossed relief makes the characters appear as if they are raised above the page. The engraved relief makes the characters appear as if they are pressed into the page. - + Outline Displays the outline of the selected characters. This effect does not work with every font. - + Shadow Adds a shadow that casts below and to the right of the selected characters. @@ -144,50 +144,50 @@ blinking fonts flashing fonts - - + + Blinking Makes the selected characters blink. You cannot change the blink frequency. - + Hidden Hides the selected characters. To display the hidden text, ensure that Non-printing Characters is selected in the View menu. You can also choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids and select Hidden text. Overlines or removes overlining from the selected text. If the cursor is not in a word, the new text that you enter is overlined. - + Overlining Select the overlining style that you want to apply. To apply the overlining to words only, select the Individual Words box. - + Overline color Select the color for the overlining. - + Strikethrough Select a strikethrough style for the selected text. If you save your document in MS Word format, all of the strikethrough styles are converted to the single line style. - + Underlining Select the underlining style that you want to apply. To apply the underlining to words only, select the Individual Words box. If you apply underlining to a superscript text, the underlining is raised to the level of the superscript. If the superscript is contained in a word with normal text, the underlining is not raised. - + Underline color Select the color for the underlining. - + Individual words Applies the selected effect only to words and ignores spaces. - + Emphasis mark Select a character to display over or below the entire length of the selected text. - + Position Specify where to display the emphasis marks. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020300.xhp index 65d69fec8a..afa1d31149 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020300.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020300.xhp @@ -64,7 +64,7 @@
- + Category Select a category from the list, and then select a formatting style in the Format box. @@ -81,7 +81,7 @@ Format Select how you want the contents of the selected cell(s) to be displayed. The code for the selected option is displayed in the Format Code box. - + Currency category list boxes Select a currency, and then scroll to the top of the Format list to view the formatting options for the currency.
@@ -90,36 +90,36 @@
- + Language Specifies the language setting for the selected cells fields. With the language set to Automatic, $[officename] automatically applies the number formats associated with the system default language. Select any language to fix the settings for the selected cells fields. The language setting ensures that date and currency formats are preserved even when the document is opened in an operating system that uses a different default language setting. - + Source format Uses the same number format as the cells containing the data for the chart. Options Specify the options for the selected format. - + Decimal places Enter the number of decimal places that you want to display. - + Leading zeroes Enter the maximum number of zeroes to display in front of the decimal point. - + Negative numbers in red Changes the font color of negative numbers to red. - + Use thousands separator Inserts a separator between thousands. The type of separator that is used depends on your language settings. - + Format code Displays the number format code for the selected format. You can also enter a custom format. The following options are only available for user-defined number formats. @@ -135,7 +135,7 @@ Edit Comment Adds a comment to the selected number format.. - + Name line Enter a comment for the selected number format, and then click outside this box. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020400.xhp index 9517c4fb8b..555df170a0 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020400.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020400.xhp @@ -65,26 +65,26 @@ Hyperlink Specify the properties for the hyperlink. - + URL Enter a URL for the file that you want to open when you click the hyperlink. If you do not specify a target frame, the file opens in the current document or frame. - + Browse Locate the file that you want to link to, and then click Open. - + Reference Enter the text that you want to display for the hyperlink. - + Events Specify an event that triggers when you click the hyperlink. - + Name
Enter a name for the hyperlink. $[officename] inserts a NAME tag in the hyperlink: <A HREF="http://www.sun.com/" NAME="Nametext" TARGET="_blank">Note</A>
- + Frame
Enter the name of the frame that you want the linked file to open in, or select a predefined frame from the list. If you leave this box blank, the linked file opens in the current browser window. @@ -92,10 +92,10 @@
Character Styles Specify the formatting options for the hyperlink. - + Visited links Select a formatting style to use for visited links from the list. To add or modify a style in this list, close this dialog, and click the Styles and Formatting icon on the Formatting toolbar. - + Unvisited links Select a formatting style to use for unvisited links from the list. To add or modify a style in this list, close this dialog, and click the Styles and Formatting icon on the Formatting toolbar.
diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020500.xhp index 66598e751a..68c1785e83 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020500.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020500.xhp @@ -72,51 +72,51 @@ Position Set the subscript or superscript options for a character. - + Superscript Reduces the font size of the selected text and raises the text above the baseline. - + Normal Removes superscript or subscript formatting. - + Subscript Reduces the font size of the selected text and lowers the text below the baseline. - + Raise/lower by Enter the amount by which you want to raise or to lower the selected text in relation to the baseline. One hundred percent is equal to the height of the font. - + Relative font size Enter the amount by which you want to reduce the font size of the selected text. - + Automatic Automatically sets the amount by which the selected text is raised or lowered in relation to the baseline. Rotation / scaling Set the rotation and the scaling options for the selected text. - + 0 degrees Does not rotate the selected text. - + 90 degrees Rotates the selected text to the left by 90 degrees. - + 270 degrees Rotates the selected text to the right by 90 degrees. - + Fit to line Stretches or compresses the selected text so that it fits between the line that is above the text and the line that is below the text. - + Scale width Enter the percentage of the font width by which to horizontally stretch or compress the selected text. Spacing Specify the spacing between individual characters. - + Spacing Specifies the spacing between the characters of the selected text. For expanded or condensed spacing, enter the amount that you want to expand or condense the text in the by box. @@ -133,10 +133,10 @@ Condensed - decreases the character spacing - + by Enter the amount by which you want to expand or condense the character spacing for the selected text. - + Pair kerning Automatically adjust the character spacing for specific letter combinations. Kerning is only available for certain font types and requires that your printer support this option. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020600.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020600.xhp index 5c2d3a4fd0..add3469805 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020600.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020600.xhp @@ -59,15 +59,15 @@
Double-lined Set the double-line options for the selected text. - + Write in double lines Allows you to write in double lines in the area that you selected in the current document. Enclosing characters Specify the characters to enclose the double-lined area. - + Initial character Select the character to define the start of the double-lined area. If you want to choose a custom character, select Other Characters. - + Final character Select the character to define the end of the double-lined area. If you want to choose a custom character, select Other Characters. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020700.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020700.xhp index 6bc44350c9..56088820cf 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020700.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020700.xhp @@ -56,11 +56,11 @@ Line change Set the options for line breaks in Asian language documents. -Apply list of forbidden characters to the beginning and end of line +Apply list of forbidden characters to the beginning and end of line Prevents the characters in the list from starting or ending a line. The characters are relocated to either the previous or the next line. To edit the list of restricted characters, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Asian Layout. -Allow hanging punctuation +Allow hanging punctuation Prevents commas and periods from breaking the line. Instead, these characters are added to the end of the line, even in the page margin. - + Apply spacing between Asian, Latin and Complex text Inserts a space between Asian, Latin and complex characters. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030100.xhp index a8fe4be2a5..25c3c50ded 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030100.xhp @@ -66,16 +66,16 @@ Indent Specify the amount of space to leave between the left and the right page margins and the paragraph. - + Before text Enter the amount of space that you want to indent the paragraph from the page margin. If you want the paragraph to extend into the page margin, enter a negative number. In Left-to-Right languages, the left edge of the paragraph is indented with respect to the left page margin. In Right-to-Left languages, the right edge of the paragraph is indented with respect to the right page margin. - + After text Enter the amount of space that you want to indent the paragraph from the page margin. If you want the paragraph to extend into the page margin, enter a negative number. In Left-to-Right languages, the right edge of the paragraph is indented with respect to the right page margin. In Right-to-Left languages, the left edge of the paragraph is indented with respect to the left page margin. - + First line Indents the first line of a paragraph by the amount that you enter. To create a hanging indent enter a positive value for "Before text" and a negative value for "First line". To indent the first line of a paragraph that uses numbering or bullets, choose "Format - Bullets and Numbering - Position". - + Automatic @@ -84,7 +84,7 @@ Spacing Specify the amount of space to leave between selected paragraphs. - + Above paragraph Enter the amount of space that you want to leave above the selected paragraph(s). @@ -112,11 +112,11 @@ - + Below paragraph Enter the amount of space that you want to leave below the selected paragraph(s). - + Line spacing Specify the amount of space to leave between lines of text in a paragraph. @@ -147,8 +147,8 @@ Sets the line spacing to exactly match the value that you enter in the box. This can result in cropped characters. - - + + of Enter the value to use for the line spacing. @@ -156,7 +156,7 @@ Register-true - + Activate diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030300.xhp index f7a10320e8..2be1662af9 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030300.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030300.xhp @@ -54,52 +54,52 @@
- + Position Select a tab stop type, enter a new measurement, and then click New. If you want, you can also specify the measurement units to use for the tab (cm for centimeter, or " for inches). Existing tabs to the left of the first tab that you set are removed. Type Select the type of tab stop that you want to modify. - + Left The name of this tab stop is Left/Top if Asian language support is enabled. Aligns the left edge of the text to the tab stop and extends the text to the right. - + Right This name of this tab stop is Right/Bottom if Asian language support is enabled. Aligns the right edge of the text to the tab stop and extends the text to the left of the tab stop. - + Center Aligns the center of the text to the tab stop. - + Decimal Aligns the decimal point of a number to the center of the tab stop and text to the left of the tab. The character that is used as a decimal separator depends on the regional setting of your operating system. - + Character Enter a character that you want the decimal tab to use as a decimal separator. Fill Character Specify the characters to use as leader to the left of the tab stop. - + None Inserts no fill characters, or removes existing fill characters to the left of the tab stop. - + ....... Fills the empty space to the left of the tab stop with dots. - + ------ Fills the empty space to the left of the tab stop with dashes. - + ______ Draws a line to fill the empty space to the left of the tab stop. - - + + Character Allows you to specify a character to fill the empty space to the left of the tab stop. - + New Adds the tab stop that you defined to the current paragraph. - + Clear All Removes all of the tab stops that you defined under Position. Sets Left tab stops at regular intervals as the default tab stops. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030500.xhp index d81485a1ac..24f3399592 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030500.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030500.xhp @@ -64,22 +64,22 @@ If you are in a table or spreadsheet, you can also add or remove predefined borders. Use the Borders icon on the Table Bar. -Line +Line Click the border style that you want to apply. The style is applied to the borders selected in the preview. -Select the line color that you want to use for the selected border(s). +Select the line color that you want to use for the selected border(s). Spacing to contents Specify the amount of space that you want to leave between the border and the contents of the selection. -Left +Left Enter the distance that you want to have between the left border and the contents of the selection. -Right +Right Enter the distance that you want to have between the right border and the contents of the selection. -Top +Top Enter the distance that you want to have between the top border and the contents of the selection. -Bottom +Bottom Enter the distance that you want to have between the bottom border and the contents of the selection. -Synchronize +Synchronize Applies the same spacing to contents setting to all four borders when you enter a new distance. shadows; borders borders; shadows @@ -90,16 +90,16 @@ Graphics or objects that are anchored to a frame in the document cannot exceed the size of the frame. If you apply a shadow to the borders of an object that fills an entire frame, the size of the object is reduced to display the shadows. Position Click a shadow style for the selected borders. -Distance +Distance Enter the width of the shadow. -Color +Color Select a color for the shadow. Properties Specifies the properties for the current paragraph or the selected paragraphs. -Merge with next paragraph +Merge with next paragraph Merges the border style and the shadow style of the current paragraph with the next paragraph. These styles are only merged if the indent, border, and shadow styles of the next paragraph are the same as the current paragraph. This option is also available for Paragraph Styles.UFI: see spec "spec-merge-borders-and-shadow" -Merge adjacent line styles +Merge adjacent line styles Merges two different border styles of adjacent cells in a Writer table into one border style. This property is valid for a whole table in a Writer document. The rules can be condensed to the statement that the stronger attribute wins. If, for example, one cell has a red border of 2 point width, and the adjacent cell has a blue border of 3 point width, then the common border between these two cells will be blue with 3 point width.UFI: see spec "collapsing_table_borders" diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030600.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030600.xhp index 29e5e88d77..ce2b6b1aac 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030600.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030600.xhp @@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ - + As Select the type of background that you want to apply. Using a Color as a Background @@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ - + Transparency @@ -83,8 +83,8 @@ Set the transparency for the background color or graphic of a frame, where 100% is completely transparent and 0% is opaque. When you increase the transparency of the background, the underlying text or objects become visible through the background of the frame. - - + + For @@ -103,15 +103,15 @@ Display field Shows the path for the graphic file. - + Link Links to or embeds the graphic file in the current file. - + Preview Displays or hides a preview of the selected graphic. - + Browse Locate the graphic file that you want to use as a background, and then click Open. @@ -119,15 +119,15 @@ oldref="25">Type Specify the way that you want to display the background graphic. - + Position Select this option, and then click a location in the position grid. - + Area Stretches the graphic to fill the entire background of the selected object. - + Tile Repeats the graphic so that it covers the entire background of the selected object. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030700.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030700.xhp index dc6de00788..e3fc1c10a1 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030700.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030700.xhp @@ -59,56 +59,56 @@ Alignment Set the alignment options for the current paragraph. - + Left Aligns the paragraph to the left page margin. If Asian language support is enabled, this option is named Left/Top. - + Right Aligns the paragraph to the right page margin. If Asian language support is enabled, this option is named Right/Bottom. - + Centered Centers the contents of the paragraph on the page. - + Justify Aligns the paragraph to the left and to the right page margins. - + Last Line Specify the alignment for the last line in the paragraph. - + Expand single word If the last line of a justified paragraph consists of one word, the word is stretched to the width of the paragraph. - + Snap to text grid (if active)UFI: asian enabled Aligns the paragraph to a text grid. To activate the text grid, choose Format - Page - Text Grid. - + Text-to-text - Alignment Select an alignment option for oversized or undersized characters in the paragraph relative to the rest of the text in the paragraph.
Properties - - - - + + + + Text direction Specify the text direction for a paragraph that uses complex text layout (CTL). This feature is only available if complex text layout support is enabled.
diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030800.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030800.xhp index 08592a655e..bc98b4b2cc 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030800.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030800.xhp @@ -62,42 +62,42 @@
Crop Use this area to trim or scale the selected graphic, or to add white space around the graphic. - + Keep scale Maintains the original scale of the graphic when you crop, so that only the size of the graphic changes. - + Keep image size Maintains the original size of the graphic when you crop, so that only the scale of the graphic changes. To reduce the scale of the graphic, select this option and enter negative values in the cropping boxes. To increase the scale of the graphic, enter positive values in the cropping boxes. - + Left If the Keep Scale option is selected, enter a positive amount to trim the left edge of the graphic, or a negative amount to add white space to the left of the graphic. If the Keep image size option is selected, enter a positive amount to increase the horizontal scale of the graphic, or a negative amount to decrease the horizontal scale of the graphic. - + Right If the Keep Scale option is selected, enter a positive amount to trim the right edge of the graphic, or a negative amount to add white space to the right of the graphic. If the Keep image size option is selected, enter a positive amount to increase the horizontal scale of the graphic, or a negative amount to decrease the horizontal scale of the graphic. - + Top If the Keep Scale option is selected, enter a positive amount to trim the top of the graphic, or a negative amount to add white space above the graphic. If the Keep image size option is selected, enter a positive amount to increase the vertical scale of the graphic, or a negative amount to decrease the vertical scale of the graphic. - + Bottom If the Keep Scale option is selected, enter a positive amount to trim the bottom of the graphic, or a negative amount to add white space below the graphic. If the Keep image size option is selected, enter a positive amount to increase the vertical scale of the graphic, or a negative amount to decrease the vertical scale of the graphic. Scale Changes the scale of the selected graphic. - + Width Enter the width for the selected graphic as a percentage. - + Height Enter the height of the selected graphic as a percentage. Image size Changes the size of the selected graphic. - + Width Enter a width for the selected graphic. - + Height Enter a height for the selected graphic. - + Original Size Returns the selected graphic to its original size.
diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05040100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05040100.xhp index 34656fcbd5..f1e857025e 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05040100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05040100.xhp @@ -52,27 +52,27 @@
- + Name Displays the name of the selected style. If you are creating or modifying a custom style, enter a name for the style. You cannot change the name of a predefined style. - + AutoUpdate Updates the style when you apply direct formatting to a paragraph using this style in your document. The formatting of all paragraphs using this style is automatically updated. Updates the style when you apply direct formatting to a paragraph using this style in your document. The formatting of all paragraphs using this style is automatically updated. - + Next Style Select an existing style that you want to follow the current style in your document. For paragraph styles, the next style is applied to the paragraph that is created when you press Enter. For page styles, the next style is applied when a new page is created. - + Linked with Select an existing style that you want to base the new style on, or select none to define your own style. - + Category Displays the category for the current style. If you are creating or modifying a new style, select 'Custom Style' from the list. You cannot change the category for a predefined style. - + Contains Describes the relevant formatting used in the current style. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05040200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05040200.xhp index 7f1ef53547..82982c3e3b 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05040200.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05040200.xhp @@ -64,40 +64,40 @@ Paper format Select from a list of predefined paper sizes, or define a custom paper format. - + Format Select a predefined paper size, or create a custom format by entering the dimensions for the paper in the Height and Width boxes. - + Width Displays the width of the selected paper format. To define a custom format, enter a width here. - + Height Displays the height of the selected paper format. To define a custom format, enter a height here. - + Portrait Displays and prints the current document with the paper oriented vertically. - + Landscape Displays and prints the current document with the paper oriented horizontally. - + Text direction Select the text direction that you want to use in your document. The "right-to-left (vertical)" text flow direction rotates all layout settings to the right by 90 degrees, except for the header and footer. - + Paper tray Select the paper source for your printer. If you want, you can assign different paper trays to different page styles. For example, assign a different tray to the First Page style and load the tray with your company's letterhead paper.UFI: #i31234# Margins Specify the amount of space to leave between the edges of the page and the document text. - + Left / Inner Enter the amount of space to leave between the left edge of the page and the document text. If you are using the Mirrored page layout, enter the amount of space to leave between the inner text margin and the inner edge of the page. - + Right / Outer Enter the amount of space to leave between the right edge of the page and the document text. If you are using the Mirrored page layout, enter the amount of space to leave between the outer text margin and the outer edge of the page. - + Top Enter the amount of space to leave between the upper edge of the page and the document text. - + Bottom Enter the amount of space to leave between the lower edge of the page and the document text. @@ -106,8 +106,8 @@ Select the page layout style to use in the current document. - -ufi: see i47727 why the switched help text is not shown + +ufi: see i47727 why the switched help text is not shown Page layout @@ -140,14 +140,14 @@ The current page style shows only even (left) pages. Odd pages are shown as blank pages. Register-true - - + + Aligns the text on the selected Page Style to a vertical page grid. Register-true Aligns the text on the selected Page Style to a vertical page grid. The spacing of the grid is defined by the Reference Style. - + Select the Paragraph Style that you want to use as a reference for lining up the text on the selected Page style. The height of the font that is specified in the reference style sets the spacing of the vertical page grid. Reference Style @@ -157,24 +157,24 @@ Specify the alignment options for the cells on a printed page. - + Centers the cells horizontally on the printed page. Horizontal Centers the cells horizontally on the printed page. - + Centers the cells vertically on the printed page. Vertical Centers the cells vertically on the printed page. Layout settings - -ufi: removed switches + +ufi: removed switches Format Select the page numbering format that you want to use for the current page style. - + Resizes the drawing objects so that they fit on the paper format that you select. The arrangement of the drawing objects is preserved. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05040300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05040300.xhp index e7e72e7f84..25b719eac1 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05040300.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05040300.xhp @@ -65,39 +65,39 @@ Header Set the properties of the header. - + Header on Adds a header to the current page style. - + Same content left/righti80087 Even and odd pages share the same content. To assign a different header to even and odd pages, clear this option, and then click Edit. - + Left margin Enter the amount of space to leave between the left edge of the page and the left edge of the header. - + Right margin Enter the amount of space to leave between the right edge of the page and the right edge of the header. - + Spacing Enter the amount of space that you want to maintain between the bottom edge of the header and the top edge of the document text. - + Use dynamic spacing Overrides the Spacing setting, and allows the header to expand into the area between the header and the document text. - + Height Enter the height that you want for the header. - + AutoFit height Automatically adjusts the height of the header to fit the content that you enter. - + More Defines a border, a background color, or a background pattern for the header. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05040400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05040400.xhp index c44ab73039..1d58bffd2f 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05040400.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05040400.xhp @@ -65,39 +65,39 @@ Footer Set the properties of the footer. - + Footer on Adds a footer to the current page style. - + Same content left/right Even and odd pages share the same content. To assign a different footer to even and odd pages, clear this option, and then click Edit. - + Left margin Enter the amount of space to leave between the left edge of the page and the left edge of the footer. - + Right margin Enter the amount of space to leave between the right edge of the page and the right edge of the footer. - + Spacing Enter the amount of space that you want to maintain between the bottom edge of the document text and the top edge of the footer. - + Use dynamic spacing Overrides the Spacing setting and allows the footer to expand into the area between the footer and document text. - + Height Enter the height you want for the footer. - + AutoFit height Automatically adjusts the height of the footer to fit the content you enter. - + More Defines a border, a background color, or a background pattern for the footer. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05060000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05060000.xhp index ba72b6f498..6fa2d87351 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05060000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05060000.xhp @@ -66,23 +66,23 @@ Enter the text that you want to use as a pronunciation guide in the Ruby text box. - - - -Base text + + + +Base text Displays the base text that you selected in the current file. If you want, you can modify the base text by entering new text here. - - - -Ruby text + + + +Ruby text Enter the text that you want to use as a pronunciation guide for the base text. -Alignment +Alignment Select the horizontal alignment for the Ruby text. -Position +Position Select where you want to place the ruby text. -Character Style for ruby text +Character Style for ruby text Select a character style for the ruby text. -Styles and FormattingUFI: renamed?? +Styles and FormattingUFI: renamed?? Opens the Styles and Formatting window Styles and Formatting window where you can select a character style for the ruby text. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05100200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05100200.xhp index 0461b8cef1..1e2000ca59 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05100200.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05100200.xhp @@ -72,17 +72,17 @@ - + Split cell into Enter the number of rows or columns that you want to split the selected cell(s) into. Direction - + Horizontally Splits the selected cell(s) into the number of rows that you specify in the Split cell into box. - + Into equal proportions Splits cells into rows of equal height. - + Vertically Splits the selected cell(s) into the number of columns that you specify in the Split cell into box. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05140100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05140100.xhp index f92450ab67..9366795a1f 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05140100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05140100.xhp @@ -46,7 +46,7 @@ Create Style This command is a Styl_ist icon - Style name + Style name Enter a name for the new Style. List of Custom Styles Lists the user-defined styles that are attached to the current document. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05150101.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05150101.xhp index 68a2e32360..bc0923ee99 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05150101.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05150101.xhp @@ -44,7 +44,7 @@ Add AutoFormat - Name + Name Enter a name for the new AutoFormat, and then click OK. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05190000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05190000.xhp index 53ac8d994b..75a4cdd6de 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05190000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05190000.xhp @@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ The name is also displayed in the Status Bar when you select the object. - + Name Enter a name for the selected object. The name will be visible in the Navigator. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05190100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05190100.xhp index 6da9f0be4c..ec6b074d20 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05190100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05190100.xhp @@ -54,9 +54,9 @@
-Title +Title Enter a title text. This short name is visible as an alternative tag in HTML format. Accessibility tools can read this text. -Description +Description Enter a description text. The long description text can be entered to describe a complex object or group of objects to users with screen reader software. The description is visible as an alternative tag for accessibility tools. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05200100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05200100.xhp index 9d9f736321..5aea0dfd71 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05200100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05200100.xhp @@ -53,23 +53,23 @@ Line properties -Styles +Styles Select the line style that you want to use. -Colors +Colors Select a color for the line. -Widths +Widths Select the width for the line. You can append a measurement unit. A zero line width results in a hairline with a width of one pixel of the output medium. -Transparency +Transparency Enter the transparency of the line, where 100% corresponds to completely transparent and 0% to completely opaque. @@ -77,26 +77,26 @@ The Line tab of the Data Series dialog is only available if you select an XY Chart type. Icon Set the options for the data point symbols in your chart. -Select +Select Select the symbol style that you want to use in your chart. If you select Automatic, $[officename] uses the default symbols for the selected chart type. -Width +Width Enter a width for the symbol. -Height +Height Enter a height for the symbol. -Keep ratio +Keep ratio Maintains the proportions of the symbol when you enter a new height or width value. Arrow styles You can add arrowheads to one end, or both ends of the selected line. To add a custom arrow style to the list, select the arrow in your document, and then click on the Arrow Styles tab of this dialog. - -Style + +Style Select the arrowhead that you want to apply to the selected line. - -Width + +Width Enter a width for the arrowhead. - -Center + +Center Places the center of the arrowhead(s) on the endpoint(s) of the selected line. -Synchronize ends +Synchronize ends Automatically updates both arrowhead settings when you enter a different width, select a different arrowhead style,or center an arrowhead. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05200200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05200200.xhp index 48ff35bc75..4a1fd63aa7 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05200200.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05200200.xhp @@ -50,41 +50,41 @@ Properties - + Line style Select the style of line that you want to create. - - + + Type Select the combination of dashes and dots that you want. - - + + Number Enter the number of times that you want a dot or a dash to appear in a sequence. - - + + Length Enter the length of the dash. - + Spacing Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between dots or dashes. - + Fit to line width Automatically adjusts the entries relative to the length of the line. - + Add Creates a new line style using the current settings. - + Name Enter a name for the new line style. - + Modify Updates the selected line style using the current settings. To change the name of the selected line style, enter a new name when prompted. - + Load line style table Imports a list of line styles. - + Save line style table Saves the current list of line styles, so that you can load it again later. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05200300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05200300.xhp index 8255f66301..6101d99904 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05200300.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05200300.xhp @@ -51,23 +51,23 @@ Organize arrow styles Lets you organize the current list of arrow styles. - + Title Displays the name of the selected arrow style. - + Arrow style Choose a predefined arrow style symbol from the list box. - + Add To define a custom arrow style, select a drawing object in the document, and then click here. - + Modify Changes the name of the selected arrow style. - + Load Arrow Styles Imports a list of arrow styles. - + Save Arrow Styles Saves the current list of arrow styles, so that you can load it later. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210100.xhp index 45a6cdc49c..bc4c3911b2 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210100.xhp @@ -66,10 +66,10 @@ List boxes on the Drawing Object Properties toolbar: - + None Does not apply a fill to the selected object. If the object contains a fill, the fill is removed. - + Color Fills the selected object with the color that you click in the list. @@ -80,73 +80,73 @@ To add a color to the list, choose Format - Area, click the Colors tab, and then click Edit. - + Gradient Fills the selected object with the gradient that you click in the list. - + Hatching Fills the selected object with the hatching pattern that you click in the list. To apply a background color to the hatching pattern, select the Background color box, and then click a color in the list. - + Bitmap Fills the selected object with the bitmap pattern that you click in the list. To add a bitmap to the list, open this dialog in %PRODUCTNAME Draw, click the Bitmaps tab, and then click Import. - - - - + + + + Area Fill Click the fill that you want to apply to the selected object. Increments (Gradients) Set the number of steps for blending the two end colors of a gradient. - + Automatic Automatically determines the number of steps for blending the two end colors of the gradient. - + Increment Enter the number of steps for blending the two end colors of the gradient. Size (Bitmaps) Specify the dimensions of the bitmap. - + Relative Rescales the bitmap relative to the size of the selected object by the percentage values that you enter in the Width and Height boxes . Clear this checkbox to resize the selected object with the measurements that you enter in the Width and Height boxes. - + Original Retains the original size of the bitmap when filling the selected object. To resize the bitmap, clear this checkbox, and then click Relative. - + Width Enter a width for the bitmap. - + Height Enter a height for the bitmap. Position (Bitmaps) Click in the position grid to specify the offset for tiling the bitmap. - + X Offset Enter the horizontal offset for tiling the bitmap. - + Y Offset Enter the vertical offset for tiling the bitmap. - + Tile Tiles the bitmap to fill the selected object. - + AutoFit Stretches the bitmap to fill the selected object. To use this feature, clear the Tile box. Offset Specify the offset for tiling the bitmap in terms of rows and columns. - + Row Horizontally offsets the original bitmap relative to the bitmap tiles by the amount that you enter. - + Column Vertically offsets the original bitmap relative to the bitmap tiles by the amount that you enter. - + Percent Enter the percentage to offset the rows or columns. Background Color (Hatching) - + Background color Applies a background color to the hatching pattern. Select this checkbox, and then click a color in the list. - + List of colors Click the color that you want to use as a background for the selected hatching pattern. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210300.xhp index d03a845624..0b4a1423fc 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210300.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210300.xhp @@ -49,53 +49,53 @@
- + Type Select the gradient that you want to apply. - + Center X Enter the horizontal offset for the gradient, where 0% corresponds to the current horizontal location of the endpoint color in the gradient. The endpoint color is the color that is selected in the To box. - + Center Y Enter the vertical offset for the gradient, where 0% corresponds to the current vertical location of the endpoint color in the gradient. The endpoint color is the color that is selected in the To box. - + Angle Enter a rotation angle for the selected gradient. - + Border Enter the amount by which you want to adjust the area of the endpoint color on the gradient. The endpoint color is the color that is selected in the To box. From - + Select a color for the beginning point of the gradient. - + Enter the intensity for the color in the From box, where 0% corresponds to black, and 100 % to the selected color. To - + Select a color for the endpoint of the gradient. - + Enter the intensity for the color in the To box, where 0% corresponds to black, and 100 % to the selected color. - + Gradients Select the type of gradient that you want to apply or create. - + Add Adds a custom gradient to the current list. Specify the properties of your gradient, and then click this button - + Modify Applies the current gradient properties to the selected gradient. If you want, you can save the gradient under a different name. - + Load Gradients List Load a different list of gradients. - + Save Gradients List Saves the current list of gradients, so that you can load it later. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210400.xhp index e8401f946e..4e438ff3f7 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210400.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210400.xhp @@ -55,38 +55,38 @@ Properties Define or modify a hatching pattern. - + Spacing Enter the amount of space that you want to have between the hatch lines. - + Angle Enter the rotation angle for the hatch lines, or click a position in the angle grid. Angle grid Click a position in the grid to define the rotation angle for the hatch lines. - + Line type Select the type of hatch lines that you want to use. - + Line color Select the color of the hatch lines. Hatches List Lists the available hatching patterns. You can also modify or create your own hatching pattern. To save the list, click the Save Hatches List button. To display a different list, click the Load Hatches List button. - + Hatches list Lists the available hatching patterns. Click the hatching pattern that you want to apply, and then click OK. - + Add Adds a custom hatching pattern to the current list. Specify the properties of your hatching pattern, and then click this button. - + Modify Applies the current hatching properties to the selected hatching pattern. If you want, you can save the pattern under a different name. - + Load Hatches List Loads a different list of hatching patterns. - + Save Hatches List Saves the current list of hatching patterns, so that you can load it later. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210500.xhp index ff9361dbaa..67e154203e 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210500.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210500.xhp @@ -59,30 +59,30 @@ Use this editor to create a simple, two-color, 8x8 pixel bitmap pattern. Grid To enable this editor, select the Blank bitmap in the bitmap list. - + Foreground color Select a foreground color, and then click in the grid to add a pixel to the pattern. - + Background color Select a background color for your bitmap pattern. - + Bitmap Pattern Select a bitmap in the list, and then click OK to apply the pattern to the selected object. - + Add Adds a bitmap that you created in the Pattern Editor to the current list. - + Modify Replaces a bitmap that you created in the Pattern Editor with the current bitmap pattern. If you want, you can save the pattern under a different name. - + Import Locate the bitmap that you want to import, and then click Open. The bitmap is added to the end of the list of available bitmaps. - + Load Bitmap List Loads a different list of bitmaps. - + Save Bitmap List Saves the current list of bitmaps, so that you can load it later. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210600.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210600.xhp index cbc32f0b83..c96f56f54b 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210600.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210600.xhp @@ -58,19 +58,19 @@ Properties Set the properties of the shadow that you want to apply. - + Use shadow Adds a shadow to the selected drawing object. Position Click where you want to cast the shadow. - + Distance Enter the distance that you want the shadow to be offset from the selected object. - + Color Select a color for the shadow. - + Transparency Enter a percentage from 0% (opaque) to 100% (transparent) to specify the transparency of the shadow. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210700.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210700.xhp index a2f4a0a86a..5945e649a7 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210700.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210700.xhp @@ -55,37 +55,37 @@ Transparency mode Specify the type of transparency that you want to apply. - + No transparency Turns off color transparency. This is the default setting. - + Transparency Turns on color transparency. Select this option, and then enter a number in the box, where 0% is fully opaque and 100% is fully transparent. - + Transparency spin button Adjusts the transparency of the current fill color. Enter a number between 0% (opaque) and 100% (transparent). - + Gradient Applies a transparency gradient to the current fill color. Select this option, and then set the gradient properties. - + Type Select the type of transparency gradient that you want to apply. - + Center X Enter the horizontal offset for the gradient. - + Center Y Enter the vertical offset for the gradient. - + Angle Enter a rotation angle for the gradient. - + Border Enter the amount by which you want to adjust the transparent area of the gradient. The default value is 0%. - + Start value Enter a transparency value for the beginning point of the gradient, where 0% is fully opaque and 100% is fully transparent. - + End value Enter a transparency value for the endpoint of the gradient, where 0% is fully opaque and 100% is fully transparent. Preview diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05220000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05220000.xhp index dce8233dc5..ca591f26ca 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05220000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05220000.xhp @@ -57,42 +57,42 @@ The text is positioned relative to the edges of the drawing or text object. Text - + Fit width to text Expands the width of the object to the width of the text, if the object is smaller than the text. - + Fit height to text Expands the height of the object to the height of the text, if the object is smaller than the text. - + Fit to frame Resizes the text to fit the entire area of the drawing or text object. - + Adjust to contour Adapts the text flow so that it matches the contours of the selected drawing object. - + Word wrap text in shape Wraps the text that you add after double-clicking a custom shape to fit inside the shape. - + Resize shape to fit text Resizes a custom shape to fit the text that you enter after double-clicking the shape. Spacing to borders Specify the amount of space to leave between the edges of the drawing or text object and the borders of the text. - + Left Enter the amount of space to leave between the left edge of the drawing or text object and the left border of the text. - + Right Enter the amount of space to leave between the right edge of the drawing or text object and the right border of the text. - + Top Enter the amount of space to leave between the top edge of the drawing or text object and the upper border of the text. - + Bottom Enter the amount of space to leave between the bottom edge of the drawing or text object and the lower border of the text. @@ -103,7 +103,7 @@ Graphic field Click where you want to place the anchor for the text. - + Full width Anchors the text to the full width of the drawing or text object. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05230100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05230100.xhp index f9864906d0..5f51b68957 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05230100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05230100.xhp @@ -61,10 +61,10 @@ Position Specify the location of the selected object on the page. - + Position X Enter the horizontal distance that you want to move the object relative to the base point selected in the grid. - + Position Y Enter the vertical distance that you want to move the object relative to the base point selected in the grid. @@ -72,45 +72,45 @@ Click a base point in the grid, and then enter the amount that you want to shift the object relative to the base point that you selected in the Position Y and Position X boxes. The base points correspond to the selection handles on an object. Size Specify the amount by which you want to resize the selected object with respect to the selected base point . - + Width Enter a width for the selected object. - + Height Enter a height for the selected object. - + Keep ratio Maintains proportions when you resize the selected object. Base point Click a base point in the grid, and then enter the new size dimensions for the selected object in the Width and Height boxes. Protect - + Position Prevents changes to the position or the size of the selected object. - + Size Prevents you from resizing the object. Anchoring Set the anchoring options for the selected object. - + Anchor Select the type of anchor for the selected object. - + Position Specifies the position of the anchor in relation to the character height. Adapt Resizes text in a drawing object with respect to the borders of the selected object. - + Fit width to text Resizes the text to fit the width of the selected object. - + Fit height to text Resizes the text to fit the height of the selected object.
diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05230300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05230300.xhp index 0406863806..55f74e8675 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05230300.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05230300.xhp @@ -54,10 +54,10 @@ The selected object is rotated around a pivot point that you specify. The default pivot point is at the center of the object. If you set a pivot point too far outside of the object boundaries, the object could be rotated off of the page. - + X Position Enter the horizontal distance from the left edge of the page to the pivot point. - + Y Position Enter the vertical distance from the top edge of the page to the pivot point. @@ -65,7 +65,7 @@ Click where you want to place the pivot point. Rotation angle Specify the number of degrees that you want to rotate the selected object, or click in the rotation grid. - + Angle Enter the number of degrees that you want to rotate the selected object. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05230400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05230400.xhp index 4bf3fab054..f8b01cc4c9 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05230400.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05230400.xhp @@ -58,12 +58,12 @@
Corner Radius You can only round the corners of a rectangular object. - + Radius Enter the radius of the circle that you want to use to round the corners. Slant Slants the selected object along an axis that you specify. - + Angle Enter the angle of the slant axis. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05230500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05230500.xhp index 4a817f60ac..9c8be08049 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05230500.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05230500.xhp @@ -62,23 +62,23 @@ These callouts are a legacy of the first versions of %PRODUCTNAME. You must customize a toolbar or menu to insert these callouts. The newer custom shape callouts offer more features, for example a Callouts toolbar Icon where you can select the shape. - + Callout Styles Click the Callout style that you want to apply to the selected callout. - + Spacing Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the end of the callout line, and the callout box. - - - + + + Extension Select where you want to extend the callout line from, in relation to the callout box. - + Length Enter the length of the callout line segment that extends from the callout box to the inflection point of the line. The Length box is only available if you select the Angled connector line callout style, and leave the Optimal checkbox cleared. - + Optimal Click here to display a single-angled line in an optimal way. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05280000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05280000.xhp index 9d8d78057a..1dd3ff678f 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05280000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05280000.xhp @@ -208,7 +208,7 @@ UFI: exclude from indexing
- + Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the text baseline and the base of the individual characters. @@ -223,7 +223,7 @@ UFI: exclude from indexing
- + Enter the amount of space to leave between the beginning of the text baseline, and the beginning of the text. @@ -313,7 +313,7 @@ UFI: exclude from indexing
- + Horizontal Distance Enter the horizontal distance between the text characters and the edge of the shadow. @@ -329,7 +329,7 @@ UFI: exclude from indexing
- + Vertical Distance Enter the vertical distance between the text characters and the edge of the shadow. @@ -345,7 +345,7 @@ UFI: exclude from indexing
- + Shadow Color Select a color for the text shadow.
diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05290100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05290100.xhp index a13e59e31f..7588eb1023 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05290100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05290100.xhp @@ -43,7 +43,7 @@ - + Group Groups the selected objects, so that they can be moved as a single object.
diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05290200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05290200.xhp index f21307882d..6b2e7361b8 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05290200.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05290200.xhp @@ -43,7 +43,7 @@ - + Ungroup Breaks apart the selected group into individual objects.
diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05320000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05320000.xhp index 5fa5f2a754..b6c1582330 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05320000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05320000.xhp @@ -44,7 +44,7 @@
-Text Animation +Text Animation Adds an animation effect to the text in the selected drawing object.
@@ -52,9 +52,9 @@
Text animation effects Select the effect that you want to apply, and then set the properties of the effect. -Effects +Effects Select the animation effect that you want to apply to the text in the selected drawing object. To remove an animation effect, select No Effect. -To the Left +To the Left Scrolls text from right to left. @@ -68,7 +68,7 @@
-To the Right +To the Right Scrolls text from left to right. @@ -82,7 +82,7 @@
-To the Top +To the Top Scrolls text from bottom to top. @@ -96,7 +96,7 @@
-To the Bottom +To the Bottom Scrolls text from top to bottom. @@ -111,27 +111,27 @@
Properties -Start Inside +Start Inside Text is visible and inside the drawing object when the effect is applied. -Text visible when exitingi60202 +Text visible when exitingi60202 Text remains visible after the effect is applied. Animation effects Set the looping options for the animation effect. -Continuous +Continuous Plays the animation effect continuously. To specify the number of times to play the effect, clear this checkbox, and enter a number in the Continuous box. -Continuous box +Continuous box Enter the number of times that you want the animation effect to repeat. Increment Specify the increment value for scrolling the text. -Pixels +Pixels Measures increment value in pixels. -Increment box +Increment box Enter the number of increments by which to scroll the text. Delay Specify the amount time to wait before repeating the effect. -Automatic +Automatic $[officename] automatically determines the amount of time to wait before repeating the effect. To manually assign the delay period, clear this checkbox, and then enter a value in the Automatic box. -Automatic box +Automatic box Enter the amount of time to wait before repeating the effect. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340100.xhp index 64ce51b804..ce0b27e810 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340100.xhp @@ -52,12 +52,12 @@
- - + + Height Enter the row height that you want to use. - - + + Default value Adjusts the row height to the size based on the default template. Existing contents may be shown vertically cropped. The height no longer increases automatically when you enter larger contents. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340200.xhp index 2e9896040a..9d121347ee 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340200.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340200.xhp @@ -50,9 +50,9 @@
You can also change the width of a column by dragging the divider beside the column header. To fit the column width to the cell contents, double-click the divider. - Width + Width Enter the column width that you want to use. - Default value Automatic + Default value Automatic Automatically adjusts the column width based on the current font. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340300.xhp index d5988cb0a3..da876c32dc 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340300.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340300.xhp @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@
- + Horizontal Select the horizontal alignment option that you want to apply to the cell contents. Default @@ -80,10 +80,10 @@ Filled Repeats the cell contents (number and text) until the visible area of the cell is filled. This feature does not work on text that contains line breaks. - + Indent Indents from the left edge of the cell by the amount that you enter. - + Vertical Select the vertical alignment option that you want to apply to the cell contents. Default @@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ Click in the dial to set the text orientation. - + Angle Enter the rotation angle for the text in the selected cell(s). A positive number rotates the text to the left and a negative number rotates the text to the right. @@ -136,24 +136,24 @@ Text Extension Inside Cells: Writes the rotated text only within the cell. - + Vertically stacked Aligns text vertically.UFI: see spec "Shrink to fit" - + Asian layout mode This checkbox is only available if Asian language support is enabled and the text direction is set to vertical. Aligns Asian characters one below the other in the selected cell(s). If the cell contains more than one line of text, the lines are converted to text columns that are arranged from right to left. Western characters in the converted text are rotated 90 degrees to the right. Asian characters are not rotated. Text flow Determine the text flow in a cell. - + Wrap text automatically Wraps text onto another line at the cell border. The number of lines depends on the width of the cell. To enter a manual line break, press Command Ctrl+Enter in the cell.conditional switches inside AVIS do not work - + Hyphenation active Enables word hyphenation for text wrapping to the next line. - + Shrink to fit cell size Reduces the apparent size of the font so that the contents of the cell fit into the current cell width. You cannot apply this command to a cell that contains line breaks. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05350200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05350200.xhp index a3944cef26..643e653489 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05350200.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05350200.xhp @@ -44,7 +44,7 @@
-Geometry +Geometry Adjusts the shape of the selected 3D object. You can only modify the shape of a 3D object that was created by converting a 2D object. To convert a 2D object to 3D, select the object, right-click, and then choose Convert - To 3D, or Convert - To 3D Rotation Object.
@@ -52,23 +52,23 @@
Geometry Define the shape properties for the selected 3D object. -Rounded edges +Rounded edges Enter the amount by which you want to round the corners of the selected 3D object. -Scaled depth +Scaled depth Enter the amount by which to increase or decrease the area of the front side of the selected 3D object. -Rotation angle +Rotation angle Enter the angle in degrees to rotate the selected 3D rotation object. -Depth +Depth Enter the extrusion depth for the selected 3D object. This option is not valid for 3D rotation objects. Segments You can change the number of segments that are used to draw a 3D rotation object. -Horizontal +Horizontal Enter the number of horizontal segments to use in the selected 3D rotation object. -Vertical +Vertical Enter the number of vertical segments to use in the selected 3D rotation object Normals Allows you to modify the rendering style of the 3D surface. -Object-Specific +Object-Specific Renders the 3D surface according to the shape of the object. For example, a circular shape is rendered with a spherical surface. @@ -82,7 +82,7 @@
-Flat +Flat Renders the 3D surface as polygons. @@ -96,7 +96,7 @@
-Spherical +Spherical Renders a smooth 3D surface. @@ -110,7 +110,7 @@
-Invert Normals +Invert Normals Inverts the light source. @@ -124,7 +124,7 @@
-Double-sided Illumination +Double-sided Illumination Lights the object from the outside and the inside. To use an ambient light source, click this button, and then click the Invert Normals button. @@ -138,7 +138,7 @@
-Double-Sided +Double-Sided Closes the shape of a 3D object that was created by extruding a freeform line (Convert - To 3D). diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05350300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05350300.xhp index c2a03aca2c..52af8d9568 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05350300.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05350300.xhp @@ -44,7 +44,7 @@
- + Shading Sets the shading and shadow options for the selected 3D object.
@@ -53,10 +53,10 @@ Shading Specify the type of shading to apply to the selected 3D object. - + Mode Select the shading method that you want to use. Flat shading assigns a single color to a single polygon on the surface of the object. Gouraud shading blends colors across the polygons. Phong shading averages the color of each pixel based on the pixels that surround it, and requires the most processing power. - + Shadow Adds or removes a shadow from the selected 3D object.
@@ -72,15 +72,15 @@
- + Surface angle Enter an angle from 0 to 90 degrees for casting the shadow. Camera Set the camera options for the selected 3D object. - + Distance Enter the distance to leave between the camera and the center of the selected object. - + Focal length Enter the focal length of the camera, where a small value corresponds to a "fisheye" lens, and a large value to a telephoto lens. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05350400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05350400.xhp index d395f6d91a..b82d403e03 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05350400.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05350400.xhp @@ -44,7 +44,7 @@
- + Illumination Define the light source for the selected 3D object.
@@ -53,14 +53,14 @@
Illumination Specify the light source for the object, as well as the color of the light source and of the ambient light. You can define up to eight different light sources. - - - - - - - - + + + + + + + + Light source Click twice to turn the light source on, and then select a color for the light from the list. If you want, you can also set the color of the surrounding light, by selecting a color from the Ambient light box. You can also press the Spacebar to turn the light source on or off. @@ -89,18 +89,18 @@
- + Color Selection Select a color for the current light source. - + Select Color in the color dialog Ambient light - + Color Selection Select a color for the ambient light. - + Select Color Through the Color Dialog diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05350500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05350500.xhp index d539b1b29b..e0c3058a09 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05350500.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05350500.xhp @@ -44,7 +44,7 @@
- + Textures Sets the properties of the surface texture for the selected 3D object. This feature is only available after you apply a surface textures to the selected object. To quickly apply a surface texture, open the Gallery, hold down Shift+Ctrl (Mac: Shift+Command), and then drag an image onto the selected 3D object.
@@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ Sets the texture properties. Type Set the color properties of the texture. - + Black & White Converts the texture to black and white. @@ -71,7 +71,7 @@
- + Color Converts the texture to color. @@ -89,7 +89,7 @@ ModeShow or hide shading. - + Only Texture Applies the texture without shading.
@@ -105,7 +105,7 @@
- + Texture and Shading Applies the texture with shading. To define the shading options for the texture, click the Shading button in this dialog. @@ -123,7 +123,7 @@ Projection XSet the options for displaying the texture. - + Object-specific Automatically adjusts the texture based on the shape and size of the object.
@@ -139,7 +139,7 @@
- + Parallel Applies the texture parallel to the horizontal axis. @@ -155,7 +155,7 @@
- + Circular Wraps the horizontal axis of the texture pattern around a sphere. @@ -173,7 +173,7 @@ Projection YClick the respective buttons to define the texture for the object Y axis. - + Object-specific Automatically adjusts the texture based on the shape and size of the object.
@@ -189,7 +189,7 @@
- + Parallel Applies the texture parallel to the vertical axis. @@ -205,7 +205,7 @@
- + Circular Wraps the vertical axis of the texture pattern around a sphere. @@ -223,7 +223,7 @@ FilterFilters out some of the 'noise' that can occur when you apply a texture to a 3D object. - + Filtering On/Off Blurs the texture slightly to remove unwanted speckles.
diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05350600.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05350600.xhp index 6c302c874b..5264facdeb 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05350600.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05350600.xhp @@ -44,7 +44,7 @@
- + Material Changes the coloring of the selected 3D object.
@@ -53,33 +53,33 @@ MaterialAssigns a predefined color scheme or lets you create your own color scheme. - + Favorites Select a predefined color scheme, or select User-defined to define a custom color scheme. - + Object color Select the color that you want to apply to the object. - + Select Color Through the Color Dialog - + Illumination color Select the color to illuminate the object. - + Select Color Through the Color Dialog Specular Sets the light reflection properties for the selected object. - + Color Select the color that you want the object to reflect. - + Select Color Through the Color Dialog - + Intensity Enter the intensity of the specular effect. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05360000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05360000.xhp index 8c21260d0a..c72762cd5f 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05360000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05360000.xhp @@ -55,36 +55,36 @@ Objects are distributed with respect to the outermost objects in the selection. Horizontally Specify the horizontal distribution for the selected objects. - + None Does not distribute the objects horizontally. - + Left Distributes the selected objects, so that the left edges of the objects are evenly spaced from one another. - + Center Distributes the selected objects, so that the horizontal centers of the objects are evenly spaced from one another. - + Spacing Distributes the selected objects horizontally, so that the objects are evenly spaced from one another. - + Right Distributes the selected objects, so that the right edges of the objects are evenly spaced from one another. Vertically Specify the vertical distribution for the selected objects. - + None Does not distribute the objects vertically. - + Top Distributes the selected objects, so that the top edges of the objects are evenly spaced from one another. - + Center Distributes the selected objects, so that the vertical centers of the objects are evenly spaced from one another. - + Spacing Distributes the selected objects vertically, so that the objects are evenly spaced from one another. - + Bottom Distributes the selected objects, so that the bottom edges of the objects are evenly spaced from one another. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06010000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06010000.xhp index d36dcd86ad..3b3f680051 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06010000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06010000.xhp @@ -59,63 +59,63 @@ The spellcheck starts at the current cursor position and advances to the end of the document or selection. You can then choose to continue the spellcheck from the beginning of the document. Spellcheck looks for misspelled words and gives you the option of adding an unknown word to a user dictionary. When the first misspelled word is found, the Spellcheck dialog opens. If a grammar checking extension is installed, this dialog is called Spelling and Grammar. Spelling errors are underlined in red, grammar errors in blue. First the dialog presents all spelling errors, then all grammar errors. - + Enable Check grammar to work first on all spellcheck errors, then on all grammar errors. - + Not in dictionary Displays the sentence with the misspelled word highlighted. Edit the word or the sentence, or click one of the suggestions in the text box below. - - + + Suggestions Lists suggested words to replace the misspelled word. Select the word that you want to use, and then click Change or Change All. - + Text Languagespec doc Spelling_and_Grammar.odt Specifies the language to use to check the spelling. - - + + AutoCorrect Adds the current combination of the incorrect word and the replacement word to the AutoCorrect replacements table. - - + + Options Opens a dialog, where you can select the user-defined dictionaries, and set the rules for the spellchecking.UFI: dialog has no name at all in 680m104 - - + + Add Adds the unknown word to a user-defined dictionary. - + Ignore Once Skips the unknown word and continues with the spellcheck. This label of this button changes to Resume if you leave the Spellcheck dialog open when you return to your document. To continue the spellcheck from the current position of the cursor, click Resume.Ignore Rule button - + While performing a grammar check, click Ignore Rule to ignore the rule that is currently flagged as a grammar error. - + Ignore All Skips all occurrences of the unknown word in the entire document and continues with the spellcheck. - + Change Replaces the unknown word with the current suggestion. If you changed more than just the misspelled word, the entire sentence is replaced. - + Change All Replaces all occurrences of the unknown word with the current suggestion. - + Undo Click to undo the last change in the current sentence. Click again to undo the previous change in the same sentence.
diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06020000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06020000.xhp index 691850e5e4..18ec724884 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06020000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06020000.xhp @@ -61,19 +61,19 @@ Thesaurus support is not available for all languages. Variations Lists the current word and the suggested replacement word. -Word +Word Displays the current selection, or the word that contains the cursor. -Meaning +Meaning Select the meaning that matches the context of the current word, and then select a word in the Synonym list. -Replace +Replace Displays a suggested replacement for the current word. You can also type a new word in this box, or click a word in the Synonym list. -Synonym +Synonym Lists the words associated with the category that you selected in the Meaning list. Select the word that you want to use as a replacement, and then click OK. -Search +Search Searches the thesaurus for the best match of the word selected in the Synonym list. -Language +Language Specifies the language to use for the thesaurus. -Selection +Selection Select the language that you want to use for the thesaurus, and then click OK. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06030000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06030000.xhp index dbeeb6230f..ede6036546 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06030000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06030000.xhp @@ -77,36 +77,36 @@ Eyedropper color Displays the color in the selected image that directly underlies the current mouse pointer position. This features only works if the eyedropper tool is selected. - + Replace Replaces the selected source colors in the current image with the colors that you specify in the Replace with boxes. Colors Lists the source colors and the replacement colors. - - - - + + + + Source color checkbox Select this checkbox to replace the current Source color with the color that you specify in the Replace with box. Source color Displays the color in the selected image that you want to replace. To set the source color, click here, click the eyedropper, and then click a color in the selected image. - - - - + + + + Tolerance Set the tolerance for replacing a source color in the source image. To replace colors that are similar to the color that you selected, enter a low value. To replace a wider range of colors, enter a higher value. - - - - + + + + Replace with Lists the available replacement colors. To modify the current list of colors, deselect the image, choose Format - Area, and then click the Colors tab. - + Transparency Replaces transparent areas in the current image with the color that you select. - + Transparency Select the color to replace the transparent areas in the current image. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040100.xhp index 42561aa8e7..c2e4797ee5 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040100.xhp @@ -289,8 +289,8 @@ Combines consecutive single-line paragraphs into a single paragraph. This option only works on paragraphs that use the "Default" paragraph style. If a paragraph is longer than the specified length value, the paragraph is combined with the next paragraph. To enter a different length value, select the option, and then click Edit. - - + + Modifies the selected AutoCorrect option. Edit diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040200.xhp index c69588c9e2..e5b8004b71 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040200.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040200.xhp @@ -66,20 +66,20 @@ You can use the AutoCorrect feature to apply a specific character format to a word or abbreviation. Select the formatted text in your document, open this dialog, clear the Text only box, and then enter the text that you want to replace in the Replace box. You can also include frames, graphics, and OLE objects in an AutoCorrect entry, so long as they are anchored as characters in the text. Select the frame, graphic or OLE object and at least one text character in front of and behind the object. Open this dialog, type a name for this AutoCorrect entry in the Replace box, and then click New. - - + + Replace Enter the word or abbreviation that you want to replace while you type. - - + + With: Enter the replacement text, graphic, frame, or OLE object that you want to replace the text in the Replace box. If you have selected text, a graphic, a frame, or an OLE object in your document, the relevant information is already entered here. - - + + Text only Saves the entry in the With box without formatting. When the replacement is made, the text uses the same format as the document text. - - + + New Adds or replaces an entry in the replacement table. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040300.xhp index 694f729484..2281108ef9 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040300.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040300.xhp @@ -55,31 +55,31 @@ Replacements and exceptions for language: Select the language for which you want to create or edit the replacement rules. $[officename] first searches for exceptions that are defined for the language at the current cursor position in the document, and then searches the remaining languages.
- - + + Abbreviations (no subsequent capital) Type an abbreviation followed by a period, and then click New. This prevents $[officename] from automatically capitalizing the first letter of the word that comes after the period at the end of the abbreviation. - - + + Lists the abbreviations that are not automatically corrected. To remove an item from the list, select the item, and then click Delete. - - + + Words with TWo INitial CApitals Type the word or abbreviation that starts with two capital letters that you do not want $[officename] to change to one initial capital. For example, enter PC to prevent $[officename] from changing PC to Pc. - - + + Lists the words or abbreviations that start with two initial capitals that are not automatically corrected. All words which start with two capital letters are listed in the field. To remove an item from the list, select the item, and then click Delete. - - - - + + + + New Adds the current entry to the list of exceptions. - - - - + + + + AutoInclude Automatically adds abbreviations or words that start with two capital letters to the corresponding list of exceptions. This feature only works if the Correct TWo INitial CApitals option or the Capitalize first letter of every sentence option are selected in the [T] column onOptions tab of this dialog. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040400.xhp index 33db44e9c7..0f2211fb48 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040400.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040400.xhp @@ -54,28 +54,28 @@ Single quotes / Double quotes Specify the replacement characters to use for single or double quotation marks. - - - - + + + + Replace Automatically replaces the default system symbol for single quotation marks with the special character that you specify. - - - - + + + + Start quote Select the special character that will automatically replace the current opening quotation mark in your document when you choose Format - AutoCorrect - Apply. - - - - + + + + End quote Select the special character that will automatically replace the current closing quotation mark in your document when you choose Format - AutoCorrect - Apply. - - - - + + + + Default Resets the quotation marks to the default symbols. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040600.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040600.xhp index b952f0010b..ff076e08ec 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040600.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040600.xhp @@ -53,55 +53,55 @@ - - + + Enable word completion Stores frequently used words, and automatically completes a word after you type three letters that match the first three letters of a stored word. - - + + Append space If you do not add punctuation after the word, $[officename] adds a space. The space is added as soon as you begin typing the next word. - - + + Show as tip Displays the completed word as a Help Tip. - - + + Collect words Adds the frequently used words to a list. To remove a word from the Word Completion list, select the word, and then click Delete Entry. - - + + When closing a document, remove the words collected from it from the list When enabled, the list gets cleared when closing the current document. When disabled, makes the current Word Completion list available to other documents after you close the current document. The list remains available until you exit %PRODUCTNAME. - - + + Accept with Select the key that you want to use to accept the automatic word completion. Press Esc to decline the word completion. - - + + Min. word length Enter the minimum word length for a word to become eligible for the word completion feature.UFI: changed due to BH phone call. - - + + Max. entries Enter the maximum number of words that you want to store in the Word Completion list. - - + + Word Completion list Lists the collected words. The list is valid until you close the current document. To make the list available to other documents in the current session, select "When closing a document, save the list for later use in other documents". If the automatic spellcheck option is enabled, only the words that are recognized by the spellcheck are collected. - - + + Delete Entry Removes the selected word or words from the Word Completion list. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040700.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040700.xhp index 38793efe2d..ee2ea2b9a2 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040700.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040700.xhp @@ -52,11 +52,11 @@ -Label text with smart tags +Label text with smart tags Enables Smart Tags to be evaluated and shown in your text document. Currently installed smart tags Displays all installed Smart Tags. To configure a Smart Tag, select the name of the Smart Tag, then click Properties. Not all Smart Tags can be configured. -Properties +Properties To configure a Smart Tag, select the name of the Smart Tag, then click Properties. Not all Smart Tags can be configured. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050400.xhp old mode 100755 new mode 100644 index b192d66336..9d0bcada95 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050400.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050400.xhp @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ Selection Click the graphics that you want to use as bullets. - + Link graphics If enabled, the graphics are inserted as links. If not enabled, the graphics are embedded into the document.
diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050500.xhp index 9c84f02abb..fc4e3f8816 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050500.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050500.xhp @@ -54,10 +54,10 @@
Format Select the level(s) that you want to modify, and then specify the formatting that you want to use. - + Level Select the level(s) that you want to define the formatting options for. The selected level is highlighted in the preview. - + Numbering Select a numbering style for the selected levels.
@@ -162,30 +162,30 @@
The availability of the following fields depends on the style that you select in the Numbering box. - + Before Enter a character or the text to display in front of the number in the list. - + After Enter a character or the text to display behind the number in the list. If you want to create a numbered list that uses the style "1.)", enter ".)" in this box. - + Character Styles Select the Character Style that you want to use in the numbered list. To create or edit a Character Style, open the Styles and Formatting window, click the Character Styles icon, right-click a style, and then choose New. - + Show sublevels Enter the number of previous levels to include in the numbering style. For example, if you enter "2" and the previous level uses the "A, B, C..." numbering style, the numbering scheme for the current level becomes: "A.1". - + Start at Enter a new starting number for the current level. - + Color Color @@ -194,7 +194,7 @@ Select a color for the current numbering style. - + Relative size Relative size @@ -203,29 +203,29 @@ Enter the amount by which you want to resize the bullet character with respect to the font height of the current paragraph. - + Character Opens the Special Characters dialog, where you can select a bullet symbol. Options for graphics: - + Select... Select the graphic, or locate the graphic file that you want to use as a bullet. - + Width Enter a width for the graphic. - + Height Enter a height for the graphic. - + Keep ratio Maintains the size proportions of the graphic. - + Alignment Select the alignment option for the graphic. @@ -234,7 +234,7 @@ Set the numbering options for all of the levels. - + Consecutive numbering diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050600.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050600.xhp index 76afba376d..4b16babf2b 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050600.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050600.xhp @@ -49,49 +49,49 @@
The Position tab page looks different for documents using the new position and spacing attributes introduced with OpenOffice.org 3.0, or documents using the old attributes from versions before 3.0. The new version of this tab page shows the controls "Numbering followed by", "Numbering alignment", "Aligned at", and "Indent at". The old version of this tab page that can be seen in an old numbered or bulleted list shows the controls "Indent", "Width of numbering", "Minimum space numbering <-> text", and "Numbering alignment".see http://specs.openoffice.org/writer/numbering/NewListLevelAttrs.odt - - + + Level Select the level(s) that you want to modify. - + Numbering followed by Select the element that will follow the numbering: a tab stop, a space, or nothing. - + at If you select a tab stop to follow the numbering, you can enter a non-negative value as the tab stop position. - - - + + + Numbering alignment Set the alignment of the numbering symbols. Select "Left" to align the numbering symbol to start directly at the "Aligned at" position. Select "Right" to align the symbol to end directly before the "Aligned at" position. Select "Centered" to center the symbol around the "Aligned at" position. The Numbering alignment option does not set the alignment of the paragraph. - + Aligned at Enter the distance from the left page margin at which the numbering symbol will be aligned. - + Indent at Enter the distance from the left page margin to the start of all lines in the numbered paragraph that follow the first line. - - + + Indent Enter the amount of space to leave between the left page margin (or the left edge of the text object) and the left edge of the numbering symbol. If the current paragraph style uses an indent, the amount you enter here is added to the indent. - - + + Relative Indents the current level relative to the previous level in the list hierarchy. - - + + Width of numberingi85347 Enter the amount of space to leave between the left edge of the numbering symbol and the left edge of the text.UFI: fixed #i31282# - - + + Minimum space numbering <-> text Enter the minimum amount of space to leave between the right edge of the numbering symbol and the left edge of the text. - - + + Default Resets the indent and the spacing values to the default values. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06130000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06130000.xhp index 41b0bbfc52..891aab8497 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06130000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06130000.xhp @@ -50,7 +50,7 @@
- + Macro name Displays the name of the selected macro. To create or to change the name of a macro, enter a name here. @@ -59,28 +59,28 @@ Macro from / Save macro in Lists the libraries and the modules where you can open or save your macros. To save a macro with a particular document, open the document, and then open this dialog. - + Run / Saveunfortunately both have the same Help ID Runs or saves the current macro. - + Assign Opens the Customize dialog, where you can assign the selected macro to a menu command, a toolbar, or an event. - - + + Edit Starts the $[officename] Basic editor and opens the selected macro or dialog for editing. - + New / Delete Creates a new macro, or deletes the selected macro. To create a new macro, select the "Standard" module in the Macro from list, and then click New. To delete a macro, select it, and then click Delete. - + New Library Saves the recorded macro in a new library. - + New Module Saves the recorded macro in a new module. - + Organizer Opens the Macro Organizer dialog, where you can add, edit, or delete existing macro modules, dialogs, and libraries. Module/Dialog tab page @@ -88,40 +88,40 @@ Module/Dialog Lists the existing macros and dialogs. - + Edit Opens the selected macro or dialog for editing. - + NewUFI: i40875 Opens the editor and creates a new module. - - + + New Opens the editor and creates a new dialog. Libraries tab pagethe three tab pages have no Help button, so no need to have three help pages Lets you manage the macro libraries for the current application and any open documents. - + Location Select the application or the document containing the macro libraries that you want to organize. Library Lists the existing macro libraries for the current application and any open documents. - + Edit Opens the $[officename] Basic editor so that you can modify the selected library. - + Password Assigns or edits the password for the selected library. - + New Creates a new library. - + Name Enter a name for the new library or module. - + Importchanged in #i64102 Locate that $[officename] Basic library that you want to add to the current list, and then click Open. @@ -133,21 +133,21 @@ Macros Select a macro or script from "user", "share", or an open document. To view the available macros or scripts, double-click an entry. - + Run To run a script, select a script in the list, and then click Run. - + Create Creates a new script. The default script editor opens after you enter a name for the script. - + Enter a name for the script.UFI: called from Create and from Rename - + Edit Opens the default script editor for your operating system. - + Rename Opens a dialog where you can change the name of the selected script. - + Delete Prompts you to delete the selected script. The Macro Selector dialog contains two list boxes, namely the Library list box and the Macro name list box. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06130100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06130100.xhp index 7aa02c46ee..4a9a0c58b3 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06130100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06130100.xhp @@ -52,14 +52,14 @@ Old password - + Password Enter the current password for the selected library. New password - + Password Enter a new password for the selected library. - + Confirm Reenter the new password for the selected library. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06130500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06130500.xhp index 36910cf9e0..643d91265b 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06130500.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06130500.xhp @@ -51,10 +51,10 @@ File name: Enter a name or the path to the library that you want to append. You can also select a library from the list. Options - + Insert as reference (read-only) Adds the selected library as a read-only file. The library is reloaded each time you start %PRODUCTNAME. - + Replace existing libraries Replaces a library that has the same name with the current library. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140100.xhp index d4efd296a6..ce5d696e08 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140100.xhp @@ -49,18 +49,18 @@ customizing;menus menus;customizing mw deleted "modifying;..." entryMw deleted "changing;" -Menu +Menu Customizes and saves current menu layouts as well as creates new menus. You cannot customize context menus. You can add new commands, modify existing commands, or rearrange the menu items.
-Menu +Menu Select the menu and submenu that you want to edit. -New +New Opens the New Menu dialog where you can enter the name of a new menu as well as select the location for the menu. -Menu +Menu Opens a submenu with additional commands. @@ -90,11 +90,11 @@ Delete Deletes the selected menu or menu entry. You can only delete custom menus and custom menu entries. -Entries +Entries Displays a list of the available menu commands for the selected menu in the current application or document.
To rearrange the order of menu entries, select an entry, and then click the up or down arrow button. -Arrow Up +Arrow Up Moves the selected item up one position. @@ -108,7 +108,7 @@
-Arrow Down +Arrow Down Moves the selected item down one position. @@ -123,9 +123,9 @@
-Add Commands +Add Commands Opens the Add Commands dialog. Select the command that you want to add to the menu, and then click Add. You can also drag-and-drop the command into the Customize dialog box. -Command +Command Opens a menu that contains additional commands. Add Submenu Opens the Add Submenu dialog, where you enter the name of a submenu. @@ -137,7 +137,7 @@ Enter the new name for the selected command. Delete Deletes the selected command. -Save In +Save In UFI: Load and Save did not make it into SO8. There seems to be no work-around!!! Select the application or open document where you want to add the menu. A separate menu configuration is saved for the item that you select. To edit a menu configuration that is associated with an item in the list, select the item, make the changes that you want, and then click the OK button. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140200.xhp index 37776201ef..9eb893fb84 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140200.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140200.xhp @@ -58,10 +58,10 @@
Avoid assigning shortcut keys that are currently used by your operating system.
- + $[officename] Displays shortcut keys that are common to all $[officename] applications. - + Writer Calc Impress @@ -80,21 +80,21 @@ Function Select a function that you want to assign a shortcut key to, click a key combination in the Shortcut keys list, and then click Modify. If the selected function already has a shortcut key, it is displayed in the Keys list. - + Keys Displays the shortcut keys that are assigned to the selected function. - + Modify Assigns the key combination selected in the Shortcut keys list to the command selected in the Function list. - + Deletes the selected element or elements without requiring confirmation. - + Load Replaces the shortcut key configuration with one that was previously saved. - + Save Saves the current shortcut key configuration, so that you can load it later. - + Resets modified values back to the default values.i48946
diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140402.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140402.xhp index f1204f71df..b348c2c52c 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140402.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140402.xhp @@ -46,9 +46,9 @@ Change Icon Buttons Displays the available icons in %PRODUCTNAME. To replace the icon that you selected in the Customize dialog, click an icon, then click the OK button. -Import +Import Adds new icons to the list of icons. You see a file open dialog that imports the selected icon or icons into the internal icon directory of %PRODUCTNAME. You can only import icons that are in the PNG file format and that are 16x16 or 26x26 pixels in size. -just guessing the help idClick to remove the selected icon from the list. Only user-defined icons can be removed. +just guessing the help idClick to remove the selected icon from the list. Only user-defined icons can be removed. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140500.xhp index 3da6538571..3cd6834057 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140500.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140500.xhp @@ -48,21 +48,21 @@ customizing; events events; customizing -Events +Events Assigns macros to program events. The assigned macro runs automatically every time the selected event occurs.
-Save In +Save In Select first where to save the event binding, in the current document or in %PRODUCTNAME. A macro that is saved with a document can only be run when that document is opened. The big list box lists the events and the assigned macros. After you selected the location in the Save In list box, select an event in the big list box. Then click Assign Macro. - -Assign Macro + +Assign Macro Opens the Macro Selector to assign a macro to the selected event. - -Remove Macro + +Remove Macro Deletes the macro assignment for the selected event.
List of events diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06200000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06200000.xhp index dbbd91c77c..c8a446dc29 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06200000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06200000.xhp @@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ Replace withname according to spec, current implementation displays "Word" here Displays the first replacement suggestion from the dictionary. You can edit the suggested word or enter another word. Click the Find button to replace your original word with the corresponding replacement word. - + Find Finds your Hangul input in the dictionary and replaces it with the corresponding Hanja. Click Ignore to cancel the find function. @@ -71,33 +71,33 @@ Displays all available replacements in the dictionary. If the Replace by character box is enabled, you see a grid of characters. If the Replace by character box is not checked, you see a list of words. Format Click the format to display the replacements. - + Hangul/Hanja The original characters are replaced by the suggested characters. - + Hanja (Hangul) The Hangul part will be displayed in brackets after the Hanja part. - + Hangul (Hanja) The Hanja part will be displayed in brackets after the Hangul part. - + Hanja as ruby text aboveTo translators: this describes the visible graphical control - it is not part of the sources The Hanja part will be displayed as ruby text above the Hangul part. - + Hanja as ruby text belowTo translators: this describes the visible graphical control - it is not part of the sources The Hanja part will be displayed as ruby text below the Hangul part. - + Hangul as ruby text aboveTo translators: this describes the visible graphical control - it is not part of the sources The Hangul part will be displayed as ruby text above the Hanja part. - + Hangul as ruby text belowTo translators: this describes the visible graphical control - it is not part of the sources The Hangul part will be displayed as ruby text below the Hanja part. Conversion Normally in a mixed text selection made of Hangul and Hanja characters, all Hangul characters will be converted to Hanja and all Hanja characters will be converted to Hangul. If you want to convert a mixed text selection only in one direction, use the following conversion options. - + Hangul only Check to convert only Hangul. Do not convert Hanja. - + Hanja only Check to convert only Hanja. Do not convert Hangul. @@ -112,7 +112,7 @@ Always Replace Replaces the selection with the suggested characters or word according to the format options. Every time the same selection is detected it will be replaced automatically. The next word or character will be selected for conversion. The list of replacement text is valid for the current $[officename] session. - + Replace by character Check to move character-by-character through the selected text. If not checked, full words are replaced. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06201000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06201000.xhp index 9d37461fe1..c7fd74377d 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06201000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06201000.xhp @@ -48,30 +48,30 @@ User-defined dictionaries Lists all user-defined dictionaries. Select the check box next to the dictionary that you want to use. Clear the check box next to the dictionary that you do not want to use. - + New Opens the New dictionary dialog box, where you can create a new dictionary. - + Name Enter a name for the dictionary. To display the new dictionary in the User-defined dictionaries list box, click OK. - + Edit Opens the Edit Custom Dictionary dialog where you can edit any user-defined dictionary. - + Delete Deletes the selected user-defined dictionary. Options Specifies additional options for all dictionaries. - + Ignore post-positional word Ignores positional characters at the end of Korean words when you search a dictionary. - + Close Conversion dialog automatically after replacement Closes the Hangul/Hanja Conversion dialog box after you click Ignore, Always Ignore, Replace, or Always Replace. - + Show entries recently used first Shows the replacement suggestion that you selected the last time as the first entry on the list. - + Replace all unique entries automatically Automatically replaces words that only have one suggested word replacement. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06202000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06202000.xhp index a67f2641ac..430532135a 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06202000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06202000.xhp @@ -45,20 +45,20 @@ Edit Custom Dictionary Add and delete entries that are used for the Hangul/Hanja Conversion. -Book +Book Select the user-defined dictionary that you want to edit. -Original +Original Select the entry in the current dictionary that you want to edit. If you want, you can also type a new entry in this box. To move from the Original box to the the first text box in the Suggestions area, press Enter. -Replace by character +Replace by character Converts the text on a character by character basis and not on a word by word basis. - - - -Suggestions (max. 8) + + + +Suggestions (max. 8) Type a suggested replacement for the entry that is selected in the Original text box. The replacement word can contain a maximum of eight characters. -New +New Adds the current replacement definition to the dictionary. -Delete +Delete Deletes the selected entry. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/08060100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/08060100.xhp index e097062654..c1c0e38800 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/08060100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/08060100.xhp @@ -60,18 +60,18 @@ The Registration dialog appears after you install $[officename]. I want to register now - - + + Launches your default Web browser and connects to the $[officename] Web site where you can register your copy of $[officename]. I want to register later - - + + Hides the Registration dialog for the next seven days. I do not want to register - - + + Permanently hides the Registration dialog. To register at a later time, choose Help - Registration. \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/digitalsignatures.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/digitalsignatures.xhp index 39979a49e5..468fc0b007 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/digitalsignatures.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/digitalsignatures.xhp @@ -44,7 +44,7 @@
- + Digital Signatures Adds and removes digital signatures to and from your document. You can also use the dialog to view certificates.
@@ -52,9 +52,9 @@
- + You must save a file before you can apply a digital signature to the file. - + You must save a file in OpenDocument format before you can apply a digital signature to the file. List @@ -65,13 +65,13 @@ Icon indicates an invalid digital signature. See also Digital Signatures. - + View Certificate Opens the View Certificate dialog. - + Add Opens the Select Certificate dialog. - + Remove Removes the selected source from the list. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/extensionupdate.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/extensionupdate.xhp index 2024679fdc..cbe12bc5b6 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/extensionupdate.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/extensionupdate.xhp @@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ When you click the Check for Updates button or choose the Update command, the Extension Update dialog is displayed and the check for availability of updates starts immediately. - + While checking for updates, you see a progress indicator. Wait for some messages to show up in the dialog, or click Cancel to abort the update check. If no updates are available, the message in the dialog tells you there are no updates. Close the dialog. If updates are available, the updates can either be installed automatically, or you must respond with some action: @@ -57,14 +57,14 @@ Dependencies are not fulfilled (the update needs some more or newer files to be installed). Insufficient user rights (the Extension Manager was started from the menu, but shared extensions can only be modified when %PRODUCTNAME does not run, and only by a user with appropriate rights). See Extension Manager for details. A manual update is necessary. - + When you click the Install button the Download and Installation dialog is displayed. All extensions which can be directly downloaded are downloaded now. The progress is shown in the Download and Installation dialog. If an extension cannot be downloaded, a message is displayed. The operation continues for the remaining extensions. Some extensions may be marked with the phrase "browser based update". These extensions cannot be downloaded by the Extension Manager. A web browser must be opened to download the extension update from a particular web site. That site may require several more user interaction to download the extension. After downloading you must install the extension manually, for example by double-clicking the extension's icon in a file browser. For extensions marked as "browser based update", the Extension Manager will open your web browser on the respective web site. This happens when you close the dialog, after downloading any other extension updates. If there are no extensions which can be directly downloaded then the web browser is started immediately. After the last extension has been downloaded, the installation begins. First all installed extensions for which an update could be downloaded successfully, are removed. Then the updated extensions are installed. If an error occurs, a message that the installation failed is displayed, but the operation proceeds. If all updates have been processed the Download and Installation dialog shows that it has finished. You can abort the download and installation process by clicking the Abort Update button. - + Show all Updates By default, only the downloadable extensions are shown in the dialog. Mark Show all Updates to see also other extensions and error messages.
diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/gallery_files.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/gallery_files.xhp index 9a9ee1060a..93043d3974 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/gallery_files.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/gallery_files.xhp @@ -51,22 +51,22 @@
- + File Type Select the type of file that you want to add. - + Files found Lists the available files. Select the file(s) that you want to add, and then click Add. To add all of the files in the list, click Add All. - + Find files Locate the directory containing the files that you want to add, and then click OK. - + Add Adds the selected file(s) to the current theme. - + Add all Adds all of the files in the list to the current theme. - + Preview Displays or hides a preview of the selected file.UFI: removed help id Preview box diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/online_update.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/online_update.xhp index 843e0c227c..c22184f3d6 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/online_update.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/online_update.xhp @@ -46,11 +46,11 @@ Check for Updates UFI: changed name of page, see i76016Next time start download automatically - + Mark to enable the automatic check for updates. Choose %PRODUCTNAME - Online Update in the Options dialog box to disable or enable this feature. - + Click to select a folder to download the files. - + You can check for updates manually or automatically. Checking for updates will also look for updates of all installed extensions. Choose Help - Check for Updates to check manually. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/packagemanager.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/packagemanager.xhp index 2b68f5a091..5ffca7727f 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/packagemanager.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/packagemanager.xhp @@ -117,32 +117,32 @@ Select the extension that you want to remove, enable, or disable. For some extensions, you can also open an Options dialog. - - + + Add Click Add to add an extension. A file dialog opens where you can select the extension that you want to add. To copy and to register the selected extension, click Open. - - + + An extension can show a license dialog. Read the license. Click the Scroll Down button to scroll down if necessary. Click Accept to continue the installation of the extension. - - + + Remove Select the extension that you want to remove, and then click Remove. - + Enable or disable the extension. - + Enable Select the extension that you want to enable, and then click Enable. - + Disable Select the extension that you want to disable, and then click Disable. - - + + Update Click to check for online updates of all installed extensions. To check for updates of the selected extension only, choose the Update command from the context menu. The check for availability of updates starts immediately. You will see the Extension Update dialog. - - + + Options Select an installed extension, then click to open the Options dialog for the extension. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/password_dlg.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/password_dlg.xhp index 5bb5d2a70b..1a2689c7f9 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/password_dlg.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/password_dlg.xhp @@ -46,13 +46,13 @@ oldref="63">Password Assigns a password to prevent users from making unauthorized changes. - + Password Type a password. A password is case sensitive. - +
- - + + Master password Type a master password to prevent unauthorized users from accessing stored passwords. - + Confirm master password Re-enter the master password. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/ref_pdf_export.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/ref_pdf_export.xhp index 9e613853c9..04c6788d7c 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/ref_pdf_export.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/ref_pdf_export.xhp @@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ MW made "PDF export a two level entry"UFI: write guide and move bookmarks there - + Export as PDF @@ -63,227 +63,227 @@ Pages Sets the export options for the pages included in the PDF file. - - + + All Exports all defined print ranges. If no print range is defined, exports the entire document. - - - + + + Range Exports the pages you type in the box. To export a range of pages, use the format 3-6. To export single pages, use the format 7;9;11. If you want, you can export a combination of page ranges and single pages, by using a format like 3-6;8;10;12. - - + + Selection Exports the current selection. Images Sets the PDF export options for images inside your document. EPS images with embedded previews are exported only as previews. EPS images without embedded previews are exported as empty placeholders. - - + + Lossless compression Selects a lossless compression of images. All pixels are preserved. - - + + JPEG compression Selects a JPEG compression of images. With a high quality level, almost all pixels are preserved. With a low quality level, some pixels get lost and artefacts are introduced, but file sizes are reduced. - - + + Quality Enter the quality level for JPEG compression. - - + + Reduce image resolution Selects to resample or down-size the images to a lower number of pixels per inch. - - + + Select the target resolution for the images. General Sets general PDF export options. - + PDF/A-1a Converts to the PDF/A-1a format. This is defined as an electronic document file format for long term preservation. All fonts that were used in the source document will be embedded into the generated PDF file. PDF tags will be written. - - + + Tagged PDF Selects to write PDF tags. This can increase file size by huge amounts. Tagged PDF contains information about the structure of the document contents. This can help to display the document on devices with different screens, and when using screen reader software. - - + + Export notes Selects to export comments of Writer and Calc documents as PDF notes. - + Export bookmarks Selects to export bookmarks of Writer documents as PDF bookmarks. Bookmarks are created for all outline paragraphs (Tools - Outline Numbering) and for all table of contents entries for which you did assign hyperlinks in the source document. - + Create PDF form Choose to create a PDF form. This can be filled out and printed by the user of the PDF document. - - + + Submit format Select the format of submitting forms from within the PDF file. Select the format of the data that you will receive from the submitter: FDF (Forms Data Format), PDF, HTML, or XML. This setting overrides the control's URL property that you set in the document.insert help id here Allow duplicate field names Allows to use the same field name for multiple fields in the generated PDF file. If disabled, field names will be exported using generated unique names. - - + + Export automatically inserted blank pages If switched on, automatically inserted blank pages are being exported to pdf file. This is best if you are printing the pdf file double-sided. Example: In a book a chapter paragraph style is set to always start with an odd numbered page. The previous chapter ends on an odd page. %PRODUCTNAME inserts an even numbered blank page. This option controls whether to export that even numbered page or not. - + Create hybrid file When the Sun PDF Import Extension is installed, this setting enables you to export the document as a .pdf file containing two file formats: PDF and ODF. Initial View Panes - + Page only Select to generate a PDF file that shows only the page contents. - + Bookmarks and page Select to generate a PDF file that shows a bookmarks palette and the page contents.UFI: Adobe reader help names the panes as "palettes" - + Thumbnails and page Select to generate a PDF file that shows a thumbnails palette and the page contents. - + Open on page Select to show the given page when the reader opens the PDF file. Magnification - + Default Select to generate a PDF file that shows the page contents without zooming. If the reader software is configured to use a zoom factor by default, the page shows with that zoom factor. - + Fit in window Select to generate a PDF file that shows the page zoomed to fit entirely into the reader's window. - + Fit width Select to generate a PDF file that shows the page zoomed to fit the width of the reader's window. - + Fit visible Select to generate a PDF file that shows the text and graphics on the page zoomed to fit the width of the reader's window. - - + + Zoom factor Select a given zoom factor when the reader opens the PDF file. Page layout - + Default Select to generate a PDF file that shows the pages according to the layout setting of the reader software. - + Single page Select to generate a PDF file that shows one page at a time. - + Continuous Select to generate a PDF file that shows pages in a continuous vertical column. - + Continuous facing Select to generate a PDF file that shows pages side by side in a continuous column. For more than two pages, the first page is displayed on the right. - + First page is left Select to generate a PDF file that shows pages side by side in a continuous column. For more than two pages, the first page is displayed on the left. You must enable support for complex text layout on Language settings - Languages in the Options dialog box. User Interface Window options - + Resize window to initial page Select to generate a PDF file that is shown in a window displaying the whole initial page. - + Center window on screen Select to generate a PDF file that is shown in a reader window centered on screen. - + Open in full screen mode Select to generate a PDF file that is shown in a full screen reader window in front of all other windows. - + Display document title Select to generate a PDF file that is shown with the document title in the reader's title bar. User interface options - + Hide menu bar Select to hide the reader's menu bar when the document is active. - + Hide toolbar Select to hide the reader's toolbar when the document is active. - + Hide window controls Select to hide the reader's controls when the document is active. Transitions - - - + + + Use transition effects Selects to export Impress slide transition effects to respective PDF effects. Bookmarks - + All bookmark levels Select to show all bookmark levels when the reader opens the PDF file. - - + + Visible bookmark levels Select to show bookmark levels down to the selected level when the reader opens the PDF file. Links Specify how to export bookmarks and hyperlinks in your document. - + Export bookmarks as named destinations The bookmarks (targets of references) in PDF files can be defined as rectangular areas. Additionally, bookmarks to named objects can be defined by their names. Enable the checkbox to export the names of objects in your document as valid bookmark targets. This allows to link to those objects by name from other documents. - + Convert document references to PDF targets Enable this checkbox to convert the URLs referencing other ODF files to PDF files with the same name. In the referencing URLs the extensions .odt, .odp, .ods, .odg, and .odm are converted to the extension .pdf. - + Export URLs relative to file system Enable this checkbox to export URLs to other documents as relative URLs in the file system. See "relative hyperlinks" in the Help. Cross-document links Specify how to handle hyperlinks from your PDF file to other files. - + Default mode Links from your PDF document to other documents will be handled as it is specified in your operating system. - + Open with PDF reader application Cross-document links are opened with the PDF reader application that currently shows the document. The PDF reader application must be able to handle the specified file type inside the hyperlink. - + Open with Internet browser Cross-document links are opened with the Internet browser. The Internet browser must be able to handle the specified file type inside the hyperlink. Security - + Encrypt the PDF document Select to encrypt the PDF document with a password. The PDF file can be opened only when the user enters the correct password. - + Set open password Click to open a dialog where you enter the password. - + Restrict permission Select to restrict some permissions. The permissions can be changed only when the user enters the correct password. - + Set permission password Click to open a dialog where you enter the password. Printing - + Not permitted Printing the document is not permitted. - + Low resolution (150 dpi) The document can only be printed in low resolution (150 dpi). Not all PDF readers honor this setting. - + High resolution The document can be printed in high resolution. Changes - + Not permitted No changes of the content are permitted. - + Inserting, deleting, and rotating pages Only inserting, deleting, and rotating pages is permitted. - + Filling in form fields Only filling in form fields is permitted. - + Commenting, filling in form fields Only commenting and filling in form fields is permitted. - + Any except extracting pages All changes are permitted, except extracting pages. - + Enable copying of content Select to enable copying of content to the clipboard. - + Enable text access for accessibility tools Select to enable text access for accessibility tools. security;warning dialogs with macros macros;security warning dialog - + Security Warning diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/selectcertificate.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/selectcertificate.xhp index a3578bdadb..435b5904b7 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/selectcertificate.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/selectcertificate.xhp @@ -50,8 +50,8 @@ List Select the certificate that you want to digitally sign the current document with. - - + + View Certificate Opens the View Certificate dialog where you can examine the selected certificate. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/xformsdata.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/xformsdata.xhp index 75e8b2e76f..fa5c2730ef 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/xformsdata.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/xformsdata.xhp @@ -64,9 +64,9 @@ Add Opens the Add Model dialog where you can add an XForm model. - + Enter the name. - + Model data updates change document's modification status When enabled, the document status will be set to "modified" when you change any form control that is bound to any data in the model. When not enabled, such a change does not set the document status to "modified". diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/xformsdataadd.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/xformsdataadd.xhp index 3ba52c5d65..ef0511f12a 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/xformsdataadd.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/xformsdataadd.xhp @@ -54,66 +54,66 @@ Adds a new item or edits the selected item in the XForms Data Navigator. Items can be elements, attributes, submissions, or bindings. %PRODUCTNAME inserts a new item directly after the currently selected item in the Data Navigator. A new attribute is added to the currently selected element. - + Name Enter the name of the item. The attribute names must be unique within the same group. Type Select the type of a new item. You cannot change the type of an edited item. - + Default value Enter a default value for the selected item. Settings Specifies the properties of the selected item. - + Data type Select the data type for the selected item. - + Required Specifies if the item must be included on the XForm. - + The Condition button opens the Add Condition dialog where you can enter used namespaces and full XPath expressions. - + Relevant Declares the item as relevant. - + The Condition button opens the Add Condition dialog where you can enter used namespaces and full XPath expressions. - + Constraint Declares the item as a constraint. - + The Condition button opens the Add Condition dialog where you can specify the constraint condition. - + Read-only Declares the item as read-only. - + The Condition button opens the Add Condition dialog where you can enter used namespaces and full XPath expressions. - + Calculate / CalculationUFI: inconsistent use of name Declares that the item is calculated. - + The Condition button opens the Add Condition dialog where you can enter the calculation. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/xformsdataaddcon.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/xformsdataaddcon.xhp index cad32aa4d8..f596d7dbba 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/xformsdataaddcon.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/xformsdataaddcon.xhp @@ -53,13 +53,13 @@ Add Condition Add a condition in this subdialog of the Add Item / Edit Item dialog of the Data Navigator. - + Condition Enter a condition.examples? Result Displays a preview of the result. - + Edit Namespaces Opens the Form Namespaces dialog where you can add, edit, or delete namespaces. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/xformsdataname.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/xformsdataname.xhp index 6804fe6882..b6373dc3b5 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/xformsdataname.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/xformsdataname.xhp @@ -59,17 +59,17 @@ Namespaces Lists the currently defined namespaces for the form. - + Add Adds a new namespace to the list. Use the Add Namespace dialog to enter the Prefix and URL. - + Edit Edits the selected namespace. Use the Edit Namespace dialog to edit the Prefix and URL. - + Delete Deletes the selected namespace. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/xformsdatatab.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/xformsdatatab.xhp index dcbf6ac56c..428a86fa5a 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/xformsdatatab.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/xformsdatatab.xhp @@ -110,7 +110,7 @@ Length Specifies the number of characters for a string. -UFI: found 37998 which is already in use +UFI: found 37998 which is already in use Length (at least) Specifies the minimum number of characters for a string. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170004.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170004.xhp index a0a842c439..0158f8b850 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170004.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170004.xhp @@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ Calls a submenu where you can select the columns to show again. To show only one column, click the column name. You see only the first 16 hidden columns. If there are more hidden columns, choose the More command to call the Show Columns dialog. More Calls the Show Columns dialog. -In the Show Columns dialog you can select the columns to be shown. Hold down the Shift or Ctrl (Mac: Command) key to select multiple entries. +In the Show Columns dialog you can select the columns to be shown. Hold down the Shift or Ctrl (Mac: Command) key to select multiple entries. All Click All if you want to show all columns. Keyboard-only control of Table Controls diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170101.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170101.xhp index e1a7b514a9..581d703f6e 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170101.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170101.xhp @@ -228,7 +228,7 @@ To define one character of the label as a mnemonic, so that the user can access this control by pressing the character on the keyboard, insert a tilde (~) character in front of the character in the label. Only the text of a group frame can be used as the label field when using radio buttons. This text applies to all of the radio buttons of the same group. If you click on the ... button next to the text field, you will see the Label Field Selection dialog. Select a label from the list. - + Check the No assignment box to remove the link between a control and the assigned label field.
@@ -650,7 +650,7 @@ Sets whether the value changes when the user scrolls a mouse wheel. Never: No change of the value. When focused: (default) The value changes when the control has the focus and the wheel is pointing at the control and gets scrolled. Always: The value changes when the wheel is pointing at the control and gets scrolled, no matter which control has the focus.
- + Default status Specifies whether an option or a check box is selected by default. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170203.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170203.xhp index f7d90b0d5e..58f18a116b 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170203.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170203.xhp @@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ Specifies whether the SQL statement is to be analyzed by %PRODUCTNAME. If set to Yes, you can click the ... button next to the Content list box. This will open a window where you can graphically create a database query. When you close that window, the SQL statement for the created query will be inserted in the Content list box.
-Filter +Filter Enter the required conditions for filtering the data in the form. The filter specifications follow SQL rules without using the WHERE clause. For example, if you want to display all records with the "Mike" forename, type into the data field: Forename = 'Mike'. You can also combine conditions: Forename = 'Mike' OR Forename = 'Peter'. All records matching either of these two conditions will be displayed. The filter function is available in user mode through the AutoFilter and Default Filter icons on the Form Navigation Bar.
diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170300.xhp index bad329e00b..154beff103 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170300.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170300.xhp @@ -57,14 +57,14 @@ A radio button inside a group can only be accessed by the Tab key when one of the radio buttons is set to "selected". If you have designed a group of radio buttons where no button is set to "selected", then the user will not be able to access the group or any of the radio buttons by keyboard. Controls Lists all controls in the form. These controls can be selected with the tab key in the given order from top to bottom. Select a control from the Controls list to assign the desired position in the tab order. - -Move Up + +Move Up Click the Move Up button to shift the selected control one position higher in the tab order. - -Move Down + +Move Down Click the Move Down button to shift the selected control one position lower in the tab order. - -Automatic Sort + +Automatic Sort Click the Automatic Sort button to automatically sort the controls according to their position in the document. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170801.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170801.xhp index 274ce9dd60..1b598da288 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170801.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170801.xhp @@ -50,10 +50,10 @@
- + Data source Specifies the data source that contains the desired table. - + Table Specifies the desired table. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170802.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170802.xhp index f39cf41664..ff7c726156 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170802.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170802.xhp @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ - + Selected Fields Displays the data fields that are accepted into the form field. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170901.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170901.xhp index 3360275c92..c65e2536ff 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170901.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170901.xhp @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ For list boxes, a table that can be linked with the current form table is indicated. The link table must have at least one field in common with the table of the current form. This makes it possible to establish an unambiguous reference. For combo boxes, there must be a relationship between the form table and the table containing the data to be displayed in the combo box. - + Table In the Table field, select the table containing the data field whose content should be displayed in the control field. The table given here appears in the Control properties as an element of an SQL statement in the List Contents field. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170902.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170902.xhp index b2c2c7b971..e335be763b 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170902.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170902.xhp @@ -50,9 +50,9 @@
-Available Fields +Available Fields Displays all table fields chosen on the previous Wizard page. -Display Field +Display Field Specifies the field whose data are to be shown in the combo or list boxes. The field name given here appears in the Control properties as an element of an SQL statement in the List Contents field. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170903.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170903.xhp index 4dcd6099ec..866c8e23e8 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170903.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170903.xhp @@ -51,10 +51,10 @@
-Value table field +Value table field Specifies the current form data field which should be related to a field in the linked table. In addition, click the desired data field in the list field below. In Control - Properties, the specified field will appear as an entry in the Data tab page under Data field. -List table field +List table field Specifies the linked table data field, which is related to the specified value table field. In addition, click the data field in the lower list field. In Control - Properties, the specified field will appear in the Data tab page of a SQL statement under List Contents. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170904.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170904.xhp index 49698d6be6..6c151ead36 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170904.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170904.xhp @@ -53,14 +53,14 @@ Do you want to save the value in a database field? Two options are available for this question: - + Yes, I want to save it in the following database field Specifies whether the user's entered or selected combination field value should be saved in a database field. Several database table fields are offered which can be accessed in the current form. In Control - Properties the selected field appears as an entry in the Data tab page under Data field. - + List field Specifies the data field where the combination field value should be saved. - + No, I only want to save the value in the form Specifies that the value of this combination field will not be written in the database and will only be saved in the form. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/09070100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/09070100.xhp index f3428e310c..1fed652e0b 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/09070100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/09070100.xhp @@ -52,53 +52,53 @@ The fields for the login name, password and anonymous user are only available for FTP addresses. Type of hyperlink -Web +Web Creates an http hyperlink. -FTP +FTP Creates an FTP hyperlink. -Telnet +Telnet Creates a Telnet hyperlink. Target Enter a URL for the file that you want to open when you click the hyperlink. If you do not specify a target frame, the file opens in the current document or frame.see i48946 -WWW Browser +WWW Browser Opens a web browser, into which you can load the desired URL. You can then copy and paste the URL into the Target field. -Target in document +Target in document Opens the Target in Document dialog. There you can select the destination within a document and add it to the target URL with the Insert button. Specifies the position in the target document where you wish to jump to. Inserts the target in the Target field of the Hyperlink dialog. Once the hyperlink has been completely entered, click on Close to set the link and leave the dialog. -Login name +Login name Specifies your login name, if you are working with FTP addresses. -Password +Password Specifies your password, if you are working with FTP addresses. -Anonymous user +Anonymous user Allows you to log in to the FTP address as an anonymous user.
Further settings - - - -Frame + + + +Frame Enter the name of the frame that you want the linked file to open in, or select a predefined frame from the list. If you leave this box blank, the linked file opens in the current browser window. - - - -Form + + + +Form Specifies whether the hyperlink is inserted as text or as a button. - - - -Events + + + +Events Opens the Assign Macro dialog, in which you can give events such as "mouse over object" or "trigger hyperlink" their own program codes. - - - -Text + + + +Text Specifies the visible text or button caption for the hyperlink. - - - -Name + + + +Name Enter a name for the hyperlink. $[officename] inserts a NAME tag in the hyperlink.
diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/09070200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/09070200.xhp index fde0e22fca..058219442a 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/09070200.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/09070200.xhp @@ -51,15 +51,15 @@ Mail & News -E-mail +E-mail Assigns the specified e-mail address to the hyperlink. Clicking the new hyperlink in the document will open a new message document, addressed to the receiver specified in the E-mail field. -News +News Assigns a news address to the hyperlink. Clicking the hyperlink in the document will open a new message document to the news group you entered in the Receiver field. Receiver Specifies the full URL of the addressee, in the form mailto:name@provider.com or news:group.server.com. You can also use drag-and-drop. -Data Sources +Data Sources Hides or shows the data source browser. Drag the receiver's E-mail data field from the data source browser into the Receiver text field. -Subject +Subject Specifies the subject that is inserted in the subject line of the new message document. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/09070300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/09070300.xhp index 59524f12f9..ff46612ed6 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/09070300.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/09070300.xhp @@ -53,12 +53,12 @@ Document Path Enter a URL for the file that you want to open when you click the hyperlink. If you do not specify a target frame, the file opens in the current document or frame. -Open File +Open File Opens the Open dialog, where you can select a file. Target in document -Target +Target Specifies a target for the hyperlink into the document specified under Path. -Target in Document +Target in Document Opens the Target in Document dialog. URL Specifies the URL, which results from the entries in Path and Destination. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/09070400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/09070400.xhp index 5e6bb14ea3..382555812f 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/09070400.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/09070400.xhp @@ -52,15 +52,15 @@ New Document Specifies the name, path and type of the new document in this area. -Edit now +Edit now Specifies that the new document is created and immediately opened for editing. -Edit later +Edit later Specifies that the document is created but it is not immediately opened. -File +File Enter a URL for the file that you want to open when you click the hyperlink. -Select Path +Select Path Opens the Select Path dialog, where you can select a path. -File type +File type Specifies the file type for the new document. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12000000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12000000.xhp index c0bea3e5c6..1b2b850b6e 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12000000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12000000.xhp @@ -70,10 +70,10 @@ Closes the connection to the data source. See %PRODUCTNAME Base - Connections in the Options dialog box. To rename an entry, call this command and enter the new name. You can also do this by selecting the entry and pressing F2. The database must support renaming, otherwise this command is not enabled. - + Opens the selected database file for editing.i66574 new command "Database Registrations" / but name in UI is "Registered databases" - + Opens a dialog to add/edit/remove a database file from the list of registered databases. The same dialog opens by choosing %PRODUCTNAME Base - Databases in the Options dialog box. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12070100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12070100.xhp index 648f90c5ee..24f191fda3 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12070100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12070100.xhp @@ -43,47 +43,47 @@ -Table +Table database contents; inserting as tables Inserts data selected from the data source browser into the document as a table.In the Insert Database Columns dialog, select the Table option to insert the selected data into the document as a table. In the dialog, you can decide which database fields or columns are transferred, and how the text table is formatted. Table In the Table area, use the arrow keys to select the columns of the database table that you want to apply to the text table. -Database columns +Database columns Specifies the database columns to be inserted into the text table. All database table columns that have not been accepted in the Table column(s) list box are listed here. The entries are sorted alphabetically. -Table column(s) +Table column(s) Lists all database columns to be inserted into the document. A column will be assigned to each corresponding entry in the table. The entry order in the Table column(s) list box determines the data order in the text table. ->> +>> Moves all listed database fields into the Table column(s) list box. All fields listed in the Table column(s) list box are inserted into the document. -> +> Moves the selected database field into the Table column(s) list box. You can also double click an entry to move it to the Table column(s) list box. All fields listed in the Table column(s) list box are inserted into the document. -< +< Removes the selected database field from the Table column(s) list box The removed field is not inserted into the document. -<< +<< Removes all database fields from the Table column(s) list box.
Format Specifies the format for inserting the database fields into the document. -From database +From database Accepts the database formats. - -Select + +Select Specifies a format from the list, if the format information of certain data fields is not accepted. The formats supplied here are only available for certain database fields, such as numeric or Boolean fields. If you select a database field in text format, you will not be able to select any format from the selection list, since the text format will be automatically maintained. If the format you want is not listed, select "Other Formats..." and define the desired format in the Number Format dialog. The number format assigned using the selection list always refers to the database field selected in the Database columns list box.
To insert the data into the document in the form of a table, the correct Table option must be active. You can then select a database field from the Table column(s) list box to define the formatting of the database field. The changes to the number formats will be applied to the last selection. It does not matter whether the database field was selected from the Database columns list box or from the Table column(s) list box. -Insert table heading +Insert table heading Specifies whether to insert a heading line for the columns in the text table. -Apply column name +Apply column name Uses the field names of the database table as headings for each of the text table columns. -Create row only +Create row only Inserts an empty heading line into the text table. Using the Create row only option, you can define headings in the document, which do not correspond to the database field names. -Properties +Properties Opens the Table Format Table Format dialog, which enables you to define the table properties such as borders, background, and column width. -AutoFormat +AutoFormat Opens the AutoFormat AutoFormat dialog, in which you can select format styles that are immediately applied when inserting the table. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12070200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12070200.xhp index 1900716052..9b8acc997a 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12070200.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12070200.xhp @@ -45,21 +45,21 @@ - Fields + Fields database contents; inserting as fieldsInserts data selected from the data source browser into the document as fields.In the Insert Database Columns dialog, select the Fields to insert the selected data into the document as fields. These database fields work as wildcards for the individual database columns and can be used for form letters. Click the Data to Fields icon to match the contents of the fields to the currently selected record. If several records are selected when you choose the Data to Text function, the mail merge fields will be inserted according to the number of records. Also, a field command such as "Next record" will be inserted automatically between individual field command blocks. The Insert Database Columns dialog lets you define which database fields to insert into the document and how to format the paragraphs. Fields In the Fields area, use the arrow button to select the database table columns into which you want to insert field contents.
- Database columns + Database columns Lists all columns of the database table, which can be accepted in the selection list box to insert them into the document. Select the database columns that you want to insert it in the document. - > + > Moves the fields that you selected in the Database columns list box into the selection field. You can also double-click the entry to select it. - Select + Select Lists the database columns that you selected to be inserted into the document. You can also enter text here. This text will be also inserted into the document. The entries' order in the selection field corresponds to the data order in the document. - Paragraph Style + Paragraph Style By default, the inserted paragraphs are formatted with the current Paragraph Styles. This format corresponds to the "none" entry in the Paragraph Style list box. This is where you can select other Paragraph Styles to apply to the paragraph you want to insert into the document. The list box displays the available Paragraph Styles defined in %PRODUCTNAME and managed in the Style Catalog.
diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12070300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12070300.xhp index 482b2d0e79..dafae3460d 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12070300.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12070300.xhp @@ -43,7 +43,7 @@ - Text + Text database contents; inserting as textInserts data selected from the data source browser into the document as text.If you select the Text option in the Insert Database Columns dialog, the content of the data selected in the data source browser is inserted into the document as text. In the dialog, you can decide which database fields or columns are transferred, and how the text is formatted. If several records are selected when you choose the Data to Text function, the mail merge fields will be inserted according to the number of records. Text diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12090100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12090100.xhp index 9b6af4260e..a021f82920 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12090100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12090100.xhp @@ -57,34 +57,34 @@ Filter criteria You can define a filter by indicating the type of line, the name of the field, a logical condition and a value or a combination of arguments. - - - - + + + + Operator For the following arguments, you can choose between the logical operators AND / OR. - - - - - - + + + + + + Field name Specifies the field names from the current table to set them in the argument. You will see the column identifiers if no text is available for the field names. - - - - - - + + + + + + Condition Specifies the comparative operators through which the entries in the Field name and Value fields can be linked. - - - - - - + + + + + + Value Specifies a value to filter the field. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12100200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12100200.xhp index a6a8b413c2..42f076b4ad 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12100200.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12100200.xhp @@ -65,21 +65,21 @@ oldref="112">Search for Specifies the type of search. - + Text: Enter the search term in the box or select it from the list. The text under the cursor is already copied into the Text combo box. Note that while running a search in a form, tabs and line breaks cannot be processed. Your search terms will be saved as long as the table or the formula document is open. If you are running more than one search and you would like to repeat the search term, you can select a previously used search term from the combo box. - + Field content is NULL Specifies that fields will be found that contain no data. - + Field content is not NULL Specifies that fields will be found that contain data. Where to search Specifies the fields for the search. - + Form Specifies the logical form in which you want the search to take place. @@ -92,7 +92,7 @@ Searches through all fields. If you are running a search in a table, all fields in the table will be searched. If you are running a search in a form, all fields of the logical form (entered under Form) will be searched. If you are running a search in a table control field, all columns that are linked to a valid database table field will be searched. Note that the fields of the current logical form do not have to be identical to the fields of the form document. If the form document contains fields that point to multiple data sources (that is, multiple logical forms), the All Fields option will only search for the fields linked to data sources in the form document. - + Single field Searches through a specified data field. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/14010000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/14010000.xhp index f9120ec222..e26144a85a 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/14010000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/14010000.xhp @@ -46,7 +46,7 @@
- + Run Query Runs the SQL query and displays the query result. The Run Query function does not save the query.
diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/14020100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/14020100.xhp index 856f55fcf4..474f9c7ed9 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/14020100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/14020100.xhp @@ -54,13 +54,13 @@ Table - + Shows only tables. - + Shows only queries. Table name Lists the available tables. To insert a table, select one from the list and click Add. You can also double-click the table name, and a window will be displayed containing the table fields at the top of the query design or the relational window. - + Add Inserts the currently selected table. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/20090000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/20090000.xhp index 2f2bf853a4..6acb64bcc9 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/20090000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/20090000.xhp @@ -43,7 +43,7 @@ - + Time Displays the current time. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/20100000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/20100000.xhp index 9e4b6e83a9..1a627bc3cd 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/20100000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/20100000.xhp @@ -43,7 +43,7 @@ - + Date Displays the current date. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/24010000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/24010000.xhp index 14bd7c2dd0..3195b80392 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/24010000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/24010000.xhp @@ -46,7 +46,7 @@
- + Graphic Filter Bar This icon on the Picture bar opens the Graphic Filter bar, where you can use various filters on the selected picture. @@ -66,7 +66,7 @@
- + Invert @@ -84,7 +84,7 @@ - + Smooth @@ -102,7 +102,7 @@ - + Sharpen @@ -120,7 +120,7 @@ - + Remove Noise @@ -157,10 +157,10 @@ Parameters Specifies the degree and type of solarization. - + Threshold Value Specifies the degree of brightness, in percent, above which the pixels are to be solarized. - + Invert Specifies to also invert all pixels. @@ -180,7 +180,7 @@ - + Aging Degree Defines the intensity of aging, in percent. At 0% you see the gray values of all pixels. At 100% only the red color channel remains.ufi: cannot see any difference between 0% and 100% aging here... @@ -200,7 +200,7 @@ - + Poster Colors Specifies the number of colors to which the image is to be reduced. @@ -275,13 +275,13 @@ Element resolution Determines the number of pixels to be joined into rectangles. - + Width Defines the width of the individual tiles. - + Height Defines the height of the individual tiles. - + Enhance edges Enhances, or sharpens, the edges of the object.
diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000130.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000130.xhp index 601df29a41..393c90dfe3 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000130.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000130.xhp @@ -51,9 +51,9 @@ Index - Keyword Search in the Help - + Double-click an entry or type the word you want to find in the index. - + Click to display the selected topic. You can search for a specific topic by typing a word into the Search term text box. The window contains an alphabetical list of index terms. If the cursor is in the index list when you type the search term, the display will jump directly to the next match. When you type a word in the Search term text box, the focus will jump to the best match in the index list. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000140.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000140.xhp index 74d111b87c..e1835dcabb 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000140.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000140.xhp @@ -52,17 +52,17 @@ Find - The Full-Text Search - + Enter the search term here. The search is not case-sensitive. - + Click to start a full-text search for the term you entered. - + Lists the headings of the pages found in your full-text search. To display a page, double-click its entry. - + Specifies whether to carry out an exact search for the word you entered. Incomplete words will not be found. - + Specifies whether to only search in document headings for the search term. - + Displays the entry selected in the list. The full text search function in $[officename] Help allows you to find Help documents that contain any combination of search terms. To do this, type one or more words into the Search term text field. The Search term text field stores the words you entered last. To repeat a previous search, click the arrow icon and select the term from the list. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000150.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000150.xhp index 8c3fab45cf..8432ed8a52 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000150.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000150.xhp @@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ Help; bookmarksbookmarks; Help Managing Bookmarks - Displays the name of the bookmarked page. You can also type a new name for the bookmark. + Displays the name of the bookmarked page. You can also type a new name for the bookmark. @@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ You can find the bookmarks on the Bookmarks tab page. - Double-clicking a bookmark or pressing the Return key opens the assigned page in Help. A right-click opens the context menu. + Double-clicking a bookmark or pressing the Return key opens the assigned page in Help. A right-click opens the context menu. Use the Del key to delete a selected bookmark. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/3dsettings_toolbar.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/3dsettings_toolbar.xhp index bedd180b3c..8a05efd938 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/3dsettings_toolbar.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/3dsettings_toolbar.xhp @@ -74,30 +74,30 @@ Depth Opens the Extrusion Depth window. - + Select an extrusion depth. - + Enter an extrusion depth. Direction Opens the Extrusion Direction window. - + Select a direction.UFI: same ID for Direction and Lighting direction - + Select a perspective or parallel extrusion method. Lighting Opens the Extrusion Lighting window. Select a lighting direction. - + Select a lighting intensity. Surface Opens the Extrusion Surface window. - + Select a surface material or a wireframe display. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01020200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01020200.xhp index d3dacbd680..ca28a4e4d1 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01020200.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01020200.xhp @@ -71,11 +71,11 @@ YJ: checked Salutation Includes a salutation. Select the salutation from the list box. - - + + Complimentary close Includes a greeting. Select the greeting from the list box. - + Footer Includes a footer. Go to Fax Wizard - Sender and Recipient diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01020300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01020300.xhp index d514b0ad64..5a9282f22b 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01020300.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01020300.xhp @@ -54,24 +54,24 @@ YJ: checked
- + Use user data for return address Inserts placeholders for the address on the fax template. Later in the fax document, click the placeholder to enter the actual data. - + New return address Select to enter the address data in the following text boxes. The data is inserted as normal text in the fax document. - - - - - - + + + + + + (Address data fields) Enter the sender address data. - + Use placeholders as receiver address Inserts placeholders for the address on the fax template. Later in the fax document, click the placeholder to enter the actual data. - + Use address database for mail merge Inserts database fields for a later mail merge with the fax document. Go to Fax Wizard - Footer diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01020400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01020400.xhp index dc0f7e4da2..3f75ba5a05 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01020400.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01020400.xhp @@ -54,13 +54,13 @@ YJ: checked
- + Footer Specifies the text to be printed in the footer area. - + Include only on second and following pages Suppresses the footer on the first page of a multipage fax document. - + Include page number Prints a page number in the footer area. Go to Fax Wizard - Name and location diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01020500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01020500.xhp index 0825c2e278..a2b0be9e61 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01020500.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01020500.xhp @@ -54,16 +54,16 @@ YJ: checked
- + Template name Enter the name of the fax template. - + ... Click to enter or select the complete path, including the file name of the fax template. - + Create a fax from this template Creates and saves the fax template, then opens a new fax document based on that template. - + Make manual changes to this fax template Creates and saves the fax template, then opens the template for further editing. Go to Fax Wizard diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01040200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01040200.xhp index 6a76c6e56e..0816392ebb 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01040200.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01040200.xhp @@ -50,15 +50,15 @@
- + Date Specifies the date of the meeting. - + Time Specifies the time of the meeting. Title Specifies the title of the meeting. - + Location Specifies the location of the meeting. Go to Agenda Wizard - Headings to include diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01050000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01050000.xhp index 364bbd9abc..a06883800f 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01050000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01050000.xhp @@ -41,7 +41,7 @@ wizards; presentations presentations; wizards - + @@ -58,10 +58,10 @@ - + << Back Returns to the previous step without deleting your current settings. You can only select this button after the second editing step. - + Next >> Accepts the new settings and moves to the next page. You will not be able to select this button in the last editing step. Create diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01050100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01050100.xhp index 5bb187918a..ec29cba040 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01050100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01050100.xhp @@ -54,16 +54,16 @@ dedr: fixed #i31165# Type You can determine the presentation type in this area. - + Empty presentation Creates a new (empty) presentation. - + From template Opens a list box containing various modifiable presentations. - + Open existing presentation Displays a list of previously created presentations. - + Click Open to see a file selection dialog. @@ -72,10 +72,10 @@ dedr: fixed #i31165# List of existing presentations (only available when you select the Open existing presentation option) Lists the presentations that you created and saved to the Templates directory that is specified under %PRODUCTNAME - Paths in the Options dialog box. To edit the layout and formatting of a presentation with the wizard, select the presentation, and then click Next. - + Preview Specifies that templates appear in the preview window. - + Do not show this dialog again Specifies that you only want the Wizard to start when you expressly request it with File - Wizard - Presentation. This field is only visible when you create a presentation by choosing File - New - Presentation. You can also specify whether to show the dialog with the Start with Wizard check box in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Impress - General. Continue here to Wizard Page 2. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01050200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01050200.xhp index 0f03077820..823ad72aff 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01050200.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01050200.xhp @@ -50,18 +50,18 @@
- Select a slide design + Select a slide design Allows you to select a slide design for the presentation you selected on page 1 of the Wizard. In the upper list box you can choose from three slide design types (education, presentation backgrounds and presentations). In the lower list box, you can select one of the templates for your presentation. Select an output medium - Original + Original Uses the original page format of the template. - Overhead sheet + Overhead sheet Creates a presentation to be used as overhead transparencies. - Paper + Paper Creates a presentation that can be printed on paper. - Screen + Screen Creates a computer screen presentation only. The screen is adjusted by default. - Slide + Slide Creates a presentation to be used as slides. Continue to Presentation Wizard Page 3. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01050300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01050300.xhp index 4a623373f6..8a6422fa83 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01050300.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01050300.xhp @@ -51,9 +51,9 @@ Select a slide transition Assigns special effects to your presentation and determines its speed. -Effect +Effect Specifies an effect for your presentation. -Speed +Speed Determines the effect speed. Select the presentation type Determines the timing for the presentation. @@ -69,15 +69,15 @@ You can change the settings later under the menu Presentation. -Default +Default The Default option runs the presentation as a full screen presentation with the specified speed. -Automatic +Automatic Runs the presentation automatically, and restarts it again after a break. -Duration of page +Duration of page Defines the duration of each presentation page. -Duration of pause +Duration of pause Defines the pause between each presentation. -Show logo +Show logo Specifies whether to display the $[officename] logo during the pause between each presentation. Click here to continue to page 4 of the Presentation Wizard. The wizard ends here if you selected the "Empty presentation" option on page 1 of the Wizard. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01050400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01050400.xhp index 5bd5208f9e..dbcc6bf828 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01050400.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01050400.xhp @@ -51,11 +51,11 @@ Describe your basic ideas - What is your name or the name of your company? + What is your name or the name of your company? Specifies your name or the name of your company. - What is the subject of your presentation? + What is the subject of your presentation? Specifies the topic of your presentation. - Further ideas to be presented? + Further ideas to be presented? Use this field for further thoughts and ideas that you would like to cover later in your presentation. Continue to Presentation Wizard Page 5. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01050500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01050500.xhp index bbeb2ab3c0..902bbd2060 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01050500.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01050500.xhp @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ Choose your pages In the list field, you see all pages belonging to the selected presentation template. All pages with a checkmark in the check box next to their names will be included in the created presentation. To not include a page, clear the check box in front of the page name. Click the small plus sign that is next to the page name to display the corresponding sub-items.UFI: fixes #112852# - + Create summary Creates a summary of all presentation contents. Return to the Presentation Wizard title page. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01090100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01090100.xhp index 92c026a80a..aaf6dd65e0 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01090100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01090100.xhp @@ -48,60 +48,60 @@
- + Tables or queries Specifies the table or query that you want to create the form for.
- + - + Available fields Lists the names of the data base fields in the selected table or query. Click to select a field or hold down the Shift or the CommandCtrl key while you click to select more than one field.
- + - + > Click to move the selected field(s) to the box that the arrow is pointing to.i73704
- + - + >> Click to move all fields to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
- + - + < Click to move the selected field(s) to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
- + - + << Click to move all fields to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
@@ -127,7 +127,7 @@ v Click to move the selected field down one entry in the list. - + Fields in the form Displays the fields that are in the new form. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01110100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01110100.xhp index fd6f10fe09..80b67d0977 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01110100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01110100.xhp @@ -57,16 +57,16 @@ Assign design In this area, you can choose to create a new design and select or delete an existing design. If you delete a design, you will only delete the design information in the Wizard. An export file will not be deleted by this action. - + New design Creates a new design in the next pages of the Wizard. - + Existing Design Loads an existing design from the design list to use as a starting point for the steps to follow on the next pages of the Wizard. - + Design list Displays all existing designs. - + Delete Selected Design Deletes the selected design from the design list. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01110200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01110200.xhp index bfce5bc5a3..231d628b7e 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01110200.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01110200.xhp @@ -61,36 +61,36 @@ Publication type Defines the basic settings for the intended export. -Standard HTML format +Standard HTML format Creates standard HTML pages from export pages. -Standard HTML with frames +Standard HTML with frames Creates standard HTML pages with frames. The exported page will be placed in the main frame, and the frame to the left will display a table of contents in the form of hyperlinks. -Create title page +Create title page Creates a title page for your document. -Show notes +Show notes Specifies that your notes are also displayed. -Automatic +Automatic Creates a default HTML presentation as a kiosk export, in which the slides are automatically advanced after a specified amount of time. -As stated in document +As stated in document The slide transition depends on the timing that you set for each slide in the presentation. If you set a manual page transition, the HTML presentation introduces a new page by pressing any key from your keyboard. -Automatic +Automatic The page transition takes place automatically after the specified period of time elapses and does not depend on the presentation's contents. -Slide view time +Slide view time Defines the amount of time for each slide display. -Endless +Endless Automatically restarts the HTML presentation after the last slide has been displayed. -WebCast +WebCast In a WebCast export, automatic scripts will be generated with Perl or ASP support. This enables the speaker (for example, a speaker in a telephone conference using a slide show on the Internet) to change the slides in the audience's web browsers. You will find more information on WebCast later in this section. -Active Server Pages (ASP) +Active Server Pages (ASP) When you select the ASP option, the WebCast export creates ASP pages. Note that the HTML presentation can only be offered by a web server supporting ASP. -Perl +Perl Used by WebCast export to create HTML pages and Perl scripts. -URL for listeners +URL for listeners Specifies the URL (absolute or relative) to be entered by the viewer in order to see the presentation. -URL for presentation +URL for presentation Specifies the URL (absolute or relative), where the created HTML presentation on the web server has been saved. -URL for Perl scripts +URL for Perl scripts Specifies the URL (absolute or relative) for the generated Perl scripts. More Information on WebCast Export There are two possible options for exporting $[officename] Impress presentations using WebCast technology: Active Server Pages (ASP) and Perl. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01110300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01110300.xhp index cd12a9927f..18463ac774 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01110300.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01110300.xhp @@ -52,23 +52,23 @@ Save graphics as Determines the image format. You can also define the compression value for the export. -PNG - Portable Network Graphics format +PNG - Portable Network Graphics format The files are exported as PNG files. PNG files are compressed without loss of data, and can contain more than 256 colors. -GIF - Graphics Interchange Format +GIF - Graphics Interchange Format The files are exported as GIF files. GIF files are compressed without loss of data, and have a maximum of 256 colors. -JPG - Compressed file format +JPG - Compressed file format The files are exported as JPEG files. JPEG files are compressed, with adjustable compression and can contain more than 256 colors. -Quality +Quality Specifies the compression factor of the JPEG graphic. A 100% value offers the best quality for a large data range. The 25% factor indicates small files with inferior image quality. Monitor resolution Defines the resolution for the target screen. Depending on the selected resolution, the image will be displayed in a reduced size. You can specify a reduction of up to 80% from the original size. -Low resolution (640x480 pixels)see i73719Select the low resolution to keep the file size small, even for presentations with many slides. -Medium resolution (800x600 pixels) +Low resolution (640x480 pixels)see i73719Select the low resolution to keep the file size small, even for presentations with many slides. +Medium resolution (800x600 pixels) Select the medium resolution for a medium-sized presentation. -High resolution (1024x768 pixels) +High resolution (1024x768 pixels) Select a high resolution for a high quality slide display. Export -Export sounds when slide advances +Export sounds when slide advances Specifies that the sound files that are defined as an effect for slide transitions are exported. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01110400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01110400.xhp index 9befa72476..f3d875432b 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01110400.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01110400.xhp @@ -55,19 +55,19 @@ Information for the title page - + Author Specifies the name of the publication's author. - + E-mail address Specifies the e-mail address. - + Your homepage Specifies your homepage. A hyperlink will be inserted in the publication. - + Additional information Specifies additional text to appear on the title page. - + Link to a copy of the original presentation Inserts a hyperlink to download a copy of the presentation file. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01110500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01110500.xhp index 3659692ff1..ca66c39d76 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01110500.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01110500.xhp @@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ Select button style Specifies whether you want to insert navigation buttons in your presentation. You can also select the style of the buttons. - + Text only Inserts only text hyperlinks instead of buttons. Selection field diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01110600.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01110600.xhp index 683a45c9bd..7bfb3d2498 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01110600.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01110600.xhp @@ -56,28 +56,28 @@ Select color scheme Determines the color scheme and the colors for text and background. - + Apply color scheme from document Determines the colors from the styles used in the current document. - + Use browser colors Uses the default colors of the viewer's Web Browser. - + Use custom color scheme Allows you to define your own colors for some presentation objects. - + Text Opens the Color dialog, where you can select the text color of the presentation. - + Hyperlink Opens the Color dialog, where you can select the hyperlink color of the presentation. - + Active Link Opens the Color dialog, where you can select the active link color of the presentation. - + Visited Link Opens the Color dialog, where you can select the visited link color of the presentation. - + Background Opens the Color dialog, where you can select the background color of the presentation. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01120100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01120100.xhp index 00a6f7eb1a..3484cb0a8a 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01120100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01120100.xhp @@ -50,9 +50,9 @@
- Which names do you want to give the option fields? + Which names do you want to give the option fields? Specifies the respective label for each option field. You will see the label of the option field in the form. This entry corresponds to the Label property of the option field. - Accept + Accept
@@ -68,9 +68,9 @@
Enter the label for each option field of the group that you want to create and copy the label to the list by clicking the arrow button. Repeat this procedure until all the option fields are defined. - Option fields + Option fields Displays all option fields which have to be included in the group box. - Remove + Remove diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01120200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01120200.xhp index 054935988a..714e95f23c 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01120200.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01120200.xhp @@ -53,11 +53,11 @@ Should one option field be selected as a default?Specifies whether you want to set default settings for the option box. - Yes, the following: + Yes, the following: Specifies that you want an option field to be selected as a default after opening the form. Choose the option field from the box. - List box + List box Select the option field that you want to have as the default when opening the form. - No, one particular field is not going to be selected + No, one particular field is not going to be selected Specifies that you do not want any option field to be the default choice. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01120300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01120300.xhp index 89101bf463..63f6518814 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01120300.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01120300.xhp @@ -51,9 +51,9 @@
- Which value do you want to assign to each option? + Which value do you want to assign to each option? Select a number or a text as a reference value for the selected option field. - Option fields + Option fields Select the option field for which you want to assign the reference value. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01120500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01120500.xhp index f756f381d0..219c0bb14f 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01120500.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01120500.xhp @@ -50,7 +50,7 @@
- Which caption is to be given to your option group? + Which caption is to be given to your option group? Specifies the label for the option box. You will see the label of the group box displayed in the form. The text you enter here will correspond to the Label property of the group box. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01170000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01170000.xhp index 17276999bd..7c28be8667 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01170000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01170000.xhp @@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ Mozilla / Netscape Select this option if you already use an address book in Mozilla or Netscape. - + Thunderbird Select this option if you already use an address book in Thunderbird. @@ -67,25 +67,25 @@ Outlook address book Select this option if you already use an address book in Microsoft Outlook (not Outlook Express). - + Windows system address book Select this option if you already use an address book in Microsoft Outlook Express. - + KDE Address book Select this option if you already use an address book in KDE Address book. - + OS X Address book Select this option if you already use an address book in OS X Address book. - + Evolution Select this option if you already use an address book in Evolution. - + Evolution LDAP Select this option if you already use an address book in Evolution LDAP. - + Groupwise Select this option if you already use an address book in Groupwise. - + Other external data source Select this option if you want to register another data source as address book in $[officename]. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01170400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01170400.xhp index 9c0039996f..9ccd5c820b 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01170400.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01170400.xhp @@ -52,10 +52,10 @@ Location Specifies the location of the database file. - + Browse Specifies the location using a file dialog. -Make this address book available to all modules in %PRODUCTNAME +Make this address book available to all modules in %PRODUCTNAME Registers the newly created database file in %PRODUCTNAME. The database will then be listed in the data source window (F4). If this check box is cleared, the database will be available only by opening the database file. Address book name Specifies the data source name. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/02010100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/02010100.xhp index 94808b2a6d..6c3a18001f 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/02010100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/02010100.xhp @@ -139,9 +139,9 @@ To remove a field name from the query, click the column header of the field and choose the Delete command on the context menu for the column. Save query Use the Save icon on the Standard Bar to save the query. You see a dialog that asks you to enter a name for the query. If the database supports schemas, you can also enter a schema. -Schema +Schema Enter the name of the schema that is assigned to the query or table view. -Query name or table view name +Query name or table view name Enter the name of the query or table view. Filtering data To filter data for the query, set the desired preferences in the lower area of the Design View. The following lines are available: diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/05000003.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/05000003.xhp index 1ca01fac10..a6097ceb7b 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/05000003.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/05000003.xhp @@ -47,16 +47,16 @@ Enter / change password Allows you to enter and confirm a new or changed password. If you have defined a new user, enter the user's name in this dialog. - + User Specifies the name of the new user. This field is only visible if you have defined a new user. - + Old password Enter the old password. This field is visible when you have started the dialog via Change password. - + Password Enter the new password.UFI: removed help id - + Confirm (password) Enter the new password again. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/05010100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/05010100.xhp index 0286983fd7..93b4469e63 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/05010100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/05010100.xhp @@ -44,7 +44,7 @@
- + Index design The Index Design dialog allows you edit the indexes for the current table.
@@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ Resets the current index to the setting that it had when the dialog was started. Index details As soon as you change a detail of the current index and then select another index, the change is immediately passed to the data source. You can only leave the dialog, or select another index, if the change has been successfully acknowledged by the data source. However, you can undo the change by clicking the Reset Current Index icon. -Unique +Unique Specifies whether the current index allows only unique values. Checking the Unique option prevents duplicate data from being entered in the field and ensures data integrity. Fields The Fields area displays a list of fields in the current table. You can also select multiple fields. In order to remove a field from the selection, select the empty entry at the start of the list. @@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ Displays a list of the fields in the current table. You can select more than one field.i73718 Sort order Determines the sort order. -Close +Close Closes the dialog. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/05020100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/05020100.xhp index 757510f362..a9185c7066 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/05020100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/05020100.xhp @@ -55,8 +55,8 @@ The update and delete options are only available if they are supported by the database used. - - + + Tables This is where the two related tables are listed.If you create a new relation, you can select one table from each of the combo boxes in the top part of the dialog. If you opened the Relations dialog for an existing relation by double-clicking the connection lines in the Relation window, then the tables involved in the relation cannot be modified. @@ -68,31 +68,31 @@ The names of the tables selected for the link appear here as column names. If you click a field, you can use the arrow buttons to select a field from the table. Each relation is written in a row. Update options Here you can select options that take effect when there are changes to a primary key field. - + No action Specifies that any change made to a primary key does not affect other external key fields. - + Updating cascade Updates all the external key fields if the value of the corresponding primary key has been modified (Cascading Update). - + Set null If the corresponding primary key has been modified, use this option to set the "IS NULL" value to all external key fields. IS NULL means that the field is empty. - + Set default If the corresponding primary key has been modified, use this option to set a default value to all external key fields. During the creation of the corresponding table, the default value of an external key field will be defined when you assign the field properties. Delete options Here you can select options that take effect when a primary key field is deleted. - + No action Specifies that the deletion of a primary key will not have any effect on other external key fields. - + Delete cascade Specifies that all external key fields will be deleted if you delete the corresponding primary key field. When you delete a primary key field with the Delete cascade option, all records from other tables that have this key as their foreign key are also deleted. Use this option with great care; it is possible that a major portion of the database can be deleted. - + Set null If you delete the corresponding primary key, the "IS NULL" value will be assigned to all external key fields. - + Set Default If you delete the corresponding primary key, a set value will be set to all external key fields. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/05030100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/05030100.xhp index e5fdaf3cca..fa6b9c6050 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/05030100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/05030100.xhp @@ -50,13 +50,13 @@ Table name Specifies a name for the copy. Some databases only accept names containing eight or fewer characters. Options -Definition and data +Definition and data Creates a 1:1 copy of the database table. The table definition and the complete data are copied. The table definition includes the table structure and format from different data fields, including special field properties. The field contents supply the data. -Definition +Definition Copies only the table definition and not the corresponding data. -As table view +As table view If the database supports Views, you can select this option only when a query is copied in a table container. This option enables you to see and edit a query as a normal table view. The table will be filtered in the view with a "Select" SQL statement. -Append datasee #i63815 +Append datasee #i63815 Appends the data of the table to be copied to an existing table. The table definition must be exactly the same so that data can be copied. Data cannot be copied if a data field in the target table has another format than the data field in the source table. Match the data field names in the Copy Table dialog on the Apply Columns page. @@ -64,9 +64,9 @@ If the fields of the target table have a smaller field length than in the source table when data is being attached, the source data fields will automatically be truncated to match the field lengths in the target table. primary keys; defining -Create primary key +Create primary key Automatically generates a primary key data field and fills it with values. You should always use this field, since a primary key must always be available in order to edit the table. -Name +Name Specifies a name for the primary key generated. This name is optional. Next page diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/05030200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/05030200.xhp index c26abc7c60..aa7de0308d 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/05030200.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/05030200.xhp @@ -48,14 +48,14 @@ In the data source explorer, you can copy a table by dragging and dropping the table onto the table container. The Apply columns dialog is the second window of the Copy table dialog. Existing columns -Left list box +Left list box Lists the available data fields that you can include in the copied table. To copy a data field, click its name, and then click the > button. To copy all of the fields, click the >> button. -Right list box +Right list box Lists the fields that you want to include in the copied table. - - - -Buttons + + + +Buttons Adds or removes the selected field (> or < button) or all of the fields (<< or >> button). Next page diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/05030300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/05030300.xhp index e2b36b3aca..cba16835f4 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/05030300.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/05030300.xhp @@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ Type formatting In the data source explorer, you can copy a table by dragging and dropping the table onto the table container. The Type formatting dialog is the third window of the Copy table dialog. - + List box Lists the data fields that will be included in to the copied table. Column information @@ -71,10 +71,10 @@ Select the default value for a Yes/No field. Automatic type recognition $[officename] can automatically recognize field contents when you copy database tables by drag and drop. - + (max.) lines Enter the number of lines to use for automatic type recognition. - + Auto Enables automatic type recognition. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/05030400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/05030400.xhp index 1d8c29a159..3f5c7492bd 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/05030400.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/05030400.xhp @@ -55,18 +55,18 @@ Destination table Lists the possible data fields in the destination table. Only the data fields that are selected in the source table list will be included the destination table. - - + + up Moves the selected entry up one position in the list. - - + + down Moves the selected entry down one position in the list. - + all Selects all of the data fields in the list. - + none Clears all of the check boxes in the list. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/11020000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/11020000.xhp index f314718e31..a7514852fd 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/11020000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/11020000.xhp @@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ Use this text field to enter additional optional driver settings if this is necessary.
-Character Set +Character Set Select the code conversion that you want to use to view the database in $[officename]. This does not affect the database. Choose "System" to use the default character set of your operating system. Text and dBASE databases are restricted to character sets with a fixed-size character length, where all characters are encoded with the same number of bytes.
diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/11030000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/11030000.xhp index 069f855c6b..685dd80e96 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/11030000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/11030000.xhp @@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ In dBASE format, deleted records remain in the file. To view any changes that you make to the database, close the connection to the database, and then reconnect the database. UFI: deleted note about case sensitivity. Should be not other than for all other files. - + Select the code conversion that you want to use to view the database in $[officename]. This does not affect the database. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/11030100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/11030100.xhp index 57108aa806..c126feeb74 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/11030100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/11030100.xhp @@ -48,19 +48,19 @@
-Table +Table Select the database table that you want to index. -Table Indexes +Table Indexes Lists the current indexes for the selected database table. To remove an index from the list, click the index, and then click the right arrow. -Free Indexes +Free Indexes Lists the available indexes that you can assign to a table. To assign an index to a selected table, click the left arrow icon. The left double arrow assigns all available indexes. -< +< Moves the selected index to the Table Indexes list. -<< +<< Moves all of the free indexes to the Table Indexes list. -> +> Moves the selected table indexes to the Free Indexes list. ->> +>> Moves all of the table indexes to the Free Indexes list. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/11080000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/11080000.xhp index 35b5a848a5..81f72e308b 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/11080000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/11080000.xhp @@ -55,16 +55,16 @@ You can only enter administration commands in this dialog, such as Grant, Create Table, or Drop Table, and not filter commands. The commands that you can enter depend on the data source, for example, dBASE can only run some of the SQL commands list here. To run an SQL query for filtering data in the database, use the Query Design View. -Command to execute +Command to execute Enter the SQL administration command that you want to run. For example, for a "Bibliography" data source, you can enter the following SQL command: SELECT "Address" FROM "biblio" "biblio" For more information on SQL commands, please consult the documentation that came with the database. -Previous commands +Previous commands Lists the previously executed SQL commands. To run a command again, click the command, and then click Run. -Status +Status Displays the results, including errors, of the SQL command that you ran. -Run +Run Runs the command that you entered in the Command to execute box. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/11170000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/11170000.xhp index 2e360806db..b40b169138 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/11170000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/11170000.xhp @@ -47,17 +47,17 @@ Adabas D Statistics Specifies the access options for the Adabas database.
-Data Buffer Size +Data Buffer Size Enter the size of the data buffer for the database. The setting takes effect after you restart the database. -Increment size +Increment size Enter the size by which you want to automatically increment the database. The maximum increment size is 100 MB. The setting takes effect after you restart the database. -Control User Name +Control User Name Enter the name of a user that you want to give limited control to modify some parameters of the database. -Control Password +Control Password Enter the password of the Control User. -Shut down the service when closing $[officename] +Shut down the service when closing $[officename] Exits the Adabas database server when you exit $[officename]. This option is only available if you start the database server from $[officename] with a control user and password. -Extended +Extended Opens the Database Statistics dialog, where you can view statistics about the Adabas database. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/11170100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/11170100.xhp index e129b6e10c..75b5013b47 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/11170100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/11170100.xhp @@ -46,18 +46,18 @@ Database Statistics Displays statistics about the Adabas database. Database files -SYSDEVSPACE +SYSDEVSPACE Displays the path and the name of the SYSDEVSPACE file. -TRANSACTIONLOG +TRANSACTIONLOG Displays the path and the name of the TRANSACTIONLOG file. -DATADEVSPACE +DATADEVSPACE Displays the path and the name of the DATADEVSPACE file. Database sizes -Size (MB) +Size (MB) Displays the full size (in megabytes) of the database. -Free space (MB) +Free space (MB) Displays the amount of free space (in megabytes) that is available in the database. -Memory utilization (in %) +Memory utilization (in %) Displays the amount of used space in the database as a percentage. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/30100000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/30100000.xhp index 61ec25a288..140b88ddbc 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/30100000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/30100000.xhp @@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ Database name Type the name of the database. The name is added to the Data source URL field. User settings - + Administrator Enter the name of the database administrator. The administrator name and password is assigned when you create an Adabas database. Apart from the administrator, two more users can access the Adabas database. Control User diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabaadvpropdat.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabaadvpropdat.xhp index 2350ad4e7b..cb22c59611 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabaadvpropdat.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabaadvpropdat.xhp @@ -91,7 +91,7 @@ The control box is available for all data source types which support write access to their data. The control box does not exist for spreadsheets, text, csv, and the various read-only address books. Ignore currency field information Only for Oracle JDBC connections. When enabled it specifies that no column is treated as a currency field. The field type returned from the database driver is discarded. - + Use ODBC conformant date/time literals Check to use ODBC conformant date/time literals. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabapropgen.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabapropgen.xhp index b16b97effd..902b88da40 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabapropgen.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabapropgen.xhp @@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ Ensure that the *.dbf file name extension of the dBASE files is lowercase.moved from shared\explorer\database\11030000.xhp BrowseUFI: found for dBase Opens a dialog where you can select a file or a directory.which one? or depends? -Test ConnectionUFI: found for dBaseand for Calc doc +Test ConnectionUFI: found for dBaseand for Calc doc Tests the database connection with the current settings. Path to the text filesUFI: found for text file folder Enter the path to the folder of the text files. @@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ Enter the name of the ODBC data source. User name Enter the user name that is required to access the database. -Password requiredUFI: found for Calc doc +Password requiredUFI: found for Calc doc If checked, the user will be asked to enter the password that is required to access the database. Name of the databaseUFI: found for JDBC Enter the name of the database. @@ -81,10 +81,10 @@ Data source URL Enter the location of the JDBC data source as a URL. -JDBC driver class +JDBC driver class Enter the name of the JDBC driver class that connects to the data source. -Test ClassUFI: found for JDBC +Test ClassUFI: found for JDBC Tests the database connection through the JDBC driver class. Choose a database Select a database from the list or click Create to create a new database. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz01.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz01.xhp index f291ee3af7..afe6f8f5a9 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz01.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz01.xhp @@ -51,16 +51,16 @@ Create a new database Select to create a new database. This option uses the HSQL database engine with default settings. The final page of the wizard appears next. External web page about HSQL. - - + + Open an existing database file Select to open a database file from a list of recently used files or from a file selection dialog. - - + + Recently used Select a database file to open from the list of recently used files. Click Finish to open the file immediately and to exit the wizard. - - + + Open Opens a file selection dialog where you can select a database file. Click Open or OK in the file selection dialog to open the file immediately and to exit the wizard. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02jdbc.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02jdbc.xhp index 62dc482ef6..b6f7451997 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02jdbc.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02jdbc.xhp @@ -92,14 +92,14 @@ Data source URL Enter the URL for the database. For example, for the MySQL JDBC driver, enter "jdbc:mysql://<Servername>/<name of the database>". For more information on the JDBC driver, consult the documentation that came with the driver. - -JDBC Driver Class + +JDBC Driver Class Enter the name of the JDBC driver.
Before you can use a JDBC driver, you need to add its class path. Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Java, and click the Class Path button. After you add the path information, restart %PRODUCTNAME.
-Test ClassUFI: may be Test Connection - both strings are in spec +Test ClassUFI: may be Test Connection - both strings are in spec Tests the connection with the current settings. Authentication Database Wizard diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02oracle.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02oracle.xhp index 5b44a023c6..faf4b11765 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02oracle.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02oracle.xhp @@ -80,10 +80,10 @@ Port number Enter the port number for the database server. - + Oracle JDBC Driver Class Enter the name of the JDBC driver. - + Test Class Tests the connection with the current settings. Authentication diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/menuedit.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/menuedit.xhp index b1359b82d5..089e6c861f 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/menuedit.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/menuedit.xhp @@ -57,12 +57,12 @@ Inserts an item from the clipboard. If you want, you can insert forms and reports, including subfolders, from one database file to another.
- + Edit Opens a window where you can edit the selected table, query, form, or report. - + Delete Deletes the selected table, query, form, or report. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/menufilesave.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/menufilesave.xhp index 5676db7ac1..50fb37ca36 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/menufilesave.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/menufilesave.xhp @@ -47,16 +47,16 @@ Save In this dialog, you can specify the position and name of a form UFI: spec says also for report, but reports can be created only by Wizard and are autosaved thereUFI: spec says also for query, cannot verify that you save within a database file. The dialog opens automatically when you save a form the first time.UFI: no chance to open the dialog a second time - + Create New Directory Click to create a new folder within the database file. - + Up One Level Click to go up one level in the folder hierarchy. - + File name Enter the file name for the saved form. - + Save Click to save the form to the database file. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/migrate_macros.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/migrate_macros.xhp index b90fc54ea4..fab1b29264 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/migrate_macros.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/migrate_macros.xhp @@ -51,9 +51,9 @@ The Database Document Macro Migration Wizard moves existing macros from sub-documents of an old Base file into the new Base file's macro storage area.
- + Choose a location and file name to save the new database file. By default, the new file gets the same name as the old file, while the old file gets renamed with the string "backup" in the name. - + The list shows all changes that were applied to the database file. Previously, macros have been allowed to reside only in the text sub-documents of forms and reports. Starting with OpenOffice.org 3.1 or StarOffice 9.1, macros can also be stored in the Base file itself. This means that macros in Base files can be called now from any of its sub-components: forms, reports, table design, query design, relation design, table data view. However, it is technically not possible to store macros both in a Base file and in its sub-documents at the same time. So, if you want to attach some new macros to the Base file, while retaining any existing old macros that were stored in the sub-documents, you must move the existing old macros up to the Base file's macro storage area. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/password.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/password.xhp index 7329f0c2b1..a125c8bfa4 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/password.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/password.xhp @@ -44,13 +44,13 @@ User Name and Password Required - + User name Enter the user name to connect to the data source. - + Password Enter the password to connect to the data source. - + Remember password till end of session Select to use the same user name and password without further dialog, when you connect again to the same data source in the current %PRODUCTNAME session. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/rep_datetime.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/rep_datetime.xhp index c997db7bff..cbcc5c83d1 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/rep_datetime.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/rep_datetime.xhp @@ -47,14 +47,14 @@ You can open the Date and Time dialog of the Report Builder by choosing Insert - Date and Time. Press Shift-F1 and point with the mouse at an input box to see a help text for this input box. -Enable Include Date to insert a date field into the active area of the report. The date field displays the current date when the report is executed. - - -Select a format to display the date. -Enable Include Time to insert a time field into the active area of the report. The time field displays the current time when the report is executed. - - -Select a format to display the time. +Enable Include Date to insert a date field into the active area of the report. The date field displays the current date when the report is executed. + + +Select a format to display the date. +Enable Include Time to insert a time field into the active area of the report. The time field displays the current time when the report is executed. + + +Select a format to display the time. Click OK to insert the field. You can click the date or time field and drag to another position within the same area, or edit the properties in the Properties window. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/rep_navigator.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/rep_navigator.xhp index add37e669a..5ad87a6b10 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/rep_navigator.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/rep_navigator.xhp @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ You can open the Report Navigator window of the Report Builder by choosing View - Report Navigator. The Report Navigator reveals the structure of the report. You can use the Report Navigator to insert functions into the report. -Click an entry in the Report Navigator. The corresponding object or area is selected in the Report Builder view. Right-click an entry to open the context menu. +Click an entry in the Report Navigator. The corresponding object or area is selected in the Report Builder view. Right-click an entry to open the context menu. To enter functions to the report In the context menu of the Report Navigator, you see the same commands as in the Report Builder view, plus additional commands to create new functions or to delete them. Functions can be entered using a syntax as specified by the OpenFormula proposal. @@ -82,9 +82,9 @@ Maybe you have to set the initial value to the value of the field like [field].these 3 paras copied from another mail by Ocke in users@dba.o.o If there are blank fields in the cost column, use the following formula to replace the blank fields' content with zero: [SumCost] + IF(ISBLANK([field]);0;[field])need some real working examples. See i81874Formula -Enter the formula that defines the function. Use OpenFormula syntax.Initial value -Enter the initial value for the evaluation of the formula. Often this is set to 0 or to 1.Deep traversing -If Deep traversing is enabled, functions are evaluated considering all lower levels of hierarchy. This would be used for instance for line numbering. If Deep traversing is not enabled, only the first level of hierarchy is evaluated.Pre evaluation -If Pre evaluation is enabled, functions are evaluated only when the report is finished. +Enter the formula that defines the function. Use OpenFormula syntax.Initial value +Enter the initial value for the evaluation of the formula. Often this is set to 0 or to 1.Deep traversing +If Deep traversing is enabled, functions are evaluated considering all lower levels of hierarchy. This would be used for instance for line numbering. If Deep traversing is not enabled, only the first level of hierarchy is evaluated.Pre evaluation +If Pre evaluation is enabled, functions are evaluated only when the report is finished. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/rep_pagenumbers.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/rep_pagenumbers.xhp index 171b5bbc21..9da583ac44 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/rep_pagenumbers.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/rep_pagenumbers.xhp @@ -47,11 +47,11 @@ You can open the Page Numbers dialog of the Report Builder by choosing Insert - Page Numbers. Press Shift-F1 and point with the mouse at an input box to see a help text for this input box. -Page N -Page N of M -Top of Page (Header) -Bottom of Page (Footer) -AlignmentShow Number On First Page - not in UIShow Number on First Page +Page N +Page N of M +Top of Page (Header) +Bottom of Page (Footer) +AlignmentShow Number On First Page - not in UIShow Number on First Page Select the format for the page numbers, either "Page N" or "Page N of M", where N stands for the current page number, and M for the total number of pages in the report. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/rep_prop.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/rep_prop.xhp index 1e22300e1d..bebbaf020c 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/rep_prop.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/rep_prop.xhp @@ -49,35 +49,35 @@ Press Shift-F1 and point with the mouse at an input box to see a help text for this input box. On first start of the Report Builder, the Properties window shows the Data tab page for the whole report. Select a table from the Contents list, then press Tab or click outside the input box to leave the input box. -The Add Field window is shown automatically when you have selected a table in the Contents box and leave that box. You can also click the Add Field icon on the toolbar, or choose View - Add Field. +The Add Field window is shown automatically when you have selected a table in the Contents box and leave that box. You can also click the Add Field icon on the toolbar, or choose View - Add Field. The General tab page can be used to change the name of the report, and to disable the Page Header or Page Footer areas, among others. To display the Data or General tab page for the whole report, choose Edit - Select Report.Group keep together -Groups are kept together by page or by column (default). You must enable Keep Together also.Page header -Specifies in which context the page header will be printed: on all pages, or not on pages with a report header or footer.Page footer -Specifies in which context the page footer will be printed: on all pages, or not on pages with a report header or footerPrint repeated values -Specifies to print repeated values. +Groups are kept together by page or by column (default). You must enable Keep Together also.Page header +Specifies in which context the page header will be printed: on all pages, or not on pages with a report header or footer.Page footer +Specifies in which context the page footer will be printed: on all pages, or not on pages with a report header or footerPrint repeated values +Specifies to print repeated values. If you click the Page Header or Page Footer area without selecting any object, you see the General tab page for that area. You can edit some visual properties for the area.screen only or also in report?Background color -Sets the background color for the selected object, both on screen and for printing.Visible -An invisible object is not shown in the executed report. It is still visible in the Report Builder view.Height -Defines the height of the selected object.Conditional Print Expression -If the Conditional Print Expression evaluates to TRUE, the selected object will be printed.id="par_id2386852" l10n="NEW"Conditions use the following form:Background transparent -Specifies whether the background of the selected object is transparent or opaque.just guessing +Sets the background color for the selected object, both on screen and for printing.Visible +An invisible object is not shown in the executed report. It is still visible in the Report Builder view.Height +Defines the height of the selected object.Conditional Print Expression +If the Conditional Print Expression evaluates to TRUE, the selected object will be printed.id="par_id2386852" l10n="NEW"Conditions use the following form:Background transparent +Specifies whether the background of the selected object is transparent or opaque.just guessing If you click the Detail area without selecting any object, you see the General tab page for that area. You can specify some properties to fine-tune the way the records are printed.Force New Page -Force New Page specifies whether the current section and/or the next section is printed on a new page.New Row Or Column -New Row Or Column specifies, for a multi-column design, whether the current section and/or the next section will be printed on a new row or column.Keep together -Keep Together specifies to print the current object starting on top of a new page if it doesn't fit on the current page. +Force New Page specifies whether the current section and/or the next section is printed on a new page.New Row Or Column +New Row Or Column specifies, for a multi-column design, whether the current section and/or the next section will be printed on a new row or column.Keep together +Keep Together specifies to print the current object starting on top of a new page if it doesn't fit on the current page. Insert some data fields into the Detail area, or insert other control fields into any area. When you select an inserted field, you can set the properties in the Properties window. For a Label field, you can change the displayed text in the Label input box. -For a picture, you can specify to either insert the picture as a link to a file or only as an embedded object in the Base file. The embedded option increases the size of the Base file, while the link option is not as portable to other computers.Position x -Set the X Position for the selected objectx in pixel or twips? or current measurement units? from origin as on ruler? from elsewhere?Position y -Set the Y Position for the selected objectWidth -Sets the width of the selected object.Font -Select the font for the selected text object.Print when group change -Print when group changeVert. Alignment -Vert. Alignment +For a picture, you can specify to either insert the picture as a link to a file or only as an embedded object in the Base file. The embedded option increases the size of the Base file, while the link option is not as portable to other computers.Position x +Set the X Position for the selected objectx in pixel or twips? or current measurement units? from origin as on ruler? from elsewhere?Position y +Set the Y Position for the selected objectWidth +Sets the width of the selected object.Font +Select the font for the selected text object.Print when group change +Print when group changeVert. Alignment +Vert. Alignment On the General tab page of a data field, you can set the Formatting properties, among others. -On the Data tab page, you can change the data contents to be shown. +On the Data tab page, you can change the data contents to be shown. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/rep_sort.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/rep_sort.xhp index 8dde7a43e9..8a0b3bb5c9 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/rep_sort.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/rep_sort.xhp @@ -49,23 +49,23 @@ The Groups box shows the fields in an order from top to bottom. You can select any field, then click the Move Up or Move Down button to move this field up or down in the list. The sorting and grouping will be applied in the order of the list from top to bottom. - + Lists the fields that will be used for sorting or grouping. The field at the top has the highest priority, the second field has the second priority, and so on. - + Click to open a list from which you can select a field. - + Moves the selected field up in the list. - + Moves the selected field down in the list. - + Select the sorting order. - + Select to show or hide the Group Header. - + Select to show or hide the Group Footer. - + Select to create a new group on each changed value, or on other properties. Removes the selected field from the list. @@ -81,7 +81,7 @@ For fields of type AutoNumber, Currency, or Number, you specify an interval.how? - + Enter the group interval value that records are grouped by. Select the level of detail by which a group is kept together on the same page. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/fontwork_toolbar.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/fontwork_toolbar.xhp index 2a3f12596b..09b89a7a8e 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/fontwork_toolbar.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/fontwork_toolbar.xhp @@ -51,8 +51,8 @@ Fontwork Gallery Opens the Fontwork Gallery where you can select another preview. Click OK to apply the new set of properties to your Fontwork object. - - + + Fontwork Shape Opens the Fontwork Shape toolbar. Click a shape to apply the shape to all selected Fontwork objects. @@ -70,11 +70,11 @@ Fontwork Character Spacing Opens the Fontwork Character Spacing window. - + Click to apply the character spacing to the selected Fontwork objects. Custom Opens the Fontwork Character Spacing dialog where you can enter a new character spacing value. - + Value Enter the Fontwork character spacing value. Kern Character Pairs diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/digitalsign_receive.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/digitalsign_receive.xhp index 94d7534eaf..458917f248 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/digitalsign_receive.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/digitalsign_receive.xhp @@ -78,24 +78,24 @@ If there is a mismatch of the domain name given in the certificate and the domain name you entered in the file dialog, then you see a dialog that allows you to choose from any of the following options: - + View Certificate - Opens the View Certificate dialog. - + Continue - If you are sure both domains are the same, click the Continue button. Cancel Connection - Cancels the connection. If you click Continue, you may see a dialog that asks you to enter your user name and password. user name - + Enter your user name to log on to the WebDAV server. password - + Enter your password. remember password till end of session - + If you enable Remember password till end of session, your password will be remembered for subsequent WebDAV connections until you exit %PRODUCTNAME.
diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/digitalsign_send.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/digitalsign_send.xhp index 28477dbd8c..614fb09008 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/digitalsign_send.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/digitalsign_send.xhp @@ -105,11 +105,11 @@ When you open the Basic IDE that contains signed macros, you see an icon Icon in the status bar. You can double-click the icon in the status bar to view the certificate.WebDAV see issue 32935main dialog IDs are here to lead the user initially to this help pageExamine certificate button - + Click to open the View Certificate dialog.Accept this certificate temporarily for this session radio button - + Choose this setting to accept the certificate until you exit %PRODUCTNAME.Do not accept this certificate and do not connect to this Web site radio button - + Choose this setting to cancel the connection.
English Wiki page on digital signatures diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010000.xhp index 22e7a8741c..8ad8b8604c 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010000.xhp @@ -41,7 +41,7 @@ - + $[officename] Use this dialog to create general settings for working with $[officename]. The information covers topics such as user data, saving, printing, paths to important files and directories, and color defaults. These settings are saved automatically. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010100.xhp index a21a562073..8a3f3fe273 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010100.xhp @@ -62,79 +62,79 @@ Address Use the Address field to enter and edit your personal user data.
-UFI removed a double ID - +UFI removed a double ID + Company Type the name of your company in this field.
- - + + First name Type your first name. - - + + Last name Type your last name. - - + + Initials Type your initials.
- - - + + + Street Type the name of your street in this field. - - - - + + + + ZIP Type your ZIP in this field. - - - - + + + + City Type the city where you live. - - - - + + + + State Type your state.
- - + + Title Type your title in this field.
- - + + Position Type your position in the company in this field.
- + Tel. (Home) Type your private telephone number in this field. - + Tel. (Work) Type your work number in this field.
- - - + + + Fax Type your fax number in this field.
- - - + + + E-mail Type your e-mail address. For example, my.name@my.provider.com
diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010200.xhp index 035559b5a9..0cc46bc3be 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010200.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010200.xhp @@ -57,7 +57,7 @@
Load - + Load user-specific settings with the document Loads the user-specific settings saved in a document with the document. @@ -85,23 +85,23 @@ Data source linked to the document and its view. - + Load printer settings with the document If enabled, the printer settings will be loaded with the document. This can cause a document to be printed on a distant printer, if you do not change the printer manually in the Print dialog. If disabled, your standard printer will be used to print this document. The current printer settings will be stored with the document whether or not this option is checked. Save - + Edit document properties before saving Specifies that the Properties dialog will appear every time you select the Save As command. - + Always create backup copy Saves the previous version of a document as a backup copy whenever you save a document. Every time %PRODUCTNAME creates a backup copy, the previous backup copy is replaced. The backup copy gets the extension .BAK. To change the location of the backup copy, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Paths, and then enter a new path for the backup file. - + Save AutoRecovery information everyUFI: see http://specs.openoffice.org/appwide/recovery/Autorecovery.sxwUFI: write guide "Auto backup and recovery" Specifies that %PRODUCTNAME saves the information needed to restore all open documents in case of a crash. You can specify the saving time interval. - + Minutes Specifies the time interval in minutes for the automatic recovery option. @@ -146,34 +146,34 @@
The Help tip always displays an absolute path. However, if a document is saved in HTML format, %PRODUCTNAME will enter a relative path if the appropriate check box is selected. - + Select this box for relative saving of URLs in the file system. - + Save URLs relative to internet Select this box for relative saving of URLs to the Internet. Default file format and ODF settings - + ODF format version OpenOffice.org 3 and StarOffice 9 introduce new features which have to be saved using the OpenDocument format (ODF) version 1.2. The prior versions of OpenOffice.org 2 and StarOffice 8 support the file formats ODF 1.0/1.1. Those prior file formats cannot store all new features of the new software. OpenOffice.org 3 and StarOffice 9 can open documents in ODF formats 1.0/1.1 and 1.2. When you save a document in OpenOffice.org 3 or StarOffice 9, you can select whether to save the document in the format ODF 1.2, ODF 1.2 (Extended), or in the prior format ODF 1.0/1.1. Currently, the ODF 1.2 (Extended) format enables files of Draw and Impress to contain comments. Those comments can be inserted by Insert - Comment in the latest software version. The comments get lost when loading files into prior software versions that were saved by the latest software version. Some companies or organizations may require ODF documents in the ODF 1.0/1.1 format. You can select that format to save in the listbox. This older format cannot store all new features, so the new format ODF 1.2 (Extended) is recommended where possible. - + Size optimization for ODF format When saving the document, %PRODUCTNAME writes the XML data without indents and extra line breaks. This allows documents to be saved and opened more quickly, and the file size is smaller. - - + + Warn when not saving in ODF or default format You can choose to get a warning message when you save a document in a format that is not OpenDocument or which you did not set as default format in Load/Save - General in the Options dialog box. You can choose which file format will be applied as the default when saving documents of various document types. If you always exchange your documents with other persons who use Microsoft Office, for example, you may specify here that %PRODUCTNAME only uses the Microsoft Office file formats as a default. - + Document type Specifies the document type for which you want to define the default file format. - + Always save asUFI: changed in #i46895again many changes in specs.openoffice.org/appwide/odf/odf_1-2_migration.odt Specifies how documents of the type selected on the left will always be saved as this file type. You may select another file type for the current document in the Save as dialog. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010300.xhp index e502a6d45b..ceeb76cbcd 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010300.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010300.xhp @@ -58,9 +58,9 @@
Paths used by %PRODUCTNAME To modify an entry in this list, click the entry and click Edit. You can also double click the entry. -Default +Default The Default button resets the predefined paths for all selected entries. -Edit +Edit Click to display the Select Path or Edit Paths dialog. You can change the sequence of entries by clicking the bar in the Type column. The column width can be changed by moving the separator between the columns with the mouse. In the following list of paths, the paths for the shared folders in the directory where %PRODUCTNAME is installed, are not shown. The user data for each user is stored in the {user} directory, which is located in the user's home diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010301.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010301.xhp index fbd4b27e3f..00311f79a7 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010301.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010301.xhp @@ -46,10 +46,10 @@
- + Paths Contains a list of the paths that have already been added. Mark the default path for new files. - + Add Opens the Select Path dialog to select another folder or the Open dialog to select another file. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010400.xhp index e7070bb50d..669ebfadec 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010400.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010400.xhp @@ -65,7 +65,7 @@ Contains the installed language modules. A language module can contain one, two or three submodules: Spellcheck, hyphenation and thesaurus. Each sub-module can be available in one or more languages. If you click in front of the name of the module, you activate all the available sub-modules simultaneously. If you remove a set mark, you deactivate all the available sub-modules simultaneously. If you wish to activate or deactivate individual sub-modules, click the Edit button to open the Edit Modules dialog. The configuration allows for two different directories: one folder where the user has write permissions, and one without write permissions. The user can only edit and delete the user dictionaries that are located in the writable path. Other dictionaries can be read only. - + Edit To edit a language module, select it and click Edit. The Edit Modules dialog appears. @@ -74,54 +74,54 @@ User-defined dictionaries Lists the available user dictionaries. Mark the user dictionaries that you want to use for spellcheck and hyphenation. - + New Opens the New Dictionary dialog, in which you can name a new user-defined dictionary or dictionary of exceptions and specify the language. New Dictionary In the Dictionary section you can name a new user-defined dictionary or dictionary of exceptions and specify the language. - + Name Specifies the name of the new custom dictionary. The file extension "*.DIC" is automatically appended. - + Language By selecting a certain language you can limit the use of the custom dictionary. By selecting All the custom dictionary is used independently of the current language. - + Exceptions (-) Specifies whether you wish to avoid certain words in your documents. In this way, you can create a custom dictionary of all the words to be avoided. If this exception dictionary is activated, during spellchecking you receive a corresponding note about any words which should be avoided. - + Edit Opens the Edit custom dictionary dialog, in which you can add to your custom dictionary or edit existing entries. In the Edit custom dictionary dialog you have the option to enter new terms or edit existing entries. If you edit an exception dictionary, the dialog has the added facility of defining an exception for a word. During the spellcheck this exception is then listed as a suggestion. When a dictionary is edited, a check is made on the status of the file. If the file is write-protected, it cannot be changed. The buttons New and Delete are then deactivated. - + Book Specifies the book to be edited. The IgnoreAllList (All) includes all words that have been marked with Ignore during spellcheck. This list is valid only for the current spellcheck. The IgnoreAllList entry cannot be selected and cannot be deleted. Only the words included as content can be deleted. This happens automatically each time that $[officename] is closed. - + Language Assigns a new language to the current custom dictionary. - + Word You can type a new word for inclusion in the dictionary. In the list below you will see the contents of the current custom dictionary. If you select a word from this list it is displayed in the text field. If you type a word with a trailing = character, such as "AutoComplete=", the word is never automatically hyphenated and no hyphenation is suggested. Typing "Auto=Complete" results in the word being hyphenated, or a hyphenation suggested, where you insert the = sign. - + Suggestion This input field is only available if you are editing an exception dictionary. The field shows the alternative suggestion for the current word in the "Word" text box. - + New Adds the word in the Word text field to your current custom dictionary. The word in the Suggestion field is also added when working with exception dictionaries. - + Removes the marked word from the current custom dictionary. - + Deletes the selected dictionary after a confirmation, provided it is not write-protected.
Options Defines the options for the spellcheck and hyphenation. - + Edit If you want to change a value, select the entry and then click Edit. You will see a dialog for entering a new value. Check uppercase words @@ -141,7 +141,7 @@ Typing errors are highlighted in the document with a red underline. If you place the cursor over a word marked in this way, you can open the context menu to obtain a list of corrections. Select a correction to replace the word. If you make the same mistake again while editing the document, it will be marked as an error again.UFI: changed para, removed note, see i60431 To place the word pair in the AutoCorrect replacement table, open the AutoCorrect context menu and choose AutoCorrect. Make your selection from the submenu. The word is replaced and at the same time the word pair is placed in the replacement table.
- + Minimal number of characters for hyphenation Specifies the minimum number of characters required for automatic hyphenation to be applied. Type the minimum number of characters that must come before or after the hyphen. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010401.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010401.xhp index 9d20af7b0d..e0908ef861 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010401.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010401.xhp @@ -74,19 +74,19 @@ Only one sub-module can be activated under Hyphenation. - + Language Specifies the language of the module. For all language selection fields in %PRODUCTNAME, the following applies: A language entry has a check mark in front of it if the spellcheck is activated for this language. - + Move up Increases the priority of the module selected in the list box by one level. - + Move down Decreases the priority of the module selected in the list box by one level. - + Back Click here to undo the current changes in the list box. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010500.xhp index 2370140d9a..80efd7118d 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010500.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010500.xhp @@ -52,14 +52,14 @@ Color table - + Name Specifies the name of a selected color. You can also type a name in this field when defining a new color. - + Color Contains a list of available colors. To select a color, choose one from the list. Color table - + To modify, select the color model: Red-Green-Blue (RGB) or Cyan-Magenta-Yellow-BlacK (CMYK). %PRODUCTNAME uses only the RGB color model for printing in color. The CMYK controls are provided only to ease the input of color values using CMYK notation. If you select RGB, the initials of the three colors will appear and you can set the color from 0 to 255 with the spin button. @@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ B Blue If you select CMYK, the initials of the four colors will appear and you can set the color from 0 to 255 with the spin button. - + C Cyan M @@ -83,21 +83,21 @@ K Black - + Add Adds a new color. - + Modify Changes the current color. Note that the color is overwritten without a confirmation. - + Edit - + Load Color List Accesses the Open dialog, which allows you to select a color palette. - + Save Color List Opens the Save As dialog, which enables you to save the current color table under a specified name. If you do not choose this command, the current color table will be automatically saved as default and re-loaded the next time you start $[officename]. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010501.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010501.xhp index 365360a283..215c5c5ab5 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010501.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010501.xhp @@ -72,44 +72,44 @@ The gradient in the left color window is immediately adjusted with respect to hue, saturation, and brightness. %PRODUCTNAME uses only the RGB color model for printing in color. The CMYK controls are provided only to ease the input of color values using CMYK notation. - + <-- Click the <-- button to replace the selected color in the color palette with the color selected at the right. The button is enabled when you select a color in one of the four corners. - + --> Sets the small selection cursor in the right window on the color, which corresponds to the selected color in the left window and updates the respective values in the numerical fields. - + Cyan Sets the Cyan color value in the CMYK color model. - + Magenta Sets the Magenta color value in the CMYK color model. - + Yellow Sets the Yellow color value in the CMYK color model. - - + + Key Sets the Black color value or key (black) in the CMYK color model. - + Red Sets the Red color value in the RGB color model. - + Green Sets the Green color value in the RGB color model. - + Blue Sets the Blue color value in the RGB color model. - + Color Sets the Hue in the HSB color model. - + Saturation Sets the Saturation in the HSB color model. - + Luminance Sets the Brightness in the HSB color model. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010600.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010600.xhp index bf02b8b7c4..4aa7105a41 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010600.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010600.xhp @@ -56,8 +56,8 @@
- - + + Year (two digits) Defines a date range, within which the system recognizes a two-digit year.
@@ -66,34 +66,34 @@ Help Specifies the behavior of the installed help. - + Tips Displays the icon names and more bubble help information, for example, chapter names when you scroll through a document with chapters. - + Extended tips Displays a help text when you rest the cursor on an icon, a menu command, or a control on a dialog. - - + + Help Agent Specifies that the Help Agent will be displayed automatically in selected situations. Click the Help Agent window to see a Help page with information about the current context. - - + + Reset Help Agent If you have not opened the Help Agent for a particular situation three times in succession, but rather have closed it or let it close automatically, the Help Agent for this situation is not shown again. Click Reset Help Agent to restore the default list of situations for which the Help Agent is displayed. $[officename] Help formatting - - + + Style sheet Choose the style of $[officename] Help. Open/Save dialogsUFI: see spec doc "Gnome file selector" - - + + Use $[officename] dialogs Specifies whether $[officename] dialogs are used to open and save documents. Otherwise the dialogs of the operating system are used. @@ -105,8 +105,8 @@ The $[officename] dialogs for opening and saving documents are described in $[officename] Help. Document status - - + + Printing sets "document modified" status Specifies whether the printing of the document counts as a modification. When this option is marked, the very next time the document is closed you are asked if the changes should be saved. The print date is then entered in the document properties as a change. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010700.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010700.xhp index 21d1716ef6..b668bb78b4 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010700.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010700.xhp @@ -57,8 +57,8 @@
Font replacement also affects the display of fonts on the $[officename] user interface. - - + + Apply replacement table Enables the font replacement settings that you define. @@ -122,12 +122,12 @@ - - + + Font Enter or select the name of the font that you want to replace. - - + + Replace with Enter or select the name of the replacement font. @@ -164,16 +164,16 @@ Font settings for HTML and Basic sources Select the font and font size for the display of HTML and Basic source code. - - + + Fonts Select the font for the display of HTML and Basic source code. Select Automatic to detect a suitable font automatically. - - + + Non-proportional fonts only Check to display only non-proportional fonts in the Fonts list box. - - + + Size Select a font size for the display of HTML and Basic source code. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010800.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010800.xhp index e27db33561..9f13a5fe8b 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010800.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010800.xhp @@ -62,49 +62,49 @@
- - + + Scaling Uses percentile scaling for font size in user interface elements, such as dialogs and icon labels.UFI: see OOo only feature "Icon theme switching" The Scaling setting does not affect the font size of text in a document. - - - + + + Icon size and style Specifies the display size of toolbar icons.The Automatic option uses the font size settings of your operating system for menus. - - + + Select the icon style for icons in toolbars and dialogs. - - + + Use system font for user interface Specifies to use the system font to display all menus and dialogs. Else another installed font is used. - + Screen font antialiasing Select to smooth the screen appearance of text. - + Enter the smallest font size to apply antialiasing. Menu - - - + + + Icons in menus Displays icons next to the corresponding menu items. Select from "Automatic", "Hide" and "Show". "Automatic" displays icons according to system settings and themes. - - + + Show preview of fonts Displays the names of selectable fonts in the corresponding font, for example, fonts in the Font box on the Formatting bar. - - + + Show font history Lists the last five fonts that you used in the current document at the top of the list in the Font Name box on the Formatting bar. @@ -114,7 +114,7 @@ Press Shift+Ctrl+R to restore or refresh the view of the current document. - + Use hardware acceleration Directly accesses hardware features of the graphical display adapter to improve the screen display. The support for hardware acceleration is not available for all operating systems and platform distributions of %PRODUCTNAME. @@ -127,13 +127,13 @@ Transparency level Select the transparency level for transparent selections. The default value is 75%. You can select values from 10% to 90%. - - + + Mouse positioning Specifies if and how the mouse pointer will be positioned in newly opened dialogs. - - + + Middle mouse button Defines the function of the middle mouse button. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010900.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010900.xhp index d1ce83d279..6559abba6c 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010900.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010900.xhp @@ -59,44 +59,44 @@ Reduce print data You can reduce the amount of data to be sent to the printer. Reducing the print data increases the print speed because the print files are smaller. This makes it easier for printers with a smaller memory to print. Reducing print data can result in slightly lower print quality. - -Settings for + +Settings for Specifies whether the print settings apply to direct printing or to printing to a file. -Reduce transparency +Reduce transparency If you mark this field the transparent objects will be printed like normal, non-transparent objects, depending on your selection in the following two option buttons.
Transparency cannot be output directly to a printer. The areas of the document in which transparency is to be visible must therefore always be calculated as bitmaps and sent to the printer. Depending on the size of the bitmaps and the print resolution a large amount of data may result.
-Automatically +Automatically Specifies that the transparency is only printed if the transparent area covers less than a quarter of the entire page. -No transparency +No transparency With this option transparency is never printed. -Reduce bitmaps +Reduce bitmaps Specifies that bitmaps are printed with reduced quality. The resolution can only be reduced and not increased. - -High/normal print quality + +High/normal print quality High print quality corresponds to a resolution of 300dpi. Normal print quality corresponds to a resolution of 200dpi. - -Resolution + +Resolution Specifies the maximum print quality in dpi. The resolution can only be reduced and not increased. -Include transparent objects +Include transparent objects If this field is marked, the reduction in print quality for bitmaps also applies to the transparent areas of objects. -Reduce gradients +Reduce gradients If this field is marked, gradients are printed with reduced quality. - -Gradient stripes + +Gradient stripes Specifies the maximum number of gradient stripes for printing. -Intermediate color +Intermediate color Specifies that gradients are only printed in a single intermediate color. -Convert colors to grayscale +Convert colors to grayscale Specifies that all colors are printed only as grayscale. Printer warnings Defines which warnings appear before printing begins. -Paper size +Paper size Mark this check box if a certain paper size is needed for printing the current document. If the paper size used in the document is not provided by the current printer, you will receive an error message. -Paper orientation +Paper orientation Mark this check box if you need a certain paper orientation for printing the current document. If the format used by the current document is not available from the printer, an error message will appear. -Transparency +Transparency Mark this check box if you always want to be warned if transparent objects are contained in the document. If you print such a document, a dialog appears in which you can select if the transparency is to be printed in this print instruction. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01011000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01011000.xhp index a0d18d6e4e..5e64faf8aa 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01011000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01011000.xhp @@ -56,27 +56,27 @@ Undo Defines the maximum number of reverse steps allowed. - -Number of steps + +Number of steps You can specify the number of steps which can be undone by selecting a number from the list. Graphics cache The graphics cache saves the graphics contained in a document in your computer's main memory. This means that the attributes of a graphic stored in the cache do not have to be re-calculated if you return to the page containing the graphic after scrolling through a document. - -Use for $[officename] (MB) + +Use for $[officename] (MB) Specifies the total cache size for all graphics. - -Memory per object (MB) + +Memory per object (MB) Specifies that objects which are larger than the selected megabytes will not be placed in the cache. - -Remove from memory after (hh:mm) + +Remove from memory after (hh:mm) Specifies the time that each graphic remains in the cache in hours and minutes. Cache for inserted objects - -Number of objects + +Number of objects Choose the maximum number of OLE objects that are pooled in the cache. $[officename] Quickstarter - -Load $[officename] during system start-up + +Load $[officename] during system start-up Enable systray QuickstarterUFI: new text seen in m187, see CWS gtkquickstart Mark this check box if you want $[officename] to enable quickstart. This option is available if the Quickstart module has been installed.UFI: had to remove explanation because on Windows it is at start-up, while on Unix it is a user-systray feature only. Cannot have switches inside AHID text. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01012000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01012000.xhp index 428c3069d9..02093d6eaa 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01012000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01012000.xhp @@ -57,16 +57,16 @@ Color scheme Save and delete color schemes. - + Scheme Selects the color scheme you want to use. - + Save Saves the current settings as a color scheme that you can reload later. The name is added to the Scheme box. Name of color scheme Enter a name for the color scheme. - + Delete Deletes the color scheme shown in the Scheme box. You cannot delete the Default scheme. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01013000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01013000.xhp index 6fc08e90e9..426bb7963a 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01013000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01013000.xhp @@ -61,30 +61,30 @@ Miscellaneous options Sets accessibility options. - + Support assistive technology tools (program restart required) Allows you to use assistive tools, such as external screen readers, Braille devices or speech recognition input devices. The Java Runtime Environment must be installed on your computer before you can enable assistive support. -Use text selection cursor in read-only text document +Use text selection cursor in read-only text document Displays cursor in read-only documents. -Use system font for user interface +Use system font for user interface Displays fonts in menus, dialogs, and other user interface elements using the system font settings. -Allow animated graphics +Allow animated graphics Previews animated graphics, such as GIF images, in %PRODUCTNAME. -Allow animated text +Allow animated text Previews animated text, such as blinking and scrolling, in %PRODUCTNAME. -Help tips disappear after +Help tips disappear after Hides the Help tips after the number of seconds that you enter. Otherwise, Help tips are displayed until you press Escape or move the cursor. -Seconds +Seconds Enter the number of seconds to display the Help tips. Options for high contrast appearance High contrast is an operating system setting that changes the system color scheme to improve readability. You can decide how %PRODUCTNAME uses the high contrast settings of the operating system. Cell borders and shadows are always shown in text color when high contrast mode is active. The cell background color is ignored then. -Automatically detect high contrast mode of operating system +Automatically detect high contrast mode of operating system Switches %PRODUCTNAME into high contrast mode when the system background color is very dark. -Use automatic font color for screen display +Use automatic font color for screen display Displays fonts in %PRODUCTNAME using the system color settings. This option only affects the screen display. -Use system colors for page previews +Use system colors for page previews Applies the high contrast settings of the operating system to page previews. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01014000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01014000.xhp index 9813c22cf3..ac3acea5d9 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01014000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01014000.xhp @@ -57,16 +57,16 @@ Sets the options for a remote configuration access to your personal $[officename] settings stored on an LDAP server. To see this tab page and to use this feature, remote configuration must be active: You need an account on an LDAP server that is running and configured to store $[officename] user settings. Using remote configuration, you can start a copy of $[officename] on any computer in the network with your own user data and personal configuration.link to how-to ldap config, single signon how-to, etc - + Authentication Method Choose your security mechanism for access to the LDAP server. Choices are Simple or Kerberos. - + User name Using "simple" authentication method, you enter your user name on the LDAP server here. Using "Kerberos", you just see your user name, but cannot edit it. - + Password Using "simple" authentication method, enter your password for access to the LDAP server here. Using "Kerberos", this box is not active. - + Save password Using "simple" authentication method, check this box to make your password persistent. If the password is persistent and the same user starts $[officename] later on, the user name and password will not be requested again. Using "Kerberos", this box is not active. The password will be stored encrypted in a file called .ssop in your home directory diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01020100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01020100.xhp index 1e07a71462..cc5a6ef849 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01020100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01020100.xhp @@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ Settings Defines the settings for the proxy server. -Proxy server +Proxy server Specifies the type of proxy definition. None Accesses the Internet without a proxy server. Allows you to set up a connection directly on your computer to an Internet provider that does not use a proxy. @@ -64,19 +64,19 @@ Type server names without the protocol prefix. For example, type www.sun.com, not http://www.sun.com. System On Windows or UNIX systems using GNOME or KDE, this option tells %PRODUCTNAME to use the system settings. You must restart %PRODUCTNAME to initiate this setting.UFI: see spec "System-Settings" -HTTP proxy +HTTP proxy Type the name of the proxy server for HTTP. Type the port in the right-hand field. -HTTPS proxy +HTTPS proxy Type the name of the proxy server for HTTPS. Type the port in the right-hand field. -FTP proxy +FTP proxy Type the name of the proxy server for FTP. Type the port in the right-hand field. -No proxy for +No proxy for Specifies the names of the servers that do not require any proxy servers, separated by semicolons. These are servers addressed in your local network, and servers used for video and audio streaming, for example. You can also use placeholders for the names of hosts and domains. For example, type *.sun.com to address all the hosts in the sun.com domain without proxy. - - - -Port + + + +Port Type the port for the corresponding proxy server. The maximum value of a port number is fixed at 65535. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01020200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01020200.xhp index 5e42cea524..a8ad7e9303 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01020200.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01020200.xhp @@ -56,25 +56,25 @@ Search in Specifies the search engine and its corresponding configuration. - + Search engines Displays the available search engines. Select a search engine to display its configuration in the adjacent text and option boxes. - + Name Displays the name of the selected search engine. This is the name that will be shown in the sub-menu of the Search icon on the Hyperlink bar. - - - + + + Type Sets the advanced search preferences (and, or, exact) as well as the way the results are defined and displayed. The links And, Or and Exactly are available. - + Prefix This text box displays the URL and the first part of the query command for a search machine. A URL can also be typed directly. - + Suffix The search terms are passed between the prefix and the suffix.The suffix provides the command sequence, sent at the end of a search. - + Separator If you type more than one word while running a search, these words will be separated by the character specified here. Most search engines require the "+" character. To determine which prefixes, separators and suffixes to use when defining a new search engine: @@ -95,20 +95,20 @@ Compare the URLs with the sample URLs in the fields of this dialog and make a note of the prefixes, suffixes and separators used. - + Case match Determines the case match for running a search. The list contains the following entries: None, Upper and Lower. The search terms entered are converted according to your selection. Search engines handle queries differently according to the way they are constructed. For example, some are case sensitive and some are not. Because of this, it is best to select None as the case match option. - + New Use this button to include a new search engine.New deletes all important entries of the entry mask such as "Name" and "Suffix". Enter the new search engine together with all of the necessary details. As soon as you accept your entries with Add, the new search engine will appear in the search engine list under Search in. Close the dialog with the OK button. - + Add Click this button to add a new configuration to the list. - + Modify Click this button to apply the modifications made to an existing configuration. - + Delete Click this button to delete the selected search engine from the list. There will be no security response. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01020300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01020300.xhp index 693fba4192..7d8c0886c7 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01020300.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01020300.xhp @@ -49,9 +49,9 @@ On UNIX systems, specifies the e-mail program to use when you send the current document as e-mail. -E-mail program +E-mail program Enter the e-mail program path and name. -... +... Opens a file dialog to select the e-mail program. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01020400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01020400.xhp index 5a3487cf39..a502c8a5d0 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01020400.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01020400.xhp @@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ The browser opens a new browser window that shows some of the %PRODUCTNAME icons, and displays the document in the browser window. This is the default when you enable the Browser Plug-in. When you click the Edit File icon, a copy of the document is downloaded to a temporary folder on your disk, then %PRODUCTNAME starts and loads the copy for editing. - + Display documents in browser Enables the Browser Plug-in to show %PRODUCTNAME documents in a browser window. Select, click OK, then restart your browser. Then, in the browser window, click any %PRODUCTNAME document hyperlink. The plug-in needs a version of Mozilla, Netscape, or Firefox installed on your system. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01030300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01030300.xhp index 891265cc88..103974ebbe 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01030300.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01030300.xhp @@ -52,67 +52,67 @@ macros;security read-only documents;opening documents as mw corrected a typo in "file ..." and changed "read-only documents;..." -Security +Security Defines the security options for saving documents and for opening documents that contain macros.
-UFI: this converts to "MACROSECURITY" help id using the m237 hid.lst - bug?Options +UFI: this converts to "MACROSECURITY" help id using the m237 hid.lst - bug?Options Opens the "Security options and warning" dialog. The Security options and warnings dialog contains the following controls: - -When saving or sending + +When saving or sending Select to see a warning dialog when you try to save or send a document that contains recorded changes, versions, or comments. - -When printing + +When printing Select to see a warning dialog when you try to print a document that contains recorded changes or comments. - -When signing + +When signing Select to see a warning dialog when you try to sign a document that contains recorded changes, versions, fields, references to other sources (for example linked sections or linked pictures), or comments. - -When creating PDF files + +When creating PDF files Select to see a warning dialog when you try to export a document to PDF format that displays recorded changes in Writer, or that displays comments. - -Remove personal information on saving + +Remove personal information on saving Select to always remove user data from the file properties. If this option is not selected, you can still remove the personal information for the current document with the Reset button on File - Properties - General. - -Recommend password protection on saving + +Recommend password protection on saving Select to always enable the Save with password option in the file save dialogs. Deselect the option to save files by default without password. -Ctrl-click required to follow hyperlinks +Ctrl-click required to follow hyperlinks If enabled, you must hold down the Ctrl key while clicking a hyperlink to follow that link. If not enabled, a click opens the hyperlink. Passwords for web connections You can enter a master password to enable easy access to sites that require a user name and password. -Persistently save passwords protected by a master password +Persistently save passwords protected by a master password If enabled, %PRODUCTNAME will securely store all passwords that you use to access files from web servers. You can retrieve the passwords from the list after you enter the master password. -Master Password +Master Password Opens the Enter Master Password dialog. -Enter the master password. -Enter the master password again. -Enter the master password to continue. -Show Passwords +Enter the master password. +Enter the master password again. +Enter the master password to continue. +Show Passwords Asks for the master password. If master password is correct, shows the Stored Web Connection Information dialog. The Stored Web Connection Information dialog shows a list of web sites and user names that you entered previously. You can select any entry and remove it from the list. You can view the password for the selected entry.Remove -Removes the selected entry from the list.Remove All -Removes all entries from the list.Change Password -Opens a dialog where you can view and change the password for the selected entry. +Removes the selected entry from the list.Remove All +Removes all entries from the list.Change Password +Opens a dialog where you can view and change the password for the selected entry. Macro security Adjust the security level for executing macros and specify trusted macro authors. - -Macro Security + +Macro Security Opens the Macro Security dialog. File sharing options for this document The following options are valid only for the current document: - -Open this document in read-only mode + +Open this document in read-only mode Select to allow this document to be opened in read-only mode only. This file sharing option protects the document against accidental changes. It is still possible to edit a copy of the document and save that copy with the same name as the original. - -Record changes + +Record changes Select to enable recording changes. This is the same as Edit - Changes - Record. To protect the recording state with a password, click Protect and enter a password. Other users of this document can apply their changes, but they cannot disable change recording without the password. - -Protect / Unprotect + +Protect / Unprotect Protects the change recording state with a password. If change recording is protected for the current document, the button is named Unprotect. Click Unprotect and type the correct password to disable the protection. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01030500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01030500.xhp index 880318a838..24108d2ac2 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01030500.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01030500.xhp @@ -48,68 +48,68 @@
$[officename] Basic scripts in HTML documents - + HTML compatibility Defines settings for HTML pages.
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + + + + + + + + + Font sizes Use the spin buttons Size 1 to Size 7 to define the respective font sizes for the HTML <font size=1> to <font size=7> tags. Import Defines the settings for importing HTML documents. - + Use 'English (USA)' locale for numbers When importing numbers from an HTML page, the decimal separator and the thousands separator characters differ according to the locale of the HTML page. The clipboard however contains no information about the locale. For example, the characters "1.000" copied from a German Web page most possibly mean "one thousand" because the period is the thousands separator in a German locale. If copied from an English Web page, the same characters stand for the number 1 as in "one dot zero zero zero". If not checked, numbers will be interpreted according to the setting in Language Settings - Language of - Locale setting in the Options dialog box. If checked, numbers will be interpreted as 'English (USA)' locale. - - + + Import unknown HTML tags as fields Mark this check box if you want tags that are not recognized by $[officename] to be imported as fields. For an opening tag, an HTML_ON field will be created with the value of the tag name. For a closing tag, an HTML_OFF will be created. These fields will be converted to tags in the HTML export. - - + + Ignore font settings Mark this check box to ignore all font settings when importing. The fonts that were defined in the HTML Page Style will be the fonts that will be used. - - + + Export Defines the settings for exporting HTML documents. To export in HTML format select the HTML Document file type in the Save As dialog. You can find further instructions in the Import and export filters description. To optimize the HTML export, select a browser or HTML standard from the Export box. If "$[officename] Writer" is selected, specific $[officename] Writer instructions are exported. - - + + $[officename] Basic Mark this check box to include the $[officename] Basic instructions when exporting to HTML format. You must activate this option before you create the $[officename] Basic Script, since otherwise it will not be inserted. $[officename] Basic Scripts must be located in the header of the HTML document. Once you have created the macro in the $[officename] Basic IDE, it appears in the source text of the HTML document in the header. - - + + Display warning If this field is marked, when exporting to HTML a warning is shown that %PRODUCTNAME Basic macros will be lost. - - + + Print layout If you mark this field, the print layout of the current document is exported as well. It can be read by $[officename] as well as Netscape Navigator from 4.0 and above and by MS Internet Explorer from 4.0 and above. The HTML filter supports CSS2 (Cascading Style Sheets Level 2) for printing documents. These capabilities are only effective if print layout export is activated. - - + + Copy local graphics to Internet Mark this check box to automatically upload the embedded pictures to the Internet server when uploading using FTP. Use the Save As dialog to save the document and enter a complete FTP URL as the file name in the Internet. - - + + Character set Select the appropriate character set for the export. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040200.xhp index 38b36cb2b7..3367245b15 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040200.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040200.xhp @@ -73,50 +73,50 @@ Guides Specifies settings that refer to the representation of boundaries. -Guides while moving +Guides while moving Displays guides around the frames when frames are moved. You can select the Guides while moving option to show the exact position of the object using lineal values. -Simple handles +Simple handles Displays the handles (the eight points on a delimiting rectangle) as simple squares without 3D effect. -Large handles +Large handles Displays larger sized handles (the eight points on a delimiting rectangle). View Specifies whether scrollbars and rulers are displayed. -Horizontal scrollbar +Horizontal scrollbar Displays the horizontal scrollbar. -Vertical scrollbar +Vertical scrollbar Displays the vertical scrollbar. -Ruler +Ruler Enables the rulers. Use the following two check boxes to select the ruler(s) to be shown. - -Horizontal ruler + +Horizontal ruler Displays the horizontal ruler. Select the desired measurement unit from the corresponding list. - -Vertical ruler + +Vertical ruler Displays the vertical ruler. Select the desired measurement unit from the corresponding list. -Right-aligned +Right-aligned Aligns the vertical ruler with the right border. -Smooth scroll +Smooth scroll Activates the smooth page scrolling function. The scrolling speed depends of the area and of the color depth display. Display Defines which document elements are displayed. -Graphics and objects +Graphics and objects Specifies whether to display graphics and objects on the screen. If these elements are hidden, you will see empty frames as placeholders. You can also control the display of graphics through the Graphics On/Off icon. If a text document is open, this icon is displayed on the Tools bar. If the Graphics and objects option is not selected, no graphics will be loaded from the Internet. Graphics within a table and without an indication of their size can cause display problems when using an older HTML standard on the browsed page. -Tables +Tables Displays the tables contained in your document. To display the table boundaries, right-click any table and choose Table Boundaries, or choose Table - Table Boundaries in a Writer document. -Drawings and controls +Drawings and controls Displays the drawings and controls contained in your document. -Field codes +Field codes Displays the field names in the document instead of the contents of the fields. You can also choose View - Fields in a text document. -Comments +Comments Displays comments. Click a comment to edit the text. Use the context menu in Navigator to locate or delete a comment. Use the comments's context menu to delete this comment or all comments or all comments of this author. Settings (for HTML document only) -Measurement unit (for HTML document only) +Measurement unit (for HTML document only) Specifies the Unit for HTML documents. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040300.xhp index 79ef240ddd..ae2d383ac1 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040300.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040300.xhp @@ -64,32 +64,32 @@ Basic fonts - + Default Specifies the font to be used for the Default Paragraph Style. The Default Paragraph Style font is used for nearly all Paragraph Styles, unless the Paragraph Style explicitly defines another font. - - - - - + + + + + Size Specifies the size of the font. - + Heading Specifies the font to be used for headings. - + List Specifies the fonts for lists and numbering and all derived styles. When you choose Format - Numbering/Bullets Format - Numbering/Bullets to format a paragraph with numbers or bullets in a text document, the program assigns these Paragraph Styles automatically. - + Caption Specifies the font used for the captions of images and tables. - + Index Specifies the font used for indexes, alphabetical indexes, and tables of contents. - + Current document only Specifies that the settings apply to the current document only. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040400.xhp index 87eb80fccb..f18611f353 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040400.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040400.xhp @@ -71,90 +71,90 @@ The print settings defined on this tab page apply to all subsequent documents. If you only want to change the settings for the current document, use the Options button in the File - Print dialog. Contents Specifies which document contents are to be printed. - + Graphics Specifies whether the graphics of your text document are printed. - + Tables Specifies whether the tables of the text document are printed. - + Drawings (not for HTML documents) Specifies whether graphics created with $[officename] drawing functions are printed. - + Controls Specifies whether the form control fields of the text document are printed. - + Background Specifies whether to include colors and objects that are inserted to the background of the page (Format - Page - Background) in the printed document.UFI: fixes #i21977# - + Print black Specifies whether to always print text in black. - + Hidden text Enable this option to print text that is marked as hidden. The following hidden text is printed: text that is formatted as hidden by Format - Character - Font Effects - Hidden, and the text fields Hidden text and Hidden paragraphs.UFI: sorry, due to a bug no links allowed in extended help text - + Text placeholder Enable this option to print text placeholders. Disable this option to leave the text placeholders blank in the printout.Text placeholders are fields. Pages Defines the print order for $[officename] Writer documents with multiple pages. - + Left pages (not for HTML documents) Specifies whether to print all left (even numbered) pages of the document. - + Right pages (not for HTML documents) Specifies whether to print all right (odd numbered) pages of the document. - + Reversed Specifies whether to reverse the printing order. The last page of the document will then be the first one printed. - + Brochure Select the Brochure option to print your document in brochure format. The brochure format is as follows in $[officename] Writer:
If you print a document in portrait on a landscape page, two opposing sides in a brochure will be printed next to each other. If you have a printer with double-sided printing capability, you can create an entire brochure from your document without having to collate the pages later. If you have a printer that only has single-sided printing capability, you can achieve this effect by first printing the front pages with the Right pages option marked, then re-inserting the entire paper stack in your printer and printing all the back pages with the Left pages option marked.
- + Right to left Check to print the pages of the brochure in the correct order for a right-to-left script. Comments - + None Specifies that comments in your document are not printed. - + Comments only Specifies that comments in your document are printed, but not the actual text. - + End of document Specifies that comments are printed at the end of the document, after the actual text. - + End of page Specifies that comments are printed on an extra page that follows each page containing comments. Other - + Print automatically inserted blank pages If this option is enabled, automatically-inserted blank pages are being printed. This is best if you are printing double-sided. For example, in a book, a "chapter" paragraph style has been set to always start with an odd numbered page. If the previous chapter ends on an odd page, %PRODUCTNAME inserts an even numbered blank page. This option controls whether to print that even numbered page or not. - + Create single print jobs Specifies that each new print job will begin on a new page even if you are using a duplex printer. If this field is not checked then it is possible that the first page of the second copy is printed on the reverse side of the last page of the first copy, especially if there are an odd number of pages. - + Paper tray from printer settings For printers with multiple trays, the "Paper tray from printer settings" option specifies whether the paper tray used is specified by the system settings of the printer. - + Fax If you have installed fax software on your computer and wish to fax directly from the text document, select the desired fax machine. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040500.xhp index ef40ee7d0f..d2667f3d7d 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040500.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040500.xhp @@ -65,20 +65,20 @@ Defines the defaults for all newly created text tables in text documents.
- + Heading Specifies that the first row of the table is formatted with the "Table heading" Paragraph Style.
- + Repeat on each page Specifies whether the table heading is carried over onto the new page after a page break.
- + Do not split (not in HTML) Specifies that tables are not split by any type of text flow break. You can also find this option in menu Table - Table Properties - Text Flow.
- + Border Specifies that table cells have a border by default.
@@ -88,18 +88,18 @@
- + Number recognition Specifies that numbers in a text table are recognized and formatted as numbers. If Number recognition is not marked, numbers are saved in text format and are automatically left-aligned.
- + Number format recognition If Number format recognition is not marked, only input in the format that has been set at the cell is accepted. Any other input resets the format to Text.
- + Alignment Specifies that numbers are always bottom right aligned in the cell. If this field is not marked numbers are always top left aligned in the cell. Direct formatting is not influenced by the Alignment field. If you center align the cell contents directly, they remain centered irrespective of whether text or numbers are involved. @@ -107,29 +107,29 @@ Keyboard handling Move cells Defines the default settings for moving rows and columns with the keyboard. - + Row Specifies the value to be used for moving a row. - + Column Specifies the value to be used for moving a column. Insert Specifies the default settings for inserting rows and columns with the keyboard. - + Row Specifies the default value for inserting rows. - + Column Specifies the default value for inserting columns. Behavior of rows/columns Determines the relative effect of rows and columns on adjacent rows or columns, as well as on the entire table. - + Fixed Specifies that changes to a row or column only affect the corresponding adjacent area. - + Fixed, proportional Specifies that changes to a row or column have an effect on the entire table. - + Variable Specifies that changes to a row or column affect the table size. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040600.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040600.xhp index b868a8ac6d..10e2a23420 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040600.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040600.xhp @@ -73,60 +73,60 @@
Display of Defines which non-printing characters are visible on screen. Activate the Non-printing Characters icon on the Standard bar. All characters that you have selected on the Formatting Aids tab page will be displayed. - + Paragraph end Specifies whether paragraph delimiters are displayed. The paragraph delimiters also contain paragraph format information. - + Custom hyphens Specifies whether user-defined delimiters are displayed. These are hidden delimiters that you enter within a word by pressing Command+Hyphen(-) Ctrl+Hyphen(-). Words with user-defined delimiters are only separated at the end of a line at the point where a user-defined delimiter has been inserted, irrespective of whether the automatic hyphenation is activated or deactivated. - + Spaces Specifies whether to represent every space in the text with a dot. - + Non-breaking spaces Specifies that non-breaking spaces are shown as gray boxes. Non-breaking spaces are not broken at the end of a line and are entered with the Command+Shift+Spacebar Ctrl+Shift+Spacebar shortcut keys. - + Tabs Specifies that tab stops are displayed as small arrows. - + Breaks Displays all line breaks inserted with the Shift+Enter shortcut. These breaks create a new line, but do not start a new paragraph. - + Hidden textUFI: new, although name of control is re-used, see spec "Hidden Text in Writer" Displays text that uses the character format "hidden", when View - Non-printing Characters is enabled. - - + + Fields: Hidden text (not for HTML documents)UFI: this is the old "Hidden text" control renamed Displays text that is hidden by Conditional Text or Hidden Text fields. - - + + Fields: Hidden paragraphs (not for HTML documents) If you have inserted text using the Hidden Paragraph field, specifies whether to display the hidden paragraph. This option has the same function as the menu commands View - Hidden Paragraphs View - Hidden Paragraphs available in open text documents. Direct cursor (not for HTML documents) Defines all the properties of the direct cursor. - + Direct cursor Activates the direct cursor. You can also activate this function by clicking the Direct Cursor On/Off Direct Cursor On/Off icon in a text document. Insert (not for HTML document) Defines the insert options for the direct cursor. If you click at any position in your document, a new paragraph can be written or inserted exactly at this position. The properties of this paragraph depend on the selected option. You can select from the following options: - + Paragraph alignment Sets the paragraph alignment when the direct cursor is used. Depending on where the mouse is clicked, the paragraph is formatted left aligned, centered or right aligned. The cursor before the mouse-click shows, by means of a triangle, which alignment is set. - + Left paragraph margin When the direct cursor is used, the left paragraph indent is set at the horizontal position where you click the direct cursor. The paragraph is left aligned. - + Tabs When the direct cursor is used, as many tabs as necessary are added in the new paragraph until the clicked position is reached. - + Tabs and Spaces When the Direct Cursor is used, a corresponding number of tabs and spaces are inserted in the new paragraph as necessary until the clicked position is reached. All insert options refer only to the current paragraph generated with the Direct Cursor. - + Cursor in protected areas - Enabled Specifies that you can set the cursor in a protected area, but cannot make any changes. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040700.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040700.xhp index bb06c81c69..e76dd19440 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040700.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040700.xhp @@ -52,32 +52,32 @@ Text display Defines the settings for displaying recorded changes. Select the type of change and the corresponding display attribute and color. The preview field shows the effect of the selected display options. - + Insertions / Attributes Specifies how changes in the document are displayed when text is inserted. - + Deletions / Attributes Specifies how changes in the document are displayed when text is deleted. If you record text deletions, the text is displayed with the selected attribute (for example, strikethrough) and is not deleted. - + Changed attributes / Attributes Defines how changes to text attributes are displayed in the document. These changes affect attributes such as bold, italic or underline. - - - + + + Color You can also choose a color to display each type of recorded change. When you choose the condition "By author" in the list, the color is automatically determined by $[officename], then modified to match to the author of each change. Lines changed To indicate which lines of the text have been changed, you can define a mark that appears in the left or right page margin. - + Mark Defines if and where changed lines in the document are marked. You can set the markings so that they always appear on the left or right page margin, or on the outer or inner margin. - + Color Specifies the color for highlighting the changed lines in the text. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040900.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040900.xhp index 9725b80aac..314a008931 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040900.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040900.xhp @@ -66,14 +66,14 @@
Update Update links when loading - -Always + +Always Always updates links while loading a document. - -On request + +On request Updates links only on request while loading a document. - -Never + +Never Links are never updated while loading a document.
Automatically @@ -81,7 +81,7 @@ To update fields manuallyi81240 -Fields +Fields The contents of all fields are updated automatically whenever the screen contents are displayed as new. Even with this box unchecked, some fields are updated each time a special condition takes place. The following table lists the fields that are updated without regard to this checkbox. @@ -149,12 +149,12 @@
-Charts +Charts Specifies whether to automatically update charts. Whenever a Writer table cell value changes and the cursor leaves that cell, the chart that displays the cell value is updated automatically.see message "[sw-features] changed/CWS chart2mst3 : Automatic update for charts in Writer" by Thomas Lange Settings -Measurement unit +Measurement unit Specifies the unit of measurement for text documents. -Tab stops +Tab stops Specifies the spacing between the individual tab stops. The horizontal ruler displays the selected spacing. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01041000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01041000.xhp index e4bd7d8df6..83f9efcb63 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01041000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01041000.xhp @@ -62,21 +62,21 @@ Some of the settings defined here are only valid for the current document and must be defined separately for each document.
- -UFI: added bookmarks due to bug #i24216#UFI: this one called also from Impress options + +UFI: added bookmarks due to bug #i24216#UFI: this one called also from Impress options Use printer metrics for document formatting Specifies that printer metrics are applied for printing and also for formatting the display on the screen. If this box is not checked, a printer independent layout will be used for screen display and printing. If you set this option for the current document and then save the document, for example, in an older binary format, this option will not be saved. If you later open the file from the older format, this option will be set by default.
- + Add spacing between paragraphs and tables (in current document) In $[officename] Writer, paragraph spacing is defined differently than in MS Word documents. If you have defined spacing between two paragraphs or tables, spacing is also added in the corresponding MS Word documents. Specifies whether to add MS Word-compatible spacing between paragraphs and tables in $[officename] Writer text documents. - + Add paragraph and table spacing at tops of pages (in current document) Specifies whether paragraph spacing at the top of a page will also be effective at the beginning of a page or column if the paragraph is positioned on the first page of the document. The same applies for a page break. If you import an MS Word document, the spaces are automatically added during the conversion. - + Use StarOffice 6.0/7 tab stop formattingUFI: spec "Tab Stop Compatibility" Specifies how to align text at tab stops beyond the right margin, how to handle decimal tab stops, and how to handle tab stops close to a line break. If this check box is not selected, tab stops are handled in the same way as in other Office applications. In text documents created by your current version of Writer, the new tab stop handling is used by default. In text documents created by Writer versions prior to StarOffice 8 or OpenOffice.org 2.0, the old tab stop handling is applied. @@ -104,7 +104,7 @@ Expand word space on lines with manual line breaks in justified paragraphsUFI: i79041 If enabled, Writer adds spacing between words, in lines that end with Shift+Enter in justified paragraphs. If disabled, spacing between words will not be expanded to justify the lines. This setting is on by default for .odt text documents. It will be saved and loaded with the document in the .odt text document format. This setting cannot be saved in old .sxw text documents, so this setting is off for .sxw text documents. - + Use as Default Click to use the current settings on this tab page as the default for further sessions with %PRODUCTNAME. The factory defaults are set as follows. Enabled are the following options, while all other options are disabled: diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01041100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01041100.xhp index c1bf1decf4..7ecdcdcb06 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01041100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01041100.xhp @@ -69,38 +69,38 @@ Caption Defines the options to be applied to the selected object type. These options are identical to those in the Insert - Caption menu, which is available when an object is selected. Below the settings is a preview of the object category, together with numbering type. - + Category Specifies the category of the selected object.UFI: copied text from optionen/01040801 - + Numbering Specifies the type of numbering required. - + - + Separator Defines the character to be displayed after the number of the heading or chapter level. - + Position Determines the position of the caption with respect to the object. Numbering captions by chapter - + Level Specifies the headings or chapter levels where you want the numbering to start. Defines the character to be displayed after the number of the heading or chapter level. Category and frame format - + Character style Specifies the character style. - + - + Apply border and shadow Applies the border and shadow of the object to the caption frame.
diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01050000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01050000.xhp index 8e820974a4..95944cd9c8 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01050000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01050000.xhp @@ -43,7 +43,7 @@ - + %PRODUCTNAME Writer/Web Options Defines the basic settings for $[officename] documents in HTML format. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01050100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01050100.xhp index 2df0f921c4..9af0c57684 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01050100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01050100.xhp @@ -55,7 +55,7 @@
Grid - + Snap to grid
Specifies whether to move frames, drawing elements, and controls only between grid points. To change the status of the snap grip only for the current action, drag an object while holding down the Control key @@ -63,7 +63,7 @@
- + Visible grid Specifies whether to display the grid. @@ -76,25 +76,25 @@
Resolution - + Horizontal Defines the unit of measure for the spacing between grid points on the X-axis. - + Vertical Defines the grid points spacing in the desired unit of measurement on the Y-axis. Subdivision - + Horizontal Specify the number of intermediate points between grid points on the X-axis.UFI: see #i39831# - + Vertical Specify the number of intermediate points between grid points on the Y-axis. - + Synchronize axes Specifies whether to change the current grid settings symmetrically. The resolution and subdivision for the X and Y axes remain the same. There are additional commands on the context menu of a page: diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060100.xhp index 7030cefe86..1cf9b09d32 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060100.xhp @@ -79,101 +79,101 @@ Visual aids Specifies which lines are displayed. - + Grid lines Specifies whether to display grid lines between the cells.For printing, choose Format - Page - Sheet and mark the Grid check box. - + Color Specifies a color for the grid lines in the current document. To see the grid line color that was saved with the document, go to %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Appearance, under Scheme find the entry Spreadsheet - Grid lines and set the color to "Automatic". - + Page breaks Specifies whether to view the page breaks within a defined print area. - + Guides while moving Specifies whether to view guides when moving drawings, frames, graphics and other objects. These guides help you align objects. - + Simple handles Specifies whether to display the handles (the eight points on a selection box) as simple squares without 3D effect. - + Large handles Specifies that larger than normal handles (the eight points on a selection box) are displayed. Display Select various options for the screen display. - + Formulas Specifies whether to show formulas instead of results in the cells. - + Zero values Specifies whether to show numbers with the value of 0. - + Comment indicator Specifies that a small rectangle in the top right corner of the cell indicates that a comment exists. The comment will be shown only when you enable tips under %PRODUCTNAME - General in the Options dialog box. To display a comment permanently, select the Show comment command from the cell's context menu. You can type and edit comments with the Insert - Comment command. Comments that are permanently displayed can be edited by clicking the comment box. Click the Navigator and under the Comments entry you can view all comments in the current document. By double clicking a comment in Navigator, the cursor will jump to the corresponding cell containing the comment. - + Value highlighting Mark the Value highlighting box to show the cell contents in different colors, depending on type. Text cells are formatted in black, formulas in green, and number cells in blue, no matter how their display is formatted. When this command is active, any colors assigned in the document will not be displayed until the function is deactivated. - + Anchor Specifies whether the anchor icon is displayed when an inserted object, such as a graphic, is selected. - + Text overflow If a cell contains text that is wider than the width of the cell, the text is displayed over empty neighboring cells in the same row. If there is no empty neighboring cell, a small triangle at the cell border indicates that the text continues.UFI: sc.features "Alignment of text that is larger than a cell" - + Show references in color Specifies that each reference is highlighted in color in the formula. The cell range is also enclosed by a colored border as soon as the cell containing the reference is selected for editing. Objects Defines whether to display or hide objects for up to three object groups.removed "placeholder" text, see i81634 - + Objects/Graphics Defines if objects and graphics are shown or hidden. - + Charts Defines if charts in your document are shown or hidden. - + Drawing objects Defines if drawing objects in your document are shown or hidden. Zoom - + Synchronize sheets If checked, all sheets are shown with the same zoom factor. If not checked, each sheet can have its own zoom factor. Window Specifies whether some Help elements will or will not appear in the table. - + Column/Row headers Specifies whether to display row and column headers. - + Horizontal scrollbar Specifies whether to display a horizontal scrollbar at the bottom of the document window. Note that there is a slider between the horizontal scrollbar and the sheet tabs that may be set to one end. - + Vertical scrollbar Specifies whether to display a vertical scrollbar at the right of the document window. - + Sheet tabs Specifies whether to display the sheet tabs at the bottom of the spreadsheet document. If this box is not checked, you will only be able to switch between the sheets through the Navigator Navigator. Note that there is a slider between the horizontal scrollbar and the sheet tabs that may be set to one end. - + Outline symbols If you have defined an outline diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060300.xhp index cc9820e737..15921b8efa 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060300.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060300.xhp @@ -61,31 +61,31 @@
Metrics -Measurement unit +Measurement unit Defines the unit of measure in spreadsheets. -Tab stops +Tab stops Defines the tab stops distance. Input settings - -Press Enter to move selection + +Press Enter to move selection Determines the direction that the cursor in the spreadsheet will move after you press the Enter key. - + see i53756Press Enter to switch to edit mode Allows you to immediately edit the selected cell after pressing the Enter key. -Expand formatting +Expand formatting Specifies whether to automatically apply the formatting attributes of the selected cell to the empty adjacent cells. If, for example, the contents of the selected cell have the bold attribute, this bold attribute will also apply to adjacent cells. Cells that already have a special format will not be modified by this function. You can see the range in question by pressing the Command Ctrl + * (multiplication sign on the number pad) shortcut. This format also applies to all new values inserted within this range. The normal default settings apply to cells outside this range. -Expand references when new columns/rows are inserted +Expand references when new columns/rows are inserted Specifies whether to expand references when inserting columns or rows adjacent to the reference range. This is only possible if the reference range, where the column or row is inserted, originally spanned at least two cells in the desired direction. Example: If the range A1:B1 is referenced in a formula and you insert a new column after column B, the reference is expanded to A1:C1. If the range A1:B1 is referenced and a new row is inserted under row 1, the reference is not expanded, since there is only a single cell in the vertical direction. If you insert rows or columns in the middle of a reference area, the reference is always expanded. -Highlight selection in column/row headings +Highlight selection in column/row headings Specifies whether to highlight column and row headers in the selected columns or rows. -Use printer metrics for text formatting +Use printer metrics for text formatting Specifies that printer metrics are applied for printing and also for formatting the display on the screen. If this box is not checked, a printer independent layout will be used for screen display and printing. -Show overwrite warning when pasting data +Show overwrite warning when pasting data Specifies that, when you paste cells from the clipboard to a cell range that is not empty, a warning appears. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060400.xhp index e0f5cd87f6..49d9d7c114 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060400.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060400.xhp @@ -57,22 +57,22 @@ - + Lists Displays all the available lists. These lists can be selected for editing. - + Entries Displays the content of the currently selected list. This content can be edited. - + Copy list from Defines the spreadsheet and the cells to copy, in order to include them in the Lists box. The currently selected range in the spreadsheet is the default. - + Copy Copies the contents of the cells in the Copy list from box. If you select a reference to related rows and columns, the Copy List dialog appears after clicking the button. You can use this dialog to define if the reference is converted to sort lists by row or by column. - + New/Discard Enters the contents of a new list into the Entries box. This button will change from New to Discard, which enables you to delete the new list. - + Add/Modify Adds a new list into the Lists box. If you would like to edit this list in the Entries box, this button will change from Add to Modify, which enables you to include the newly modified list. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060401.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060401.xhp index dc57b206c9..beba818ec8 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060401.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060401.xhp @@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ sort lists; copying to in Calc - + Copy List Allows you to copy marked cells to a sort list.
@@ -55,10 +55,10 @@
List from Choose between the options Rows and Columns. Cells without text will be ignored when copying. - + Rows Select the Rows option to summarize the contents of the selected rows in a list. - + Columns Select the Columns option to summarize the contents of the selected columns in a list. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060500.xhp index 7d63d5c6cf..4a463092ce 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060500.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060500.xhp @@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ Iterative references In this section you can delimit the number of approximation steps carried out during iterative calculations. In addition, you can specify the degree of precision of the answer. - + Iterations Specifies whether formulas with iterative references (formulas that are continuously repeated until the problem is solved) are calculated after a specific number of repetitions. If the Iterations box is not marked, an iterative reference in the table will cause an error message. @@ -131,45 +131,45 @@ - + Steps Sets the maximum number of iteration steps. - + Minimum Change Specifies the difference between two consecutive iteration step results. If the result of the iteration is lower than the minimum change value, then the iteration will stop. Date Select the start date for the internal conversion from days to numbers. - + 12/30/1899 (default) Sets 12/30/1899 as day zero. - + 01/01/1900 (StarCalc 1.0) Sets 1/1/1900 as day zero. Use this setting for StarCalc 1.0 spreadsheets containing date entries. - + 01/01/1904 Sets 1/1/1904 as day zero. Use this setting for spreadsheets that are imported in a foreign format. - + Case sensitive Specifies whether to distinguish between upper and lower case in texts when comparing cell contents. Example: Type the text 'Test' in cell A1; and the text 'test' in B1. Then type the formula "=A1=B1" in cell C1. If the Case sensitive box is marked, FALSE will appear in the cell; otherwise, TRUE will appear in the cell. The EXACT text function is always case-sensitive, independent of the settings in this dialog. - + Decimal places Defines the number of decimals to be displayed for numbers with the Standard number format. The numbers are displayed as rounded numbers, but are not saved as rounded numbers. - + Precision as shown Specifies whether to make calculations using the rounded values displayed in the sheet. Charts will be shown with the displayed values. If the Precision as shown option is not marked, the displayed numbers are rounded, but they are calculated internally using the non-rounded number. - + Search criteria = and <> must apply to whole cells Specifies that the search criteria you set for the Calc database functions must match the whole cell exactly. When the Search criteria = and <> must apply to whole cells box is marked, $[officename] Calc behaves exactly as MS Excel when searching cells in the database functions. @@ -217,12 +217,12 @@ If Search criteria = and <> must apply to whole cells is not enabled, the "win" search pattern acts like ".*win.*". The search pattern can be at any position within the cell when searching with the Calc database functions. - + Enable regular expressions in formulas Specifies that regular expressions are enabled when searching and also for character string comparisons. This relates to the database functions, and to VLOOKUP, HLOOKUP and SEARCH. Sorry, no more switches allowed inside AVIS tags - + Automatically find column and row labels Specifies that you can use the text in any cell as a label for the column below the text or the row to the right of the text. The text must consist of at least one word and must not contain any operators. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060600.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060600.xhp index 576ce2dd1e..2909653ac9 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060600.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060600.xhp @@ -54,16 +54,16 @@ Color Definition for Changes Defines colors for recorded changes. If you select the "By author" entry, $[officename] will automatically set the color depending on the author who undertook the changes. - + Changes Specifies the color for changes of cell contents. - + Deletions Specifies the color to highlight deletions in a document. - + Insertions Specifies the color to highlight insertions in a document. - + Moved entries Specifies the color to highlight moved cell contents. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060700.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060700.xhp index b1e7c63ead..f8851efe83 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060700.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060700.xhp @@ -52,10 +52,10 @@ Pages -Suppress output of empty pages +Suppress output of empty pages Specifies that empty pages that have no cell contents or draw objects are not printed. Cell attributes such as borders or background colors are not considered cell contents. Empty pages are not counted for page numbering. Sheets -Print only selected sheets +Print only selected sheets Specifies that only contents from selected sheets are printed, even if you specify a wider range in the File - Print dialog or in the Format - Print Ranges dialog. Contents from sheets that are not selected will not be printed. To select multiple sheets, click on the sheet names on the bottom margin of the workspace while keeping the Ctrl key pressed. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01070100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01070100.xhp index f3543ad40d..71d507b0d9 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01070100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01070100.xhp @@ -54,11 +54,11 @@ View Specifies the available display modes. By selecting an alternative display, you can speed up the screen display while editing your presentation. removed 4 options, see i81634Display -Rulers visible +Rulers visible Specifies whether to display the rulers at the top and to the left of the work area. -Guides when moving +Guides when moving Specifies whether to display guides when moving an object. %PRODUCTNAME creates dotted guides that extend beyond the box containing the selected object and which cover the entire work area, helping you position the object. @@ -66,9 +66,9 @@ You also can use this function through the icon icon icon with the same name in the Options bar if a presentation or a drawing document is opened. -All control points in Bézier editor +All control points in Bézier editor Displays the control points of all Bézier points if you have previously selected a Bézier curve. If the All control points in Bézier editor option is not marked, only the control points of the selected Bézier points will be visible. -Contour of each individual object +Contour of each individual object %PRODUCTNAME displays the contour line of each individual object when moving this object. The Contour of each individual object option enables you to see if single objects conflict with other objects in the target position. If you do not mark the Contour of each individual object option, %PRODUCTNAME only displays a square contour that includes all selected objects. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01070300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01070300.xhp index 3878013072..e56e3befbb 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01070300.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01070300.xhp @@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ Snap - + To snap lines Snaps the edge of a dragged object to the nearest snap line when you release the mouse. @@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ Snap to Guides icon, which is available in the Options bar in a presentation or drawing document. - + To the page margins Specifies whether to align the contour of the graphic object to the nearest page margin. @@ -79,7 +79,7 @@ Snap to Page Margins icon in the Options bar. - + To object frame Specifies whether to align the contour of the graphic object to the border of the nearest graphic object. @@ -91,7 +91,7 @@ Snap to Object Border icon in the Options bar. - + To object points Specifies whether to align the contour of the graphic object to the points of the nearest graphic object. @@ -101,26 +101,26 @@ In a presentation or drawing document, this function can also be accessed with the Snap to Object Points Snap to Object Points Snap to Object Points icon in the Options bar. - + Snap range Defines the snap distance between the mouse pointer and the object contour. $[officename] Impress snaps to a snap point if the mouse pointer is nearer than the distance selected in the Snap range control. Snap position - + When creating or moving objects Specifies that graphic objects are restricted vertically, horizontally or diagonally (45°) when creating or moving them. You can temporarily deactivate this setting by pressing the Shift key. - + Extend edges Specifies that a square is created based on the longer side of a rectangle when the Shift key is pressed before you release the mouse button. This also applies to an ellipse (a circle will be created based on the longest diameter of the ellipse). When the Extend edges box is not marked, a square or a circle will be created based on the shorter side or diameter. - - + + When rotating Specifies that graphic objects can only be rotated within the rotation angle that you selected in the When rotating control. If you want to rotate an object outside the defined angle, press the Shift key when rotating. Release the key when the desired rotation angle is reached. - + Point reduction Defines the angle for point reduction. When working with polygons, you might find it useful to reduce their editing points. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01070400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01070400.xhp index 0f8e8040a0..2a326f9a6c 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01070400.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01070400.xhp @@ -65,43 +65,43 @@ removed contents-to-print section for impress, i85723Print Defines additional elements to be printed on the page margin. -Page name +Page name Specifies whether to print the page name of a document. -Date +Date Specifies whether to print the current date. -Time +Time Specifies wither to print the current time. -Hidden pages +Hidden pages Specifies whether to print the pages that are currently hidden from the presentation. Quality See also . -Default +Default Specifies that you want to print in original colors. -Grayscale +Grayscale Specifies that you want to print colors as grayscale. -Black & white +Black & white Specifies that you want to print the document in black and white. Page options Define additional options for printing the pages. -Default +Default Specifies that you do not want to further scale pages when printing. -Fit to page +Fit to page
Specifies whether to scale down objects that are beyond the margins of the current printer, so that they fit on the paper in the printer.
-Tile pages +Tile pages Specifies that pages are to be printed in tiled format. If the pages or slides are smaller than the paper, several pages or slides will be printed on one page of paper. -Brochure +Brochure Select the Brochure option to print the document in brochure format. You can also decide if you want to print the front, the back or both sides of the brochure. -Front +Front Select Front to print the front of a brochure. -Back +Back Select Back to print the back of a brochure. -Paper tray from printer settings +Paper tray from printer settings Determines that the paper tray to be used is the one defined in the printer setup. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01070500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01070500.xhp index 35ca157bf2..b0b9299598 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01070500.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01070500.xhp @@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ Text objects - + Allow quick editing @@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ In a presentation or drawing document, you can also activate the text editing mode through the Allow Quick Editing icon in the Option bar. - + Only text area selectable @@ -82,40 +82,40 @@ In a presentation or drawing document, you can also activate this mode through the Select Text Area Only icon in the Option bar. New document (only in presentations) - + Start with Wizard Specifies whether to activate the Wizard when opening a presentation with File - New - Presentation. Settings - + Use background cache Specifies whether to use the cache for displaying objects on the master page. This speeds up the display. Unmark the Use background cache option if you want to display changing contents on the master page. - + Copy when moving Specifies whether to automatically create a copy when you move an object while holding down the Ctrl key. The same will apply for rotating and resizing the object. The original object will remain in its current position and size. - + Objects always moveable Specifies that you want to move an object with the Rotate tool enabled. If Object always moveable is not marked, the Rotate tool can only be used to rotate an object. - + Do not distort objects in curve (only in drawings) Maintains relative alignment of Bézier points and 2D drawing objects to each other when you distort the object. - + Unit of measurement Determines the Unit of measurement for presentations. - + Tab stops Defines the spacing between tab stops. Start presentation (only in presentations) - + Always with current page Specifies that you always want a presentation to start with the current slide. Unmark Always with current page to always start a presentation with the first page. Scale (only in drawings) - + Drawing scale Determines the drawing scale on the rulers. Compatibility (document specific settings) The settings in this area are valid for the current document only. - + Add spacing between paragraphs in the current document Specifies that $[officename] Impress calculates the paragraph spacing exactly like Microsoft PowerPoint. Microsoft PowerPoint adds the bottom spacing of a paragraph to the top spacing of the next paragraph to calculate the total spacing between both paragraphs. $[officename] Impress utilizes only the larger of the two spacings. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01090100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01090100.xhp index eee7100256..6c59e62fa2 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01090100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01090100.xhp @@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ scaling; printing in $[officename] Math fitting to pages;print settings in Math mw inserted "fitting..." - + Settings Defines formula settings that will be valid for all documents. @@ -63,22 +63,22 @@ Print options -Title row +Title row Specifies whether you want the name of the document to be included in the printout. -Formula text +Formula text Specifies whether to include the contents of the Commands window at the bottom of the printout. -Border +Border Applies a thin border to the formula area in the printout.Title row and Formula text are only set down by a frame if the corresponding check box is active. Print format -Original size +Original size Prints the formula without adjusting the current font size. It is possible that with large formulas a part of the command text is cut off. -Fit to size +Fit to size Adjusts the formula to the page format used in the printout. The real size will be determined by the used paper format. - -Scaling + +Scaling Reduces or enlarges the size of the printed formula by a specified enlargement factor. Type the desired enlargement factor directly in the Scaling control, or set the value using the arrow buttons. Other options -Ignore ~ and ' at the and of the line +Ignore ~ and ' at the and of the line Specifies that these space wildcards will be removed if they are at the end of a line. In earlier versions of $[officename], adding such characters at the end of a line prevented the right edge of the formula from being cut off during printing. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01110100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01110100.xhp index 36b2810886..3a1692ef31 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01110100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01110100.xhp @@ -53,13 +53,13 @@
- -Chart colors + +Chart colors Displays all the colors available for the data series. Select a data series to change its color. Select the desired color from the adjacent color table. Color table This table is used as a means of replacing the chart colors for the selected data rows. For example, if you selected data row 6 and then click on the color green 8, the old color of the data row is replaced by green 8. The name of the selected color is shown below the color table. - -Default + +Default Restores the color settings that were defined when the program was installed. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01140000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01140000.xhp index 7b8cb30ebc..b58b91cf0d 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01140000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01140000.xhp @@ -61,17 +61,17 @@ Language of -User interface +User interface Select the language used for the user interface, for example menus, dialogs, help files. You must have installed at least one additional language pack or a multi-language version of %PRODUCTNAME. - -Locale setting + +Locale setting Specifies the locale setting of the country setting. This influences settings for numbering, currency and units of measure. A change in this field is immediately applicable. However, some formats that were formatted by default change only if the document is newly loaded. -Decimal separator key - Same as locale setting +Decimal separator key - Same as locale setting Specifies to use the decimal separator key that is set in your system when you press the respective key on the number pad. If this checkbox is activated, the character shown after "Same as locale setting" is inserted when you press the key on the number pad. If this checkbox is not activated, the character that your keyboard driver software provides is inserted. - -Default currency + +Default currency Specifies the default currency that is used for the currency format and the currency fields. If you change the locale setting, the default currency changes automatically. The default entry applies to the currency format that is assigned to the selected locale setting. A change in Default currency field will be transmitted to all open documents and will lead to corresponding changes in the dialogs and icons that control the currency format in these documents. @@ -82,25 +82,25 @@ The spellcheck for the selected language only functions when you have installed the corresponding language module. - -Western + +Western Specifies the language used for the spellcheck function in western alphabets. - -Asian + +Asian Specifies the language used for the spellcheck function in Asian alphabets. - -CTL + +CTL Specifies the language for the complex text layout spellcheck. - -For the current document only + +For the current document only Specifies that the settings for default languages are valid only for the current document. Enhanced language support - -Enabled for Asian languages + +Enabled for Asian languages Activates Asian languages support. You can now modify the corresponding Asian language settings in %PRODUCTNAME. If you want to write in Chinese, Japanese or Korean, you can activate the support for these languages in the user interface. - -Enabled for complex text layout (CTL) + +Enabled for complex text layout (CTL) Activates complex text layout support. You can now modify the settings corresponding to complex text layout in %PRODUCTNAME. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01150100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01150100.xhp index f5f33089b7..137ec97383 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01150100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01150100.xhp @@ -57,35 +57,35 @@ Kerning Defines the default settings for kerning between individual characters. - + Western characters only Specifies that kerning is only applied to western text. - + Western text and Asian punctuation Specifies that kerning is applied to both western text and Asian punctuation. Character spacing Defines the default settings for character spacing in Asian texts, cells, and drawing objects. - + No compression Specifies that no compression at all will occur. - + Compress only punctuation Specifies that only the punctuation is compressed. - + Compress punctuation and Japanese Kana Specifies that punctuation and Japanese Kana are compressed. First and last characters Defines the default settings for 'first' and 'last' characters. In the dialog that appears when you choose Format -Asian Typography, you can specify whether the list of forbidden characters applies to those at the beginning or end of a line in a paragraph. - + Language Specifies the language for which you want to define first and last characters. - + Default When you mark Default, the following two text boxes are filled with the default characters for the selected language: - + Not at start of line: Specifies the characters that should not appear alone at the beginning of a line. If a character typed here is positioned at the beginning of a line after a line break, it is automatically moved to the end of the previous line. For example, an exclamation point at the end of a sentence never appears at the start of a line if it is part of the Not at start of line list. - + Not at end of line: Specifies the characters that should not appear alone at the end of a line. If a character typed here is positioned at the end of a line due to a line break, it is automatically moved to the beginning of the next line. For example, a currency symbol that appears in front of an amount never appears at the end of a line if it is part of the Not at end of line list. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01150200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01150200.xhp index 9e5bc244c5..44fe5f6903 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01150200.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01150200.xhp @@ -52,9 +52,9 @@
- Treat as equal + Treat as equal Specifies the options to be treated as equal in a search. - Ignore + Ignore Specifies the characters to be ignored.
diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01150300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01150300.xhp index 5257ba00fd..ce90a6039b 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01150300.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01150300.xhp @@ -58,8 +58,8 @@ dedr: reviewed Sequence checking In languages such as Thai, rules specify that certain characters are not allowed next to other characters. If Sequence Input Checking (SIC) is enabled, %PRODUCTNAME will not allow a character next to another if this is forbidden by a rule. - - + + Use sequence checking Enables sequence input checking for languages such as Thai. hid/svx_CheckBox_RID_SVXPAGE_OPTIONS_CTL_CB_RESTRICTEDUFI: must wait for next CWS to be converted to a Help ID @@ -67,14 +67,14 @@ dedr: reviewed Prevents the use as well as the printing of illegal character combinations.UFI: see #103780# Cursor control Select the type of text cursor movement and text selection for mixed text (right-to-left mixed with left-to-right text direction). - + Logical Pressing the Right Arrow key moves the text cursor toward the end of the current text. Pressing the Left Arrow key moves the text cursor toward the beginning of the current text. - + Visual Pressing the Right Arrow key moves the text cursor in the right-hand direction. Pressing the Left Arrow key moves the text cursor in the left-hand direction. General options - + Numerals (in text only) Selects the type of numerals used within text, text in objects, fields, and controls, in all %PRODUCTNAME modules. Only cell contents of %PRODUCTNAME Calc are not affected.UFI: see http://www.webster-dictionary.org/definition/Indian%20numerals diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01160100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01160100.xhp index 1b2be3d82f..ec0bacb42c 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01160100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01160100.xhp @@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ connections to data sources (Base) data sources; connection settings (Base) - + Connections Defines how the connections to data sources are pooled. @@ -59,20 +59,20 @@ Connection Pool - - + + Connection pooling enabled Specifies whether the chosen connections are pooled. Drivers known in $[officename] Displays a list of defined drivers and connection data. Current driver The currently selected driver is displayed below the list. - - + + Enable pooling for this driver Select a driver from the list and mark the Enable pooling for this driver checkbox in order to pool its connection. - - + + Timeout (seconds) Defines the time in seconds after which a pooled connection is freed. The time can be anywhere between 30 and 600 seconds. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01160200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01160200.xhp index 90755e5285..8c52681377 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01160200.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01160200.xhp @@ -55,13 +55,13 @@ Registered Databases Lists the registered name and database file of all registered databases. Double-click an entry to edit. - + New Opens the Database Link dialog to create a new entry. - + Delete Removes the selected entry from the list. - + Edit Opens the Database Link dialog to edit the selected entry. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01160201.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01160201.xhp index 0e62397bb1..8a9c0d48f6 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01160201.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01160201.xhp @@ -47,10 +47,10 @@ Creates or edits an entry in the Databases tab page. Database file Enter the path and the file name of the database file. The name of the file must end with the *.odb extension. - + Browse Opens a file dialog where you can select the database file. - + Registered name Enter a name for the database. %PRODUCTNAME uses this name to access the database. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/improvement.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/improvement.xhp index 2accbf477a..bf59248123 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/improvement.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/improvement.xhp @@ -66,9 +66,9 @@ At any time, you can enable or disable the recording of user interaction data and the sending of these data. Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Improvement Program. Click the Info icon to browse to a web page with more information. - + Click Yes, I am willing to participate … to enable the automatic feedback. - + Click No, I do not wish to participate to disable the automatic feedback. Tracked data The following data will be recorded and sent: @@ -114,7 +114,7 @@ Show Data - + Click the button to show the currently collected data. This data will be sent next time, plus any data that gets collected until you end the current session. \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/java.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/java.xhp index 3cf438966a..3bf4947018 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/java.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/java.xhp @@ -53,16 +53,16 @@ Java options - -Use a Java runtime environment + +Use a Java runtime environment Allows you to run Java applications in %PRODUCTNAME. When a Java application attempts to access your hard drive, a prompt opens.UFI: moved this para here from Security tab page Java runtime environments (JRE) already installed: Select the JRE that you want to use. On some systems, you must wait a minute until the list gets populated. On some systems, you must restart %PRODUCTNAME to use your changed setting. The path to the JRE is displayed beneath the list box. -Add +Add Add a path to the root folder of a JRE on your computer. The path is set in the following dialog.UFI: #i38927# -Parameters +Parameters Opens the Java Start Parameters dialog. -Class Path +Class Path Opens the Class Path dialog. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/javaclasspath.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/javaclasspath.xhp index 91e8afd8b5..d4c65594c4 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/javaclasspath.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/javaclasspath.xhp @@ -48,18 +48,18 @@
- - + + Assigned folders and archives Specifies the location of Java classes or Java class libraries. The new classpath becomes valid after you restart %PRODUCTNAME.UFI: moved these paras here from the Security tab page Java classes that are accessed through the classpath do not undergo a security check.UFI: moved these paras here from the Security tab page - + Add Archive Select an archive file in jar or zip format and add the file to the class path. - + Add Folder Select a folder and add the folder to the class path. - + Remove Select an archive or a folder in the list and click Remove to remove the object from the class path. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/javaparameters.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/javaparameters.xhp index b5138b721a..80f0891833 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/javaparameters.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/javaparameters.xhp @@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ dedr: reviewed
- + Java Start parameter Enter a start parameter for a JRE as you would on a command line. Click Assign to add the parameter to the list of available start parameters. Do not use escape characters or quotes in path names. @@ -60,13 +60,13 @@ dedr: reviewed -Xdebug -Xrunjdwp:transport=dt_socket,server=y,address=8000 These changes take effect after you restart %PRODUCTNAME. - + Assigned start parameters Lists the assigned JRE start parameters. To remove a start parameter, select the parameter, and then click Remove. - + Assign Adds the current JRE start parameter to the list. - + Remove Deletes the selected JRE start parameter. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/macrosecurity_sl.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/macrosecurity_sl.xhp index 79dcf0c06b..b7322afeee 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/macrosecurity_sl.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/macrosecurity_sl.xhp @@ -48,19 +48,19 @@ Security Level Select the macro security level from one of four options. The options differ according to the security level. Macros that are allowed to run on a higher security level are also allowed to run in all lower levels. - + Very high Only macros from trusted file locations are allowed to run. All other macros, regardless of whether they are signed or not, are disabled.UFI: for each option, the first para is copied from the string table. Trusted file locations can be set on the Trusted Sources tab page. Any macro from a trusted file location is allowed to run. - + High Only signed macros from trusted sources are allowed to run. Unsigned macros are disabled. Trusted sources can be set on the Trusted Sources tab page. Only signed macros from a trusted source are allowed to run. In addition, any macro from a trusted file location is allowed to run. - + Medium Confirmation required before executing macros from unknown sources. Trusted sources can be set on the Trusted Sources tab page. Signed macros from a trusted source are allowed to run. In addition, any macro from a trusted file location is allowed to run. All other macros require your confirmation. - + Low (not recommended) All macros will be executed without confirmation. Use this setting only if you are certain that all documents that will be opened are safe. A macro can be set to auto-start, and it can perform potentially damaging actions, as for example delete or rename files. This setting is not recommended when you open documents from other authors. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/macrosecurity_ts.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/macrosecurity_ts.xhp index 247a2d92b4..257bc6803e 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/macrosecurity_ts.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/macrosecurity_ts.xhp @@ -48,15 +48,15 @@ Specifies the macro security settings for trusted certificates and trusted file locations. Trusted certificates Lists the trusted certificates. -View +View Opens the View Certificate dialog for the selected certificate. -Remove +Remove Removes the selected certificate from the list of trusted certificates. -Trusted file locations +Trusted file locations Document macros are only executed if they have been opened from one of the following locations. -Add +Add Opens a folder selection dialog. Select a folder from which all macros are allowed to execute. -Remove +Remove Removes the selected folder from the list of trusted file locations. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/mailmerge.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/mailmerge.xhp index e87352fb2b..c302eefd9c 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/mailmerge.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/mailmerge.xhp @@ -52,34 +52,34 @@ User information Enter the user information to use when you send e-mail. - + Your name Enter your name. - + E-mail address Enter your e-mail address for replies. - + Send replies to different e-mail address Uses the e-mail address that you enter in the Reply address text box as the reply-to e-mail address. - + Reply address Enter the address to use for e-mail replies. Outgoing server (SMTP) settings Specify the server settings for outgoing e-mails. - + Server name Enter the SMTP server name. - + Port Enter the SMTP port. - - + + Use secure connection When available, uses a secure connection to send e-mails. - + Server Authentication Opens the Server Authentication dialog where you can specify the server authentication settings for secure e-mail. - + Test Settings Opens the Test Account Settings dialog to test the current settings. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/online_update.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/online_update.xhp index 313ec12501..a26b5c4997 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/online_update.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/online_update.xhp @@ -55,22 +55,22 @@
- + Check for updates automatically Mark to check for online updates periodically, then select the time interval how often %PRODUCTNAME will check for online updates. %PRODUCTNAME will check once a day, week, or month, as soon as a working Internet connection is detected. If you connect to the Internet by a proxy server, set the proxy on %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Internet - Proxy. When an update is available, an icon in the menu bar displays some explaining text. Click the icon to proceed. If you disable the check, the icon is removed from the menu bar. Online Update is a module that can be selected or deselected to be installed. Choose the customized installation in the Setup of %PRODUCTNAME. - + Every Day A check will be performed once a day. - + Every Week A check will be performed once a week. This is the default setting. - + Every Month A check will be performed once a month. - + Check now A check will be performed now.Autodownload help id is in shared/01/online_update.xhp Download updates automatically diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/serverauthentication.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/serverauthentication.xhp index 6db7362426..65f24b36ea 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/serverauthentication.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/serverauthentication.xhp @@ -41,37 +41,37 @@ Server Authentication On the %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Mail Merge E-mail tab page, click the Server Authentication button to specify the server security settings. - + The outgoing mail server (SMTP) requires authentication Enables the authentication that is required to send e-mail by SMTP. - + The outgoing mail server (SMTP) requires separate authentication Select if your SMTP server requires a user name and password. - + User name Enter the user name for the SMTP server. - + Password Enter the password for the user name. - + The outgoing mail server uses the same authentication as the incoming mail server. Select if you are required to first read your e-mail before you can send e-mail. This method is also called "SMTP after POP3". - + Server name Enter the server name of your POP 3 or IMAP mail server. - + Port Enter the port on the POP3 or IMAP server. - + POP 3 Specifies that the incoming mail server uses POP 3. - + IMAP Specifies that the incoming mail server uses IMAP. - + User name Enter the user name for the IMAP server. - + Password Enter the password. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/testaccount.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/testaccount.xhp index 8001c46d7d..c10e4081d7 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/testaccount.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/testaccount.xhp @@ -44,10 +44,10 @@ (Results list box) In the top list box you will see the results of the test session. - + Errors In the Errors list box you can read an explanation of any errors encountered while testing the settings. - + Stop Click the Stop button to stop a test session manually. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/viewcertificate_c.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/viewcertificate_c.xhp index f46d1dcac9..aa5586483a 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/viewcertificate_c.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/viewcertificate_c.xhp @@ -44,7 +44,7 @@ - + Certificate Path diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/viewcertificate_d.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/viewcertificate_d.xhp index 3856ea8a36..8d206852d8 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/viewcertificate_d.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/viewcertificate_d.xhp @@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ Details The Details page of the View Certificate dialog displays detailed information about the certificate. - + Use the value list box to view values and copy them to the clipboard. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/00/00000004.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/00/00000004.xhp index affcaf6a44..ad05afc434 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/00/00000004.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/00/00000004.xhp @@ -48,9 +48,9 @@ To access this command -Save as Picture context menu, #i63795 +Save as Picture context menu, #i63795 Opens a dialog to save the selected bitmap picture as a file. The default file format is the internal format of the image. -Custom Animation context menu +Custom Animation context menu Opens the Custom Animation window on the Task pane.
diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/02120000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/02120000.xhp index 57d0d8b36c..22f236bbcc 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/02120000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/02120000.xhp @@ -50,10 +50,10 @@ - + Number of copies Enter the number of copies you want to make. - + Values from selection
@@ -71,35 +71,35 @@ PlacementSets the position and rotation of a duplicate object with respect to the selected object. - + X axis Enter the horizontal distance between the centers of the selected object and the duplicate object. Positive values shift the duplicate object to the right and negative values shift the duplicate object to the left. - + Y axis Enter the vertical distance between the centers of the selected object and the duplicate object. Positive values shift the duplicate object down and negative values shift the duplicate object up. - + Angle Enter the angle (0 to 359 degrees) by which you want to rotate the duplicate object. Positive values rotate the duplicate object in a clockwise direction and negative values in a counterclockwise direction. Enlargement Sets the size of a duplicate object. - + Width Enter the amount by which you want to enlarge or reduce the width of the duplicate object. - + Height Enter the amount by which you want to enlarge or reduce the height of the duplicate object. Colors Sets the colors for the selected object and the duplicate object. If you make more than one copy, these colors define the start and end points of a color gradient. - + Start Choose a color for the selected object. - + End Choose a color for the duplicate object. If you are making more than one copy, this color is applied to the last copy. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/02150000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/02150000.xhp index e590513f79..e6e9026b53 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/02150000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/02150000.xhp @@ -55,13 +55,13 @@ dedr: fixed #i30766# Settings Sets the options for cross-fading. - + Increments Enter the number of shapes you want between the two selected objects. - + Cross-fade attributes Applies cross-fading to the line and fill properties of the selected objects.For example, if the selected objects are filled with different colors, a color transition between the two colors is applied. - + Same orientation Applies a smooth transition between the selected objects. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/02160000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/02160000.xhp index e48d329c8b..d642ab4690 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/02160000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/02160000.xhp @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ - + Edit Fields Edits the properties of an inserted field. To edit an inserted field, double-click it. Then choose Edit - Fields. @@ -63,16 +63,16 @@ Field type Sets the type of a field. - + Fixed Displays the content of the field when the field was inserted. - + Variable Displays the current value of the field. - + Language Select the language for the field. - + Format Select a display format for the field. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03151100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03151100.xhp index 0fb554fa2b..e8a2599503 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03151100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03151100.xhp @@ -44,7 +44,7 @@
-Master Layout +Master Layout Adds or removes header, footer, date, and slide number placeholders to the layout of the slide master.
diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03151200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03151200.xhp index 3e3e6efa08..9250488daa 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03151200.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03151200.xhp @@ -44,7 +44,7 @@
-Notes Master Layout +Notes Master Layout Add header, footer, date, and slide number to the notes master.
diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04010000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04010000.xhp index ce833b8c08..b9f30f6351 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04010000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04010000.xhp @@ -54,9 +54,9 @@
-Applies the slide master background to the new slide. +Applies the slide master background to the new slide. Applies the master page background to the new page.UFI: deleted some paras, changed avis to ahid tags, see #i60536 -Includes objects on the slide master in the new slide. +Includes objects on the slide master in the new slide. Includes objects on the master page in the new page. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04020000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04020000.xhp index 8130838f7d..c608ed2aa0 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04020000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04020000.xhp @@ -51,15 +51,15 @@
To select a layer, click the corresponding tab at the bottom of the workspace. -Name +Name Enter a name for the new layer. Properties Set the properties for the new layer. -Visible +Visible Show or hide the layer. -Printable +Printable When printing, print or ignore this particular layer. -Locked +Locked Prevent elements on the layer from being edited. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04030000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04030000.xhp index d75ca2b623..5c1413bf73 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04030000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04030000.xhp @@ -62,17 +62,17 @@ Position Sets the position of a selected snap point or line relative to the top left corner of the page. You can also drag a snap point or snap line to a new position. -X axis +X axis Enter the amount of space you want between the snap point or line and the left edge of the page. -Y axis +Y axis Enter the amount of space you want between the snap point or line and the top edge of the page. Type Specified the type of snap object you want to insert. -Point +Point Inserts a snap point. -Vertical +Vertical Inserts a vertical snap line. -Horizontal +Horizontal Inserts a horizontal snap line. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04030100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04030100.xhp index 8dbcb343b7..2e002d3a40 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04030100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04030100.xhp @@ -54,7 +54,7 @@
- + Delete Snap Line/Point diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04110100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04110100.xhp index 998dc7c4aa..9f6a41c619 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04110100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04110100.xhp @@ -70,9 +70,9 @@ At the prompt, click Yes to scale the elements to fit on the slide or No to preserve the original size of the elements. -Link +Link Inserts a file or some file elements as a link that is automatically updated when the source file is modified. -Delete unused backgrounds +Delete unused backgrounds Unused master pages are not inserted. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/05120000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/05120000.xhp index 2ecaa5b8f8..92150f6c76 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/05120000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/05120000.xhp @@ -52,11 +52,11 @@
Slide design Displays the slide designs you can apply to your slide. Select a design and click OK to apply it to the current slide. -Exchange background page +Exchange background page Applies the background of the selected slide design to all of the slides in your document. -Delete unused backgrounds +Delete unused backgrounds Deletes unreferenced background slides and presentation layouts from your document. -Load +Load Displays the Load Slide Design dialog, where you can select additional slide designs. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/05120100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/05120100.xhp index 49a5e48ea9..2b49d43bfc 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/05120100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/05120100.xhp @@ -47,16 +47,16 @@ Load additional slide designs for your presentation. Select a design category, and then a template you want to apply. how to get this page? - + Categories Displays the available slide design categories. - + Templates Displays the templates for the selected design category. - + More>> Shows or hides a preview and the properties of a selected template. - + Preview Turns on a preview of the template. Preview field @@ -65,16 +65,16 @@ Description Lists the properties of the selected template. These properties are optional and the boxes may be blank.You cannot edit the properties in this area. - + Title Displays the title of the template. - + Subject Displays the subject of the template. Some templates are grouped together by subject. - + Keywords Displays the keywords for searching. - + Description Brief summary of the selected template. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/05150000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/05150000.xhp index a5485feb6a..037297b632 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/05150000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/05150000.xhp @@ -56,25 +56,25 @@ A Dimension Line is always inserted on the layer called Dimension Lines. If you set that layer to invisible, you will not see any Dimension Line in your drawing. Line Sets the distance properties of the dimension line and the guides with respect to each other and to the baseline. - + Line distance Specifies the distance between the dimension line and the baseline (line distance = 0). - + Guide overhang Specifies the length of the left and right guides starting at the baseline (line distance = 0). Positive values extend the guides above the baseline and negative values extend the guides below the baseline. - + Guide distance Specifies the length of the right and left guides starting at the dimension line. Positive values extend the guides above the dimension line and negative values extend the guides below the dimension line. - + Left guide Specifies the length of the left guide starting at the dimension line. Positive values extend the guide below the dimension line and negative values extend the guide above the dimension line. - + Right guide Specifies the length of the right guide starting at the dimension line. Positive values extend the guide below the dimension line and negative values extend the guide above the dimension line. - + Dimension line below the object Reverses the properties set in the Line area. - + Decimal places Specifies the number of decimal places used for the display of line properties. Legend @@ -83,17 +83,17 @@ Text position Determines the position of the dimension text with respect to the dimension line and the guides. The AutoVertical and AutoHorizontal checkboxes must be cleared before you can assign the Text position. - + AutoVertical Determines the optimal vertical position for the dimension text. - + AutoHorizontal Determines the optimal horizontal position for the dimension text. - - + + Show meas. units Shows or hides the dimension measurement units. You can also select a measurement unit you want to display from the list. - + Parallel to line Displays the text parallel to or at 90 degrees to the dimension line. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/05170000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/05170000.xhp index 08ec992185..a9aedf6860 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/05170000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/05170000.xhp @@ -50,32 +50,32 @@ Connectors Sets the properties of a connector. - + Type Lists the types of connectors that are available.There are four types of connectors: standard, line, straight, and curved. Line skew Defines the skew of a connector line. The preview window displays the result. - + Line 1 Enter a skew value for Line 1. - + Line 2 Enter a skew value for Line 2. - + Line 3 Enter a skew value for Line 3. Line spacing Sets the line spacing for the connectors. - + Begin horizontal Enter the amount of horizontal space you want at the beginning of the connector. - + Begin vertical Enter the amount of vertical space you want at the beginning of the connector. - + End horizontal Enter the amount of horizontal space you want at the end of the connector. - + End vertical Enter the amount of vertical space you want at the end of the connector. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/06040000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/06040000.xhp index ee86dcd63b..582925328f 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/06040000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/06040000.xhp @@ -57,19 +57,19 @@ To apply the same transition effect to more than one slide, switch to the Slide Sorter, select the slides, and then choose Slide Show - Slide Transition. - - + + UFI: removed a help idApply to selected slides Select the slide transition you want to use for the selected slides. Modify transition Enter the transition properties. - + Speed Sets the speed of the slide transition. - + Sound Lists sounds that can played during the slide transition. Loop until next sound diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/06050000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/06050000.xhp index c10bc41ccb..02cc86ad23 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/06050000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/06050000.xhp @@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ You can copy and paste animations into %PRODUCTNAME Writer. Animation Shows a preview of the objects in the animation. You can also press the Play button to view the animation. - + Jumps to the first image in the animation sequence.
@@ -69,7 +69,7 @@
- + Plays the animation backwards. @@ -84,7 +84,7 @@
- + Stops playing the animation. @@ -99,7 +99,7 @@
- + Plays the animation. @@ -114,7 +114,7 @@
- + Jumps to the last image in the animation sequence. @@ -129,22 +129,22 @@
- + Image Number Indicates the position of the current image in the animation sequence. If you want to view another image, enter its number or click the up and down arrows. - + Duration Enter the number of seconds to display the current image. This option is only available if you select the Bitmap object option in the Animation group field. - + Loop count Sets the number of times that the animation is played. If you want the animation to play continuously, choose Max. Image Adds or removes objects from your animation. - + Apply Object Adds selected object(s) as a single image. @@ -161,7 +161,7 @@ - + Apply Objects Individually Adds an image for each selected object. If you select a grouped object, an image is created for each object in the group. @@ -179,7 +179,7 @@ - + Delete Current Image Deletes current image from the animation sequence. @@ -196,7 +196,7 @@ - + Delete All Images Deletes all of the images in the animation. @@ -219,19 +219,19 @@ Animation group Sets object properties for your animation. - + Group object Assembles images into a single object so that they can be moved as a group. You can still edit individual objects by double-clicking the group in the slide. - + Bitmap object Combines images into a single image. - + Alignment Aligns the images in your animation.. - + Create Inserts the animation into the current slide. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/06070000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/06070000.xhp index 29de95a9b5..035c2e49e3 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/06070000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/06070000.xhp @@ -57,7 +57,7 @@
-Action at mouse click +Action at mouse click Specifies the action that will run when you click the selected object during a slide show. You can also assign actions to grouped objects. No action No action occurs. @@ -73,23 +73,23 @@ Jumps to a slide or a named object in a slide. Target Lists the slides and the objects that you can target. -Slide / Object +Slide / Object Enter the name of the slide or the object that you want to look for. -Find +Find Searches for the specified slide or object. Go to document Opens and displays a file during a slide show. If you select a $[officename] file as the target document, you can also specify the page that will open. Document Define the location of the target document. -Document +Document Enter a path to the file you want to open, or click Browse to locate the file. -Browse +Browse Locate the file you want to open. Play sound Plays a sound file. Sound Define the location of the sound file. -Sound +Sound Enter a path to the sound file you want to open, or click Browse to locate the file. Browse Locate the sound file you want to play. @@ -99,14 +99,14 @@ Run program Starts a program during a slide show. Program -Program +Program Enter a path to the program you want to start, or click Browse to locate the program. Browse Locate the program you want to start. Run macro Runs a macro during the slide show. Macro -Macro +Macro Enter a path to the macro you want to run, or click Browse to locate the macro. Browse Locate the macro you want to run. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/06080000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/06080000.xhp index a284143e74..bdf88dfad0 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/06080000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/06080000.xhp @@ -60,55 +60,55 @@
Range Specifies which slides to include in the slide show. - + All slides Includes all of the slides in your slide show. - - + + From: Enter the number of the start slide. - - + + Custom Slide Show Runs a custom slide show in the order that you defined in Slide Show - Custom Slide Show. Type Select the slide show type. - + Default A full screen slide is shown. - + Window Slide show runs in the $[officename] program window. - + Auto Restarts the slide show after the pause interval you specify. A pause slide is displayed between the final slide and the start slide. Press the Esc key to stop the show.. - + Duration of pause Enter the duration of the pause before the slide show is repeated. If you enter zero, the show restarts immediately without showing a pause slide. - + Show logo Displays the $[officename] logo on the pause slide. The logo cannot be exchanged. Options - + Change slides manually Slides never change automatically when this box is selected. - + Mouse pointer visible Shows the mouse pointer during a slide show. - + Mouse pointer as pen Changes the mouse pointer to a pen which you can use to draw on slides during the presentation. Anything you write with the pen is not saved when you exit the slide show. The color of the pen cannot be changed. - + Navigator visible Displays the Navigator during the slide show. - + Animations allowed Displays all frames of animated GIF files during the slide show. If this option is not selected, only the first frame of an animated GIF file is displayed.see #i63884 - + Change slides by clicking on background Advances to the next slide when you click on the background of a slide. - + Presentation always on top The $[officename] window remains on top during the presentation. No other program will show its window in front of your presentation.see http://qa.openoffice.org/issues/show_bug.cgi?id=12719 Multiple Monitors diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/06100000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/06100000.xhp index 6c85c2ff73..fb7ce269c4 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/06100000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/06100000.xhp @@ -50,11 +50,11 @@ - + Name of the presentation(s) Lists the custom slide shows that are available. To create a custom slide show, click New. - + Use Custom Slide Show Runs the custom slide show you selected when you click Start. Otherwise, the entire presentation is shown. To run a custom slide show: @@ -66,17 +66,17 @@ Click Start. - + New - + Edit Add, remove or reorder slides as well as change the name of the selected custom slide show. - + Copy Creates a copy of the selected custom slide show. You can modify the name of the show by clicking Edit. - + Start Runs the slide show. Ensure that Use Custom Slide Show is selected if you want to run a custom presentation. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/06100100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/06100100.xhp index cecf8be8e9..2d154d9918 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/06100100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/06100100.xhp @@ -50,11 +50,11 @@ Select a slide and click >> or << to add or remove the slide from the list. - Adds an existing slide to the bottom of the Selected slides list. You need to select a slide in the Existing slides list before you can use this button. - Removes a slide from the Selected slides list. You need to choose a slide in the Selected slides list before you can use this button. - Name + Adds an existing slide to the bottom of the Selected slides list. You need to select a slide in the Existing slides list before you can use this button. + Removes a slide from the Selected slides list. You need to choose a slide in the Selected slides list before you can use this button. + Name Displays the name of the custom slide show. If you want, you can enter a new name. - Existing slides + Existing slides Lists all of the slides in the order in which they appear in the current document. Selected slides Lists all of the slides in the custom slide show. If you want, you can change the order of the list by dragging the slides up or down. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/13050200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/13050200.xhp index f4fa563bf9..2d779dd4a0 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/13050200.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/13050200.xhp @@ -57,16 +57,16 @@ The following options are required to convert a bitmap image to a polygon. The converted image is actually a collection of smaller polygons filled with color. Settings Set the conversion options for the image. - + Number of colors: Enter the number of colors to be displayed in the converted image. $[officename] generates a polygon for each occurrence of a color in the image. - + Point reduction Removes color polygons that are smaller than the pixel value you enter. - + Fill holes Fills the color gaps caused by applying a point reduction. - + Tile size Enter the size of the rectangle for the background fill. Source picture: @@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ Preview of the converted image. Click Preview to generate the vectorized image. Progress Displays the conversion progress. - + Preview Previews the converted image without applying the changes. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/animationeffect.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/animationeffect.xhp index c9b657ee26..8a29e6e7e1 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/animationeffect.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/animationeffect.xhp @@ -43,7 +43,7 @@ - + Custom Animation Select an effect and click OK to assign it. Adds a new animation effect to the object selected in the slide, or changes the animation of the selected element in the Custom Animations Pane. @@ -56,10 +56,10 @@ Select an exiting effect from the effect categories. Motion Paths Select a motion path from the motion path categories. - + Speed Specifies the speed or duration of the selected animation effect. - + Automatic preview Select to preview new or edited effects on the slide. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/effectoptionseffect.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/effectoptionseffect.xhp index b0c177a420..159c148630 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/effectoptionseffect.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/effectoptionseffect.xhp @@ -50,13 +50,13 @@ For some effects, the settings can be specified on the Effect tab page. Direction Specifies the direction for the effect. -Accelerated start +Accelerated start Enable this option to assign a gradually increasing speed to the start of the effect. -Decelerated end +Decelerated end Enable this option to assign a gradually decreasing speed to the end of the effect. Enhancements Specifies the enhancements for the current effect. -Sound +Sound Select a sound from the Gallery or select one of the special entries. @@ -72,10 +72,10 @@ Other sound - displays a file open dialog to select a sound file. -Sound button +Sound button Plays the selected sound file. - -After animation + +After animation Select a color to be shown after the animation ends, or select another after-effect from the list: @@ -95,9 +95,9 @@ Hide on next animation - hides the shape on the next animation. -Dim color +Dim color Select the dim color. -Text animation +Text animation Select the animation mode for the text of the current shape: @@ -113,7 +113,7 @@ Letter by letter - animates the text letter by letter. -Delay between characters +Delay between characters Specifies the percentage of delay between animations of words or letters. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/effectoptionstext.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/effectoptionstext.xhp index 563ce5bbcb..ddd6beb9f4 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/effectoptionstext.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/effectoptionstext.xhp @@ -46,7 +46,7 @@ Text Animation Specifies the text animation settings for the current effect in the Effect Options dialog. - + Group text Specifies how multiple paragraphs are animated: @@ -63,15 +63,15 @@ By 1st level paragraphs - the first level paragraphs, including sub-level paragraphs, are animated one after another. - + Automatically after If "Group text - By 1st level paragraphs" is selected, the paragraphs are animated one after the other. - + Enter an additional delay in seconds to animate subsequent paragraphs. - + Animate attached shape Deselect this box to animate only the text, not the shape. - + In reverse order Animates the paragraphs in reverse order. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/effectoptionstiming.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/effectoptionstiming.xhp index 7384e61d81..44deec99a3 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/effectoptionstiming.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/effectoptionstiming.xhp @@ -46,7 +46,7 @@ Timing Specifies the timing for the current effect in the Effect Options dialog. -Start +Start Displays the start property of the selected animation effect. The following start properties are available: @@ -62,11 +62,11 @@ After previous - the animation runs as soon as the previous animation ends. -Delay +Delay Specifies an additional delay of n seconds until the effect starts. -Speed +Speed Specifies the duration of the effect. -Repeat +Repeat Specifies whether and how to repeat the current effect. Enter the number of repeats, or select from the list: @@ -82,12 +82,12 @@ Until end of slide - the animation repeats as long as the slide is displayed. -Rewind when done playing +Rewind when done playing Specifies whether to let the animated shape return to its starting state after the animation ends. -Animate as part of click sequence +Animate as part of click sequence Specifies whether to let the animation start in the normal click sequence. -Start effect on click of +Start effect on click of Specifies whether to let the animation start when a specified shape is clicked. -Select the shape by its name from the list box. +Select the shape by its name from the list box. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/taskpanel.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/taskpanel.xhp index 2550d2afbe..ce9805b09f 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/taskpanel.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/taskpanel.xhp @@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ Opens the Master Pages tab page, where you apply a master page (background) to all slides (left-click) or to the selected slides (right-click). Used in this presentation Lists the currently used master pages. -Recently used +Recently used Lists the recently used master pages. Available for Use Lists all available master pages. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/13040000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/13040000.xhp index 5f36d877fb..c0fc9258bb 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/13040000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/13040000.xhp @@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ interactions; preview allowing; interaction - + Allow Interaction Runs a preview of the interaction that is assigned to an object, when you click the object in the slide. To select an object for editing, hold down the OptionsAlt key when you click. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/table_insert.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/table_insert.xhp index dd6f1140ed..ce8007b1bc 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/table_insert.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/table_insert.xhp @@ -56,9 +56,9 @@ Insert a new table as an OLE object or insert an existing file as an OLE object - you can specify the link to a file to be a live link to the latest data saved in a spreadsheet file. Insert table dialog - Number of columns - + Enter the number of columns for the new table.Insert table dialog - Number of rows - + Enter the number of rows for the new table.Contextmenu of a table in Impress and DrawCell Define the vertical alignment of selected or all cell contents. Split or merge cells. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0210.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0210.xhp index d5e0bdde16..6527621eb4 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0210.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0210.xhp @@ -44,7 +44,7 @@
- + Drawing Bar The Drawing bar contains frequently used editing tools. Click the arrow next to an icon to open a toolbar that contains additional commands.
diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/05010000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/05010000.xhp index 5f88f7740d..563b2a8e3b 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/05010000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/05010000.xhp @@ -59,34 +59,34 @@ dedr: fixed #i30893# You can define fonts for the variables, functions, numbers and inserted text that form the elements of your formula. The list boxes in the Fonts dialog display a default font for all elements. To change to a different font, click Modify, then select the element type. A new dialog box appears. Select the desired font and check any desired attributes, then click OK. To set the changes as the default fonts, click the Default button. If you want to mark individual text segments with a font other than that used for the whole text, then enter the Font command in the Commands window. - + Variables You can select the fonts for the variables in your formula. For example, in the formula x=SIN(y), x and y are variables, and will reflect the assigned font. - + Functions Select the fonts for names and properties of functions. For example, the functions in the formula x=SIN(y) are =SIN( ). - + Numbers You can select the fonts for the numbers in your formula. - + Text Define the fonts for the text in your formula here. Custom Fonts In this section of the Fonts dialog you can define fonts, with which you can format other text components in the formula. The three basic fonts Serif, Sans and Fixed are available. You can add any other font to each standard installed basic font. Every font installed on your system is available for you to use. Select the Modify button to expand the selection offered in the list box. These custom fonts are used if you set a different font with the FONT command in the Commands window. - + Serif You can specify the font to be used for the font serif format. Serifs are the small "guides" that can be seen, for example, at the bottom of a capital A when the Times serif font is used. Using serifs is quite helpful since it guides a reader's eye in a straight line and can speed up reading. - + Sans You can specify the font to be used for sans font formatting. - + Fixed You can specify the font to be used for fixed font formatting. - + Modify Click one of the choices from this pop-up menu to access the Fonts dialog, where you can define the font and attributes for the respective formula and for custom fonts. - + Default Click this button to save your changes as the default for all new formulas. After confirming the changes, click the Yes button. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/05010100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/05010100.xhp index 5ab52a0eeb..ec4fbcb559 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/05010100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/05010100.xhp @@ -44,20 +44,20 @@ - Fonts + Fonts Use this dialog to select the font for the respective category in the Fonts dialog.
- Font + Font Select a font from the list. Example You can see a preview of the selected font with its attributes. Attributes You can assign additional attributes to the selected font. - Bold + Bold Check this box to assign the bold attribute to the font. - Italic + Italic Check this box to assign the italic attribute to the font. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/05020000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/05020000.xhp index 944a498de8..1773228d09 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/05020000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/05020000.xhp @@ -52,22 +52,22 @@
-Base size +Base size All elements of a formula are proportionally scaled to the base size. To change the base size, select or type in the desired point (pt) size. You can also use other units of measure or other metrics, which are then automatically converted to points. To permanently change the default size (12 pt) used in $[officename] Math, you must first set the size (for example, 11 pt) and then click the Default button. Relative Sizes In this section, you can determine the relative sizes for each type of element with reference to the base size. -Text +Text Select the size for text in a formula relative to the base size. -Indexes +Indexes Select the relative size for the indexes in a formula in proportion to the base size. -Functions +Functions Select the relative size for names and other function elements in a formula in proportion to the base size. -Operators +Operators Select the relative size of the mathematical operators in a formula in proportion to the base size. -Limits +Limits Select the relative size for the limits in a formula in proportion to the base size. -Default +Default Click this button to save your changes as a default for all new formulas. A security response appears before saving any changes. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/05030000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/05030000.xhp index 587d14470e..c967888afc 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/05030000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/05030000.xhp @@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ Use the Category button to determine the formula element for which you would like to specify the spacing. The appearance of the dialog depends on the selected category. A preview window shows you which spacing is modified through the respective boxes. - + Category This button allows you to select the category for which you would like to change the spacing. Spacing @@ -110,7 +110,7 @@ Spacing Determines the horizontal distance between the contents and the upper end of the brackets. - + Scale all brackets Scales all types of brackets. If you then enter ( a over b) in the Commands window, the brackets will surround the whole height of the argument. You normally achieve this effect by entering left ( a over b right ). @@ -155,7 +155,7 @@ Bottom The bottom border is positioned between the formula and background. - + Default Saves your changes as your default settings for all new formulas. A security response will appear before saving these changes. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/05040000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/05040000.xhp index c71a32ecc0..a86428b98e 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/05040000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/05040000.xhp @@ -51,14 +51,14 @@ Horizontal Specifies the type of horizontal alignment for multi-line formulas. - Left + Left Aligns the selected elements of a formula to the left. Text is always aligned left. - Centered + Centered Aligns the elements of a formula to the center. - Right + Right Aligns the elements of a formula to the right. - Default + Default Click here to save your changes as the default settings for new formulas. A security response will appear before saving. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/06010000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/06010000.xhp index ed0f9df679..a2b346a649 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/06010000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/06010000.xhp @@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ Greek symbols in formulas formulas; entering symbols in - + Catalog @@ -59,12 +59,12 @@
- + Symbol Set All symbols are organized into symbol sets. Select the desired symbol set from the list box. The corresponding group of symbols appear in the field below. When a symbol is selected, its command name appears below the symbol list and a magnified version appears in a box to the right. Note that the name must be typed in the Commands window exactly as displayed here (case-sensitive). To insert a symbol, select it from the list and click Insert. The corresponding command name appears in the Commands window. - + Edit Click here to open the Edit Symbols dialog. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/06010100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/06010100.xhp index e33a5bd9fa..7b79c0edc7 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/06010100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/06010100.xhp @@ -43,7 +43,7 @@ - + new symbols in %PRODUCTNAME Math symbols; adding in %PRODUCTNAME Math @@ -52,42 +52,42 @@
- + Old Symbol Select the name of the current symbol. The symbol, the name of the symbol, and the set that the symbol belongs to are displayed in the left preview pane at the bottom of the dialog box. - + Old Symbol Set This list box contains the name of the current symbol set. If you want, you can also select a different symbol set. - + Symbol Lists the names for the symbols in the current symbol set. Select a name from the list or type a name for a newly added symbol. Adding a New Symbol To add a symbol to a symbol set, select a font in the Font box, and then click a symbol in symbols pane. In the Symbol box, type a name for the symbol. In the Symbol set list box, select a symbol set, or type a new name to create a new symbol set. The right preview pane displays the symbol that you selected. Click Add and then OK. Modifying the Name of a Symbol To change the name of a symbol, select the old name in the Old symbol list box. Then enter the new name in the Symbol box. Check whether the desired character is in the preview window before you click the Modify button. Click OK. - + Symbol Set The Symbol set list box contains the names of all existing symbol sets. You can modify a symbol set or create a new one. Creating a New Symbol Set To create a new symbol set, type a name for it in the Symbol set list box and add at least one symbol. Click OK to close the dialog. The new symbol set is now available under the new name. - + Font Displays the name of the current font and enables you to select a different font. - + Subset If you selected a non-symbol font in the Font list box, you can select a Unicode subset in which to place your new or edited symbol. When a subset has been selected, all symbols belonging to this subset of the current symbol set are displayed in the symbols list above. - + Typeface The current typeface is displayed. You can change the typeface by selecting one from the list box. - + Add Click this button to add the symbol shown in the right preview window to the current symbol set. It will be saved under the name displayed in the Symbol list box. You must specify a name under Symbol or Symbol Set to be able to use this button. Names cannot be used more than once. - + Modify Click this button to replace the name of the symbol shown in the left preview window (the old name is displayed in the Old symbol list box) with the new name you have entered in the Symbol list box. Moving a Symbol to Another Symbol Set As an example, to transfer the large ALPHA from the "Greek" set to the "Special" set, select the old set (Greek) and then the ALPHA symbol using the two top list boxes. The symbol appears in the left preview window. In the Symbol set list box, select the "Special" set. Click Modify and then OK. The ALPHA symbol is now only in the "Special" symbol set. - + Delete Click to remove the symbol shown in the left preview window from the current symbol set. There will be no security query. Deleting the last remaining symbol of a symbol set also deletes the symbol set. You can also click Cancel at any time to close the dialog without saving any of the changes. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/01150000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/01150000.xhp index 51eed6d346..22e0793be2 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/01150000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/01150000.xhp @@ -51,41 +51,41 @@ During printing, the database information replaces the corresponding database fields (placeholders). For more information about inserting database fields refer to the Database tab page under Insert - Fields - Other.db browser explorer Select a database and table.db browser records Select database records. Drag-and-drop rows or cells to the document to insert contents. Drag-and-drop column headers to insert fields.save as single document -Click to create one big document containing all data records.save as individual documents -Click to create one document for every one data record.generate file name from database -Generate each file name from data contained in a database.UFI: sorry, spec doc has no more info about the specificsfile format -Select the file format. +Click to create one big document containing all data records.save as individual documents +Click to create one document for every one data record.generate file name from database +Generate each file name from data contained in a database.UFI: sorry, spec doc has no more info about the specificsfile format +Select the file format. Records Determines the number of records for printing the form letter. One letter will be printed for each record. -All +All Processes all the records from the database. -Selected records +Selected records Processes only the marked records from the database. This option is only available when you have previously marked the necessary records in the database. -From +From Specifies which records to include in your form letter. -From: +From: Specifies the number of the first record to be printed. -To: +To: Specifies the number of the last record to be printed. Output Determines whether to send your form letters to a printer or save them to a file. -Printer +Printer Prints the form letters. -File +File Saves the form letters in files. -Single print jobs +Single print jobs Prints each form letter individually with the selected printer. -Path +Path Specifies the path to store the form letters. -... +... Opens the Select Path dialog. Generate file name from Specifies how the file name is generated. - -Database field + +Database field Uses the content of the selected data field as the file name for the form letter. - -Manual setting + +Manual setting Creates the file name based on the text you enter, followed by a serial number. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/01160300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/01160300.xhp index 899a85cc58..06d5942b6c 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/01160300.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/01160300.xhp @@ -52,10 +52,10 @@
- + Included Outline Levels Enter the extent of the outline levels to be copied to the new document. For example, if you choose 4 levels, all paragraphs formatted with Heading 1 to Heading 4 are included, along with the number of subsequent paragraphs specified in Subpoints per Level. - + Subpoints per Level Specify the maximum number of consecutive paragraphs to be included in the AutoAbstract document after each heading. All of the paragraphs up to the maximum defined are included until the next paragraph with a Heading Style is reached. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02110100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02110100.xhp index 7720520fba..1cb8aacc89 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02110100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02110100.xhp @@ -100,7 +100,7 @@ Select this icon to browse through search results. Select this icon to browse through table formulas. - + Select this icon to browse through wrong table formulas. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02120000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02120000.xhp index 60f744997d..ccca0575c5 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02120000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02120000.xhp @@ -55,15 +55,15 @@ AutoText The AutoText dialog lists the AutoText categories and entries. - + Display remainder of name as a suggestion while typing Displays a suggestion for completing a word as a Help Tip after you type the first three letters of a word that matches an AutoText entry. To accept the suggestion, press Enter. If more than one AutoText entry matches the letters that you type, press Ctrl+Tab to advance through the entries. For example, to insert dummy text, type "Dum", and then press Enter. To display the list in reverse order, press Command Ctrl+Shift+Tab. - + Name Lists the name of the currently selected AutoText entry. If you have selected text in the document, type the name of the new AutoText entry, click the AutoText button, and then choose New. - + Shortcut Displays the shortcut for the selected AutoText entry. If you are creating a new AutoText entry, type the shortcut that you want to use for the entry. List box @@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ Inserts the selected AutoText into the current document. If you insert an unformatted AutoText entry into a paragraph, the entry is formatted with the current paragraph style. - + AutoText Click to display additional AutoText commands, for example, to create a new AutoText entry from a text selection in the current document. @@ -102,41 +102,41 @@ Import Opens a dialog where you can select the MS 97/2000/XP Word document or template, containing the AutoText entries that you want to import. - + Categories Adds, renames, or deletes AutoText categories. Edit Categories Adds, renames, or deletes AutoText categories. - + Category Displays the name of the selected AutoText category. To change the name of the category, type a new name, and then click Rename. To create a new category, type a name, and then click New. - + Path Displays the current path to the directory where the selected AutoText category files are stored. If you are creating an AutoText category, select where you want to store the category files. - + New Creates a new AutoText category using the name that you entered in the Name box. - + Rename Changes the name of the selected AutoText category to the name that you enter in the Name box. Selection list Lists the existing AutoText categories and the corresponding paths. - + Path Opens the Edit Paths dialog, where you can select the directory to store AutoText.Opens the Edit Paths dialog, where you can select the directory to store AutoText. To add a new path to an AutoText directory, click the Path button in the AutoText dialog. Save links relative to Use this area to set the way $[officename] inserts links to the AutoText directory. - + File system Links to AutoText directories on your computer are relative. - + Internet Links to files on the Internet are relative. - + Show preview Turns on or off a preview of the selected AutoText entry. Preview diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02120100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02120100.xhp index ac5dd9757a..4a60d05b9f 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02120100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02120100.xhp @@ -48,11 +48,11 @@
- Name + Name Displays the current name of the selected AutoText item. - New + New Type the new name for the selected AutoText component. - Shortcut + Shortcut Assigns a shortcut to the selected AutoText entry. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02140000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02140000.xhp index b2f4ebefd0..a0aa5ec674 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02140000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02140000.xhp @@ -59,7 +59,7 @@ The following dialog elements are only visible when the corresponding field type is selected. Select Lists the field options, for example, "fixed". If you want, you can click another option for the selected field type. -Format +Format Select the format for the contents of the field. For date, time, and user-defined fields, you can also click "Additional formats" in the list, and then choose a different format. The formats that are available depend on the type of field that you are editing. Offset Displays the offset for the selected field type, for example, for "Next Page," "Page Numbers" or "Previous Page". You can enter a new offset value which will be added to the displayed page number. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02150000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02150000.xhp index da1a02785a..505d93f7dc 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02150000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02150000.xhp @@ -41,7 +41,7 @@ - + Footnote/Endnote @@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ Converts an endnote to a footnote. Endnote Converts a footnote to an endnote. - + Arrow left Moves to the previous footnote or endnote anchor in the document. @@ -83,7 +83,7 @@
- + Arrow right Moves to the next footnote or endnote anchor in the document. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02160000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02160000.xhp index ec06350da3..63196d7729 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02160000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02160000.xhp @@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ SelectionEdits the selected index entry. - + Index Displays the type of index that the selected entry belongs to. You cannot change the index type of an index entry in this dialog. Instead, you must delete the index entry from the document, and then insert it again in a different index type. Entry diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02170000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02170000.xhp index c5d634ab17..c549e8cf5a 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02170000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02170000.xhp @@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ The current write protection status of a section is indicated by the lock symbol in front of the section name in the list. An open lock is unprotected and a closed lock is protected. Similarly, visible sections are indicated by a glasses symbol. Options Opens the Options dialog, where you can edit the column layout, background, footnote and endnote behavior of the selected section. If the section is password protected, you must enter the password first. - + Remove Removes the selected section from the document, and inserts the contents of the section into the document. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04010000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04010000.xhp index 77cc958e39..de625f49b3 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04010000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04010000.xhp @@ -53,25 +53,25 @@ Type Select the type of break that you want to insert. - + Line Break Ends the current line, and moves the text found to the right of the cursor to the next line, without creating a new paragraph. You can also insert a line break by pressing Shift+Enter. - + Column Break Inserts a manual column break (in a multiple column layout), and moves the text found to the right of the cursor to the beginning of the next column. A manual column break is indicated by a nonprinting border at the top of the new column. - + Page Break Inserts a manual page break, and moves the text found to the right of the cursor to the beginning of the next page. The inserted page break is indicated by a nonprinting border at the top of the new page. You can also insert a page break by pressing Command Ctrl+Enter. However, if you want to assign the following page a different Page Style, you must use the menu command to insert the manual page break. - + Style Select the page style for the page that follows the manual page break. - + Change page number Assigns the page number that you specify to the page that follows the manual page break. This option is only available if you assign a different page style to the page that follows manual page break. - + Page number Enter the new page number for the page that follows the manual page break. To display manual breaks, choose View - Nonprinting Characters. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04020000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04020000.xhp index d21995efb3..bae9f4fce9 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04020000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04020000.xhp @@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ - + Insert Section diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04020100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04020100.xhp index 3bd569b3ce..f3406689d3 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04020100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04020100.xhp @@ -53,17 +53,17 @@
- - + + New Section Type a name for the new section. By default, $[officename] automatically assigns the name "Section X" to new sections, where X is a consecutive number. Link - - + + Link Inserts the contents of another document or section from another document in the current section. - - + + DDEUFI: WIN only, while fixing #109638# @@ -72,41 +72,41 @@ For example, to insert a section named "Section1" from a $[officename] text document abc.sxw as a DDE link, use the command: "soffice x:\abc.sxw Section1". To insert the contents of the first cell from a MS Excel spreadsheet file called "abc.xls", use the command: "excel x:\[abc.xls]Sheet1 z1s1". You can also copy the elements that you want to insert as a DDE link, and then Edit - Paste Special. You can then view the DDE command for the link, by selecting the contents and choosing Edit - Fields. - - + + File name / DDE command Enter the path and the filename for the file that you want to insert, or click the browse button (...) to locate the file.If the DDE check box is selected, enter the DDE command that you want to use. - - + + ... Locate the file that you want to insert as a link, and then click Insert. - - + + Section Select the section in the file that you want to insert as a link. When you open a document that contains linked sections, you are prompted to update the links. Write Protection - - + + Protected Prevents the selected section from being edited. - + With password Protects the selected section with a password. The password must have a minimum of 5 characters. - - + + ... Opens a dialog where you can change the current password. Hide - - + + Hide Hides and prevents the selected section from being printed. The components of a hidden sections appear gray in the Navigator. When you rest your mouse pointer over a hidden component in the Navigator, the Help tip "hidden" is displayed. You cannot hide a section if it is the only content on a page, or in a header, footer, footnote, frame, or table cell. - - + + With condition Enter the condition that must be met to hide the section. A condition is a logical expression, such as "SALUTATION EQ Mr.". For example, if you use the mail merge form letter feature to define a database field called "Salutation" that contains "Mr.", "Ms.", or "Sir or Madam", you can then specify that a section will only be printed if the salutation is "Mr.". Another example would be to create the field variable "x" and set its value to 1. Then specify a condition based on this variable for hiding a section, such as: "x eq 1". If you want to display the section, set the value of the variable "x" to "0". diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04020200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04020200.xhp index 4d17d4a846..cd81cbcdce 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04020200.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04020200.xhp @@ -50,10 +50,10 @@
- + Before section Specifies the indents before the section, at the left margin. - + After section Specifies the indents after the section, at the right margin. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04030000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04030000.xhp index 15cb0265ef..4f2eeceff8 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04030000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04030000.xhp @@ -57,27 +57,27 @@ Numbering Select the type of numbering that you want to use for footnotes and endnotes. - + Automatic Automatically assigns consecutive numbers to the footnotes or endnotes that you insert. To change the settings for automatic numbering, choose Tools - Footnotes/Endnotes. - - + + Character Choose this option to define a character or symbol for the current footnote. This can be either a letter or number. To assign a special character, click the button at the bottom. - + ... Inserts a special character as a footnote or endnote anchor. Type Select whether to insert a footnote or an endnote. Endnote numbering is separate from the footnote numbering. - + Footnote Inserts a footnote anchor at the current cursor position in the document, and adds a footnote to the bottom of the page. - + Endnote Inserts an endnote anchor at the current cursor position in the document, and adds an endnote at the end of the document. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04040000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04040000.xhp index d38e50eb63..71a423481c 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04040000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04040000.xhp @@ -55,10 +55,10 @@ To jump to a specific bookmark, press F5 to open the Navigator, click the plus sign (+) next to the Bookmark entry, and then double-click the bookmark. You can also right-click the Page Number field at the left end of the Status Bar at the bottom of the document window, and then choose the bookmark that you want to jump to. -Bookmarks +Bookmarks Type the name of the bookmark that you want to create. The lower list contains all of the bookmarks in the current document. To delete a bookmark, select it in the list, and then click Delete. You cannot use the following characters in a bookmark name: / \ @ : * ? " ; , . # -Delete +Delete To delete a bookmark, select the bookmark from the Insert Bookmark dialog and click the Delete button. No confirmation dialog will follow. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04060000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04060000.xhp index f71392edc3..61380d012f 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04060000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04060000.xhp @@ -56,24 +56,24 @@ Properties Set the caption options for the current selection. - + Category Select the caption category, or type a name to create a new category. The category text appears before the caption number in the caption label. Each predefined caption category is formatted with a paragraph style of the same name. For example, the "Illustration" caption category is formatted with the "Illustration" paragraph style. - + Numbering Select the type of numbering that you want to use in the caption. - + Caption Type the text that you want to appear after the caption number. - + Separator Enter optional text characters to appear between the number and the caption text. -moved help id to here +moved help id to here Position Adds the caption above or below the selected item. This option is only available for some objects. Options - + AutoCaption Opens the Caption dialog. It has the same information as the dialog you get by menu %PRODUCTNAME Writer - AutoCaption in the Options dialog box. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04060100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04060100.xhp index 96ca573ecc..f57a8f84a5 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04060100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04060100.xhp @@ -46,7 +46,7 @@ UFI: edited re spec "Enhance Caption Dialog in Writer" - + Options Adds the chapter number to the caption label. To use this feature, you must first assign an outline level to a paragraph style, and then apply the style to the chapter headings in your document. @@ -55,18 +55,18 @@ UFI: edited re spec "Enhance Caption Dialog in Writer" Numbering by chapter When you add chapter numbers to caption labels, the caption numbering is reset when a chapter heading is encountered. For example, if the last figure in chapter 1 is "Figure 1.12", the first figure in the next chapter would be "Figure 2.1". - + Level Select the number of outline levels from the top of the chapter hierarchy down to include in the caption label. - + Separator Enter the character that you want to insert between the chapter number and the caption number. Category and frame format - + Character style Specifies the character style. - - + + Apply border and shadow Applies the border and shadow of the object to the caption frame. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04070100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04070100.xhp index 63913aca4a..84e9c96f17 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04070100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04070100.xhp @@ -50,15 +50,15 @@
- Addressee + Addressee Enter the delivery address. You can also click in this box, and select a database, a table, and field, and then click the arrow button to insert the field in the address. If you want, you can apply formatting, such as bold and underline, to the address text. - Sender + Sender Includes a return address on the envelope. Select the Sender check box, and then enter the return address. $[officename] automatically inserts your user data in the Sender box, but you can also enter the data that you want. - Database + Database Select the database containing the address data that you want to insert. - Table + Table Select the database table containing the address data that you want to insert. - Database field + Database field Select the database field containing the address data that you want to insert, and then click the left arrow button. The data is added to the address box containing the cursor. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04070200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04070200.xhp index 2438c999f4..8765e14a12 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04070200.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04070200.xhp @@ -54,11 +54,11 @@ Sets the position and the text formatting options of the addressee field. Position Sets the position of the recipient's address on the envelope. -from left +from left Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the left edge of the envelope and the addressee field. -from top +from top Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the top edge of the envelope and the addressee field. -Edit +Edit Click and choose the text formatting style for the addressee field that you want to edit. Character Opens a dialog where you can edit the character formatting that is used in the addressee field. @@ -68,11 +68,11 @@ Sets the position and the text formatting options of the sender field. Position Sets the position of the sender's address on the envelope. -from left +from left Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the left edge of the envelope and the sender field. -from top +from top Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the top edge of the envelope and the sender field. -Edit +Edit Click and choose the text formatting style for the sender field that you want to edit. Character Opens a dialog where you can edit the character formatting that is used in the sender field. @@ -80,11 +80,11 @@ Opens a dialog where you can edit the paragraph formatting that is used in the sender field. Size Select the envelope size format that you want to use, or create a custom size. -Format +Format Select the envelope size that want, or select "User Defined", and then enter the width and the height of the custom size. -Width +Width Enter the width of the envelope. -Height +Height Enter the height of the envelope. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04070300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04070300.xhp index 66e49eac4a..d96f4b622d 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04070300.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04070300.xhp @@ -70,21 +70,21 @@ Vertical right Feeds the envelope vertically from the right edge of the printer tray. - + Print from top Feeds the envelope with the print side face up in the printer tray. - + Print from bottom Feeds the envelope with the print side face down in the printer tray. - + Shift right Enter the amount to shift the print area to the right. - + Shift down Enter the amount to shift the print area down. Current printer Displays the name of the current printer. - + Setup Opens the Print Setup dialog where you can define additional printer settings, such as paper format and orientation. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090001.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090001.xhp index 4a979bcf45..01225d8bfa 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090001.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090001.xhp @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ For the HTML export and import of date and time fields, special $[officename] formats are used.
- + Type Lists the available field types. To add a field to your document, click a field type, click a field in the Select list, and then click Insert. The following fields are available:
@@ -143,7 +143,7 @@ The following fields can only be inserted if the corresponding field type is selected in the Type list.
- + Selecton "Document" and "DocInformation" tab page this is called "Select", on the other tab pages "Selection" Lists the available fields for the field type selected in the Type list. To insert a field, click the field, and then click Insert. @@ -188,14 +188,14 @@ If you want, you can enter an Offset for the displayed page number. With an Offset value of 1, the field will display a number that is 1 more than the current page number, but only if a page with that number exists. On the last page of the document, this same field will be empty.
- + Offset Enter the offset value that you want to apply to a page number field, for example "+1".
If you want to change the actual page number and not the displayed number, do not use the Offset value. To change page numbers, read the Page Numbers guide.
- + Format Click the format that you want to apply to the selected field, or click "Additional formats" to define a custom format. @@ -232,14 +232,14 @@
- + Inserts the field as static content, that is, the field cannot be updated. - + Layer Select the chapter heading level that you want to include in the selected field. - + Offset in days/minutes Enter the offset that you want to apply to a date or time field. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090002.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090002.xhp index 3f7672a83d..841b74d19d 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090002.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090002.xhp @@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ - + Type Lists the available field types. To add a field to your document, click a field type, click a field in the Selection list, and then click Insert. The following fields are available: @@ -129,7 +129,7 @@
References are fields. To remove a reference, delete the field. If you set a longer text as a reference and you do not want to reenter it after deleting the reference, select the text and copy it to the clipboard. You can then reinsert it as "unformatted text" at the same position using the command Edit - Paste special. The text remains intact while the reference is deleted. - + Selectionon "Document" and "DocInformation" tab page this is called "Select", on the other tab pages "Selection" Lists the available fields for the field type selected in the Type list. To insert a field, click the field, select a format in the "Insert reference to" list, and then click Insert. @@ -137,7 +137,7 @@ Ctrl and double-click the field.
In the Insert reference to list, click the format that you want to use. - + Insert reference to Select the format that you want to use for the selected reference field. The following formats are available: @@ -243,12 +243,12 @@ For example, when you are in a chapter 1, subchapter 2, subpart 5, this may be numbered as 1.2.5. When you insert here a reference to text in the previous subpart "1.2.4" and you apply the "Number" format, then the reference will be shown as "4". If in this example the numbering is set to show more sublevels, the same reference will be shown as "2.4" or "1.2.4", depending on the setting. If you use the "Number (full context)" format, you will always see "1.2.4", no matter how the numbered paragraph is formatted.
- + Name Type the name of the user-defined field that you want to create. To set a target, click "Set Reference" in the Type list, type a name in this box, and then click Insert. To reference the new target, click the target name in the Selection list.
In a master document, targets that are in different sub-documents are not displayed in the Selection list. If you want to insert a reference to the target, you must type the path and the name in the Name box. - + Enter the contents that you want to add to a user-defined fields. If you select text in the document, and then insert a reference, the selected text becomes the contents of the field that you insert.Value box (always disabled) diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090003.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090003.xhp index d873080207..c901d1bf54 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090003.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090003.xhp @@ -44,15 +44,15 @@
Functions - - + + Sets additional function parameters for fields. The type of parameter depends on the field type that you select. Depending on the field type that you select, you can assign conditions to certain functions. For example, you can define a field that executes a macro when you click the field in the document, or a condition that, when met, hides a field. You can also define placeholder fields that insert graphics, tables, frames and other objects into your document when needed.
- + Lists the available field types. To add a field to your document, click a field type, click a field in the Select list, and then click Insert.
@@ -130,7 +130,7 @@
- + Click the format that you want to apply to the selected field, or click "Additional formats" to define a custom format. For function fields, the format field is only used for fields of the type placeholder. Here, the format determines the object for which the placeholder stands. @@ -138,8 +138,8 @@ Condition For fields linked to a condition, enter the criteria here.
- - + + Then, Else Enter the text to display when the condition is met in the Then box, and the text to display when the condition is not met in the Else box. You can also insert database fields in the Then and Else boxes using the format "databasename.tablename.fieldname". @@ -162,40 +162,40 @@ Value Enter a value for the selected field.
- + Macro Opens the Macro Selector, where you can choose the macro that will run when you click the selected field in the document. This button is only available for the "Execute macro" function field.
The following controls are displayed for Input list fields: - + Item Enter a new item. - + Add Adds the Item to the list. - + Items on list Lists the items. The topmost item is shown in the document. - + Remove Removes the selected item from the list. - + Move Up Moves the selected item up in the list. - + Move Down Moves the selected item down in the list. - + Name Enter a unique name for the Input list. - + Choose Item This dialog is shown when you click an Input list field in the document. Choose the item that you want to display in the document, then click OK. - + Edit Displays the Edit Fields: Functions dialog, where you can edit the Input list. - + Next Closes the current Input list and displays the next, if available. You see this button when you open the Choose Item dialog by Ctrl+Shift+F9. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090004.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090004.xhp index ef527495f2..e8248bdeda 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090004.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090004.xhp @@ -144,16 +144,16 @@ - + Lists the available fields for the field type selected in the Type list. To insert a field, click the field, and then click Insert. For the "Created", "Modified", and "Last printed" field types, you can include the author, date, and time of the corresponding operation. - + Click the format that you want to apply to the selected field, or click "Additional formats" to define a custom format.
- + Fixed content Inserts the field as static content, that is, the field cannot be updated.
diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090005.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090005.xhp index e76c2d4ba8..5cc74fdba1 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090005.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090005.xhp @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ User-defined fields are only available in the current document. - + Lists the available field types. To add a field to your document, click a field type, click a field in the Select list, and then click Insert. @@ -140,19 +140,19 @@
- + Click the format that you want to apply to the selected field, or click "Additional formats" to define a custom format. For user-defined fields, click the format that you want to apply in the Format list, or click "Additional formats" to define a custom format. - + Type the name of the user-defined field that you want to create. - + Enter the contents that you want to add to a user-defined field. - + In the Format list, define if the value is inserted as text or a number. - + Selectionon "Document" and "DocInformation" tab page this is called "Select", on the other tab pages "Selection" Lists the available fields for the field type selected in the Type list. To insert a field, click the field, and then click Insert. To quickly insert a field from the list, hold down Command @@ -164,16 +164,16 @@
- + Invisible Hides the field contents in the document. The field is inserted as a thin gray mark in the document. This option is only available for the "Set Variable" and "User Field" field types.
Chapter numbering Sets the options for resetting chapter numbers. - + Level Choose the heading or chapter level at which to restart numbering in the document. - + Separator Type the character that you want to use as a separator between the heading or chapter levels.
diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090006.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090006.xhp index 012cf7d292..1e485b9528 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090006.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090006.xhp @@ -49,7 +49,7 @@
- + Lists the available field types. To add a field to your document, click a field type, click a field in the Select list, and then click Insert. @@ -108,27 +108,27 @@ Database Selection Select the database table or the database query that you want the field to refer to. You can include fields from more than one database or query in a document. - + For fields linked to a condition, enter the criteria here. If you want, you can assign a condition that must be met before the contents of the "Any Record" and "Next Record" fields are inserted. The default condition is "True", that is, the condition is always true if you do not change the condition text. - + Record number Enter the number of the record that you want to insert when the condition that you specify is met. The record number corresponds to the current selection in the data source view. For example, if you select the last 5 records in a database containing 10 records, the number of the first record will be 1, and not 6. If you refer to fields in a different database (or in a different table or query within the same database), $[officename] determines the record number relative to the current selection. Format Select the format of the field that you want to insert. This option is available for numerical, boolean, date and time fields.see #i64135 - + From database Uses the format defined in the selected database. - + Browse Opens a file open dialog where you can select a database file (*.odb). The selected file is added to the Databases Selection list. - + User defined Applies the format that you select in the List of user-defined formats. - - + + List of user-defined formats Lists the available user-defined formats. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090100.xhp index d4be346836..27ce3f180c 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090100.xhp @@ -47,10 +47,10 @@ Input Field Inserts a text field that you can open and edit by clicking it in the document. You can use input fields for text, or to assign a new value to a variable. To change the content of an Input Field in a document, click the field, and then edit the text in the lower box of the dialog. - + Edit The upper box displays the name that you entered in the Reference box of the Input Field on the Functions tab of the Fields dialog. The lower box displays the contents of the field. - + Next Jumps to the next input field in the document. This button is only available when you position the cursor directly before an input field, and then press Shift+Ctrl+F9. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120100.xhp index 1dd8ccabb8..ca4ae770ae 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120100.xhp @@ -100,7 +100,7 @@ New user-defined index Opens the Create New User-defined Index dialog where you can create a custom index. - + Name Enter a name for the new user-defined index. The new index is added to the list of available indexes and tables. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120201.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120201.xhp index 868efc064f..0b748ab775 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120201.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120201.xhp @@ -51,19 +51,19 @@ Assignment - + Levels Select the index level that you change the formatting of. - + Paragraph Styles Select the paragraph style that you want to apply to the selected index level, and then click the Assign (<) button. - + < Formats the selected index level with the selected paragraph style. - + Default Resets the formatting of the selected level to the "Default" paragraph style. - + Edit Opens the Paragraph Style dialog, where you can modify the selected paragraph style. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120211.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120211.xhp index e409380deb..460fc6d703 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120211.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120211.xhp @@ -56,47 +56,47 @@
Type and Title Specify the type and title of the index. - + Type Select the type of index that you want to insert. The options available on this tab depend on the index type that you select. If the cursor is in an index when you choose the Insert - Indexes and Tables - Indexes and Tables, you can then edit that index. - + Title Enter a title for the selected index. - + Protected against manual changes Prevents the contents of the index from being changed. Manual changes that you make to an index are lost when the index is refreshed. If you want the cursor to scroll through a protected area, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids, and then select the Cursor in protected areas - Enabled check box.
- + Create index for Select whether to create the index for the document or for the current chapter.
- + Evaluation level Enter the number of heading levels to include in the index. Create from Use this area to specify which information to include in an index. - + Outline Creates the index using outline levels, that is, paragraphs formatted with one of the predefined heading styles (Heading 1-10) are added to the index. You can also assign the outline levels in the Outline & Numbering tab page of the Format - Paragraph dialog. - + Additional Styles Includes the paragraph styles that you specify in the Assign Styles dialog as index entries. To select the paragraph styles that you want to include in the index, click the Assign Styles (...) button to the right of this box.
- + ... Opens the Assign Styles dialog, where you can select the paragraph styles to include in the index.
- + Index marks Includes the index entries that you inserted by choosing Insert - Indexes and Tables - Entry in the index. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120212.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120212.xhp index 5133002add..8efb69f98d 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120212.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120212.xhp @@ -56,39 +56,39 @@ DEDR: reviewed Options - + Combine identical entries Replaces identical index entries with a single entry that lists the page numbers where the entry occurs in the document. For example, the entries "View 10, View 43" are combined as "View 10, 43". - + Combine identical entries with p or pp Replaces identical index entries, which occur also on the directly following page or pages, with a single entry that lists the first page number and a "p" or "pp". For example, the entries "View 10, View 11, View 12" are combined as "View 10pp", and "View 10, View 11" as "View 10p". - + Combine with - Replaces identical index entries that occur on consecutive pages with a single entry and the page range where the entry occurs. For example, the entries "View 10, View 11, View 12" are combined as "View 10-12". - + Case sensitive Distinguishes between uppercase and lowercase letters in identical index entries. For Asian languages special handling applies. If you want the first occurrence of the entry in the document to determine the case of the entry, select Combine identical entries. To use multi-level collation to Asian languages, select Case sensitive. In the multi-level collation, the cases and diacritics of the entries are ignored and only the primitive forms of the entries are compared. If the forms are identical, the diacritics of the forms are compared. If the forms are still identical, the cases of the forms as well as the widths of the characters, and the differences in the Japanese Kana are compared.UFI: see #112590# and #112507# - + AutoCapitalize entries Automatically capitalizes the first letter of an index entry. - + Keys as separate entries Inserts index keys as separate index entries. A key is inserted as a top level index entry and the entries that are assigned to the key as indented subentries. To define an index key, choose Insert Index Entry dialog. - + Concordance file Automatically marks index entries using a concordance file - a list of words to include in an index. - + File Select, create, or edit a concordance file.
Sort Sets the options for sorting the index entries. - + Language Select the language rules to use for sorting the index entries. - + Key type Select numeric when you want to sort numbers by value, such as in 1, 2, 12. Select alphanumeric, when you want to sort the numbers by character code, such as in 1, 12, 2.
diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120213.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120213.xhp index 82a6377a6e..ca38e773a0 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120213.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120213.xhp @@ -55,13 +55,13 @@
Create from Specify the information to be combined to form an index. - + Captions Creates index entries from object captions. To add a caption to an object, select the object, and then choose Insert - Caption. - + Category Select the caption category that you want to use for the index entries. - + Display Select the part of the caption that you want to use for index entries. The following table lists the caption options that can be selected, based on the caption text "Illustration 24: The Sun", where "Illustration 24" was automatically generated, and "The Sun" was added by the user.
@@ -100,7 +100,7 @@
If you select "Caption Text", the punctuation and the space at the beginning of the caption does not appear in the index entry. - + Object name Creates index entries from object names. You can view object names in the Navigator, for example, and change them in the context menu.
diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120215.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120215.xhp index 539aee9be7..b05f518ac1 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120215.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120215.xhp @@ -58,19 +58,19 @@ - + Tables Includes tables in the index. - + Graphics Includes graphics in the index. - + Text frames Includes text frames in the index. - + OLE objects Includes OLE objects in the index. - + Use level from source chapter Indents table, graphic, text frame, and OLE object index entries according their place in the chapter heading hierarchy. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120217.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120217.xhp index dd18663a1b..ef30e1dab0 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120217.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120217.xhp @@ -52,10 +52,10 @@ Formatting of the entries - + Number entries Automatically numbers the bibliography entries. To set the sorting options for the numbering, click the Entries tab. - + Brackets Select the brackets that you want to enclose bibliography entries. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120219.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120219.xhp index 72f397111c..c1493f00c5 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120219.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120219.xhp @@ -51,9 +51,9 @@ Styles The list contains the paragraph styles that you can assign to index levels. To create an index entry from a paragraph style, click the style in the Styles list, and then click the >> button to move the style to the index level that you want. - << + << Moves the selected paragraph style up one level in the index hierarchy. - >> + >> Moves the selected paragraph style down one level in the index hierarchy. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120221.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120221.xhp index 539f18bdba..a19381d907 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120221.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120221.xhp @@ -75,42 +75,42 @@
-Chapter number (E#) +Chapter number (E#) Inserts the complete chapter heading, including, if available, the chapter number. To assign chapter numbering to a heading style, choose Tools - Outline Numbering.
-Entry text (E) +Entry text (E) Inserts the text of the chapter heading.
-Tab stop (T) +Tab stop (T) Inserts a tab stop. To add leader dots to the tab stop, select a character in the Fill character box. To change the position of the tab stop, enter a value in the Tab stop position box, or select the Align right check box.
-Page number (#) +Page number (#) Inserts the page number of the entry.
- Hyperlink (LS and LE) + Hyperlink (LS and LE) Creates a hyperlink for the part of the entry that you enclose by the opening (LS) and the closing (LE) hyperlink tags. On the Structure line, click in the empty box in front of the part that you want to create a hyperlink for, and then click this button. Click in the empty box after the part that you want to hyperlink, and then click this button again. All hyperlinks must be unique. Available only for a table of contents. -All +All Applies the current settings without closing the dialog.
-Character Style +Character Style Specify the formatting style for the selected part on the Structure line. -Edit +Edit Opens a dialog where you can edit the selected character style. -Fill character +Fill character Select the tab leader that you want use. -Tab stop position +Tab stop position Enter the distance to leave between the left page margin and the tab stop. -To right margin +To right margin Aligns the tab stop to the right page margin.
-Format +Format Only visible when you click the E# button in the Structure line. Select to show the chapter number with or without separator. -Tab position relative to Paragraph Style indent +Tab position relative to Paragraph Style indent Positions the tab stop relative to the "indent from left" value defined in the paragraph style selected on the Styles tab. Otherwise the tab stop is positioned relative to the left text margin.
diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120222.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120222.xhp index 616e108509..cc1b7473bd 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120222.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120222.xhp @@ -56,23 +56,23 @@
-Chapter Info +Chapter Info Inserts chapter information, such as the chapter heading and number. Select the information that you want to display in the Chapter entry box. -Chapter entry +Chapter entry Select the chapter information that you want to include in the index entry.
-Evaluate up to level +Evaluate up to level Enter the maximum hierarchy level down to which objects are shown in the generated index.
-Character Style for main entries +Character Style for main entries Specify the formatting style for the main entries in the alphabetical index. To convert an index entry into a main entry, click in front of the index field in the document and then choose Edit - Index Entry. -Alphabetical delimiter +Alphabetical delimiter Uses the initial letters of the alphabetically arranged index entries as section headings. -Key separated by commas +Key separated by commas Arranges the index entries on the same line, separated by commas. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120227.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120227.xhp index 39a1b427ca..13f12083c2 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120227.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120227.xhp @@ -53,31 +53,31 @@ The types that are displayed depend on the different literature sources. -Type +Type Lists the available bibliography entries. To add an entry to the Structure line, click the entry, click in an empty box on the Structure line, and then click Insert. Use the Define Bibliography Entry dialog to add new entries. -Insert +Insert Adds the reference code for the selected bibliography entry to the Structure line. Select an entry in the list, click in an empty box, and then click this button. -Remove +Remove Removes the selected reference code from the Structure line. Sort by Specify the sorting options for the bibliography entries. -Document position +Document position Sorts the bibliography entries according to the position of their references in the document. Select this option if you want to use automatically numbered references. -Content +Content Sorts the bibliography entries by the Sort keys that you specify, for example, by author or by year of publication. Sort keys - - -1, 2 or 3 + + +1, 2 or 3 Select the entry by which to sort the bibliography entries. This option is only available if you select the Content radio button in the Sort by area. - - -AZ + + +AZ Sorts the bibliography entries in ascending alphanumerical order. - - -ZA + + +ZA Sorts the bibliography entries in a descending alphanumerical order. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04150000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04150000.xhp index a6124cf2f0..480c30a94b 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04150000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04150000.xhp @@ -67,35 +67,35 @@ dedr: reviewed $[officename] can automatically format numbers that you enter in a table cell, for example, dates and times. To activate this feature, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Table and click the Number recognition check box in the Input in tables area. - + Name Enter a name for the table. Table size Specify the number of columns and rows in the new table. - + Columns Enter the number of columns that you want in the table. - + Rows Enter the number of rows that you want in the table. Options Set the options for the table. - + Heading Includes a heading row in the table. - + Repeat heading Repeats the heading of the table at the top of subsequent page if the table spans more than one page. - + The first ... rows Select the number of rows that you want to use for the heading. - + Do not split the table Prevents the table from spanning more than one page. - + Border Adds a border to the table cells. - + AutoFormat Opens the AutoFormat dialog, where you can select a predefined layout for table. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04180400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04180400.xhp index a08111a05d..b00a8098c7 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04180400.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04180400.xhp @@ -61,12 +61,12 @@ For example, if you inserting address fields in a form letter from an address database, you can then exchange the database with another address database to insert different addresses. Exchanging Databases You can only change one database at a time in this dialog. - + Databases in Use Lists the databases that are currently in use. The current document contains at least one data field from each of the databases in the list.UFI: removed double help id Available Databases Lists the databases that are registered in %PRODUCTNAME. - + Browse Opens a file open dialog to select a database file (*.odb). The selected file is added to the Available Databases list. Define diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04200000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04200000.xhp index dd9057759a..24b81c90cf 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04200000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04200000.xhp @@ -41,7 +41,7 @@ - + Insert Script @@ -52,31 +52,31 @@ An inserted script is indicated by a small green rectangle. If you do not see the rectangle, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer/Web - View, and select the Comments check box. To edit a script, double-click the green rectangle. If your document contains more than one script, the Edit Script dialog contains previous and next buttons to jump from script to script. - + Jump to Previous Script. - + Jump to Next Script. To specify if the script is printed at the end of the page or at the end of the document, choose File - Print - Options, and select the appropriate check box. Contents - + Script Type Enter the type of script that you want to insert. The script is identified in the HTML source code by the tag <SCRIPT LANGUAGE="JavaScript">. - - + + URL Adds a link to a script file. Click the URL radio button, and then enter the link in the box. You can also click the browse button (...), locate the file, and then click Insert. The linked script file is identified in the HTML source code by the following tags: <SCRIPT LANGUAGE="JavaScript" SRC="url"> /* ignore all text here */ </SCRIPT> - + ... Locate the script file that you want to link to, and then click Insert. - - + + Text Enter the script code that you want to insert. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05030200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05030200.xhp index 1b8a1c8037..c14b7c7daf 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05030200.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05030200.xhp @@ -58,52 +58,52 @@ Hyphenation Specify the hyphenation options for text documents. - + Automatically Automatically inserts hyphens where they are needed in a paragraph. - + Characters at line end Enter the minimum number of characters to leave at the end of the line before a hyphen is inserted. - + Characters at line begin Enter the minimum number of characters that must appear at the beginning of the line after the hyphen. - + Maximum no. of consecutive hyphens Enter the maximum number of consecutive lines that can be hyphenated. Breaks Specify the page or column break options. - + InsertUFI: #i30777# Select this check box, and then select the break type that you want to use. - + Type Select the break type that you want to insert. - + Position Select where you want to insert the break. - + With Page Style Select this check box, and then select the page style that you want to use for the first page after the break. - + Page Style Select the formatting style to use for the first page after the break. - + Page number Enter the page number that you want to appear on the first page after the break. If you want to use the current page numbering, select "0". Options Specify the text flow options for paragraphs that appear before and after a page break. - + Do not split paragraph Shifts the entire paragraph to the next page or column after a break is inserted. - + Keep with next paragraph Keeps the current paragraph and the following paragraph together when a break or column break is inserted. - - + + Orphan control Specifies the minimum number of lines in a paragraph before a page break. Select this check box, and then enter a number in the Lines box. If the number of lines at the end of the page is less than the amount specified in the Lines box, the paragraph is shifted to the next page. - - + + Widow control Specifies the minimum number of lines in a paragraph in the first page after the break. Select this check box, and then enter a number in the Lines box. If the number of lines at the top of the page is less than the amount specified in the Lines box, the position of the break is adjusted. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05030400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05030400.xhp index 0d0537e30f..3094727eff 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05030400.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05030400.xhp @@ -58,26 +58,26 @@ Settings - + Show Drop Caps Applies the drop cap settings to the selected paragraph. - + Whole word Displays the first letter of the first word in the paragraph as a drop cap, and the remaining letters of the word as large type. - + Number of characters Enter the number of characters to convert to drop caps. - + Lines Enter the number of lines that you want the drop cap to extend downward from the first line of the paragraph. Shorter paragraphs will not get drop caps. The selection is limited to 2-9 lines. - + Distance from text Enter the amount of space to leave between the drop caps and the rest of the text in the paragraph. Contents - + Text Enter the text that you want to display as drop caps instead of the first letters of the paragraph. - + Character Style Select the formatting style that you want to apply to the drop caps. To use the formatting style of the current paragraph, select [None]. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05030800.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05030800.xhp index a86f45e876..1be997e10e 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05030800.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05030800.xhp @@ -58,38 +58,38 @@ To change the numbering options for selected paragraphs, choose Format -Paragraph, and then click the Outline & Numbering tab. - + Outline level Assigns an outline level from 1 to 10 to the selected paragraphs or Paragraph Style. Select Body text to reset the outline level.removed two old paras - + Numbering Style Select the Numbering Style that you want to apply to the paragraph. These styles are also listed in the Styles and Formatting window if you click the Numbering Style icon. Numbering This section only appears when you edit the properties of the current paragraph by choosing Format - Paragraph. - + Restart at this paragraph Restarts the numbering at the current paragraph. - + Start with Select this check box, and then enter the number that you want to assign to the paragraph. - + "Start with" spin button Enter the number that you want to assign to the paragraph. The following paragraphs are numbered consecutively from the number that you enter here. Line numbering Specify the Line numbering options. To add line numbers to your document, choose Tools - Line Numbering. - + Include this paragraph in line numbering Includes the current paragraph in the line numbering. - + Restart at this paragraph Restarts the line numbering at the current paragraph, or at the number that you enter. - + Start with Enter the number at which to restart the line numbering diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05040500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05040500.xhp index afe66a99ed..4d7737e231 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05040500.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05040500.xhp @@ -57,14 +57,14 @@ Default settings You can select from predefined column layouts, or create your own. When you apply a layout to a page style, all pages that use the style are updated. Similarly, when you apply a column layout to a frame style, all frames that use that style are updated. You can also change the column layout for a single frame. - + Columns Enter the number of columns that you want in the page, frame, or section. You can also select one of the predefined column layouts. Selection fields - + Evenly distribute contents to all columns Distributes the text in multi-column sections. The text flows into all columns to the same height. The height of the section adjusts automatically.Evenly distributes the text in multi-column sections. @@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ (Column number) Displays the column number, as well as width and distance to the adjacent columns. - + Left Arrow Moves the column display one column to the left. @@ -91,7 +91,7 @@ - + Right Arrow Moves the column display one column to the right. @@ -108,17 +108,17 @@ - - - + + + Width Enter the width of the column. - - + + Spacing Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the columns. - + AutoWidth Creates columns of equal width. @@ -127,19 +127,19 @@ Separator line This area is only available if your layout contains more than one column. - + Line Select the formatting style for the column separator line. If you do not want a separator line, choose "None". - + Height Enter the length of the separator line as a percentage of the height of the column area. - + Position Select the vertical alignment of the separator line. This option is only available if Height value of the line is less than 100%. - + Apply to Select the item that you want to apply the column layout to. This option is only available if you access this dialog by choosing Format - Columns. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05040600.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05040600.xhp index 28232c2455..30c269e70d 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05040600.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05040600.xhp @@ -51,35 +51,35 @@ removed a note Footnote area Set the height of the footnote area. - + Not larger than page area Automatically adjusts the height of the footnote area depending on the number of footnotes. - + Maximum Footnote Height Sets a maximum height for the footnote area. Select this check box, and then enter the height. - + Maximum Footnote Height Enter the maximum height for the footnote area. - + Distance from text Enter the amount of space to leave between the bottom page margin and the first line of text in the footnote area. Separator Line Specifies the position and length of the separator line. - + Position Select the horizontal alignment for the line that separates the main text from the footnote area. - + Length Enter the length of the separator line as a percentage of the page width area. - + Weight Select the formatting style for the separator line. If you do not want a separator line, choose "0.0 pt". - + Spacing Enter the amount of space to leave between the separator line and the first line of the footnote area. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05040700.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05040700.xhp index dccac58c23..a94270a8a5 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05040700.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05040700.xhp @@ -53,34 +53,34 @@ This tab is not available in Print Layout view. Footnotes - Collect at end of text + Collect at end of text Adds footnotes at the end of the section. If the section spans more than one page, the footnotes are added to the bottom of the page on which the footnote anchors appear. - Restart numbering + Restart numbering Restarts the footnote numbering at the number that you specify. - Start at + Start at Enter the number that you want to assign the footnote. - Custom format + Custom format Specifies a custom numbering format for footnotes. This check box is only available if the Restart numbering check box is selected. - Before + Before Enter the text that you want to display in front of the footnote number. - Spin button own format + Spin button own format Select the numbering style for the footnotes. - After + After Enter the text that you want to display after the footnote number. Endnotes - Collect at end of section + Collect at end of section Adds endnotes at the end of the section. - Restart numbering + Restart numbering Restarts the endnote numbering at the number that you specify. - Start at + Start at Enter the number that you want to assign the endnote. - Custom format + Custom format Specifies a custom numbering format for endnotes. This check box is only available if you the Restart numbering check box is selected. - Before + Before Enter the text that you want to display in front of the endnote number - Spin button own format + Spin button own format Select the numbering style for the endnotes. - After + After Enter the text that you want to display after the endnote number. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05040800.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05040800.xhp index 15c0aa7e57..04c550035f 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05040800.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05040800.xhp @@ -51,30 +51,30 @@
- - - + + + Grid Adds or removes a text grid for lines or characters to the current page style. Grid layout - + Lines per page Enter the maximum number of lines that you want on a page. - + Characters per line Enter the maximum number of characters that you want on a line. - + Max. base text size Enter the maximum base text size. A large value results in less characters per line. - + Max. Ruby text size Enter the font size for the Ruby text. - + Ruby text below/left from base text Displays Ruby text to the left of or below the base text. - - - + + + Grid display Specifies the printing and color options of the text grid. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060100.xhp index 8136edad04..ab10faa3aa 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060100.xhp @@ -58,86 +58,86 @@ YJ:checked Size - - + + Width Enter the width that you want for the selected object. - + Relative Calculates the width of the selected object as a percentage of the width of the page text area. - - + + Height Enter the height that you want for the selected object. - + Relative Calculates the height of the selected object as a percentage of the height of the page text area. - - + + Keep ratio Maintains the height and width ratio when you change the width or the height setting. - + Original Size Resets the size settings of the selected object to the original values. This option is not available for frames. - - + + Automatic Automatically adjusts the width or height of a frame to match the contents of the frame. If you want, you can specify a minimum width or minimum height for the frame. The Automatic option is only available when you select a frame. Anchor Specify the anchoring options for the selected object or frame. The anchor options are not available when you open the dialog from the Styles and Formatting window. - - + + To page Anchors the selection to the current page. - - + + To paragraph Anchors the selection to the current paragraph. - - + + To character Anchors the selection to a character. - - + + As character Anchors the selection as character. The height of the current line is resized to match the height of the selection. Position Specify the location of the selected object on the current page. - - + + Horizontal Select the horizontal alignment option for the object. This option is not available if you chose "anchor as character". - - + + by Enter the amount of space to leave between the left edge of the selected object and the reference point that you select in the To box. This option is only available if you select "From Left" in the Horizontal box. - - + + to Select the reference point for the selected horizontal alignment option. You can see the result of the alignments options that you select in the Preview box. - - + + Mirror on even pages Reverses the current horizontal alignment settings on even pages. You can also use the Graphics flip options to adjust the layout of objects on even and odd pages. - - + + Vertical Select the vertical alignment option for the object. If you anchor an object to a frame with a fixed height, only the "Bottom" and "Center" alignment options are available. - - + + by Enter the amount of space to leave between the top edge of the selected object and the reference point that you select in the To box. This option is only available if you select "From Top" or "From Bottom" (as character) in the Vertical box. - - + + to Select the reference point for the selected vertical alignment option. - - + + Follow text flow Keeps the selected object within the layout boundaries of the text that the object is anchored to. To place the selected object anywhere in your document, do not select this option. By default, the Follow text flow option is selected when you open a document that was created in a version of %PRODUCTNAME older than %PRODUCTNAME %PRODUCTVERSION. However, this option is not selected when you create a document or when you open a document in Microsoft Word format (*.doc). diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060200.xhp index eb2b20aa50..5569f0b3e1 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060200.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060200.xhp @@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ Settings - + None Places the object on a separate line in the document. The Text in the document appears above and below the object, but not on the sides of the object. @@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ - + Before Wraps text on the left side of the object if there is enough space. @@ -90,7 +90,7 @@
- + After Wraps text on the right side of the object if there is enough space. @@ -107,7 +107,7 @@
- + Parallel Wraps text on all four sides of the border frame of the object. @@ -127,7 +127,7 @@ - + Through Places the object in front of the text. @@ -144,7 +144,7 @@ - + Optimal @@ -165,39 +165,39 @@ Options Specify the text wrap options. - + First Paragraph Starts a new paragraph below the object after you press Enter. The space between the paragraphs is determined by the size of the object. - + In Background Moves the selected object to the background. This option is only available if you selected the Through wrap type. - + Contour Wraps text around the shape of the object. This option is not available for the Through wrap type, or for frames. To change the contour of an object, select the object, and then choose Format - Wrap - Edit Contour. - + Only outside Wraps text only around the contour of the object, but not in open areas within the object shape. This option is not available for frames. Gaps Specify the amount of space to leave between the selected object and the text. - + Left Enter the amount of space that you want between the left edge of the object and the text. - + Right Enter the amount of space that you want between the right edge of the object and the text. - + Top Enter the amount of space that you want between the top edge of the object and the text. - + Bottom Enter the amount of space that you want between the bottom edge of the object and the text. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060201.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060201.xhp index 6f29d8bf06..94fd11e665 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060201.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060201.xhp @@ -43,7 +43,7 @@ - + Contour Editor @@ -278,7 +278,7 @@ - + Tolerance Enter the color tolerance for the eyedropper as a percentage. To increase the color range that the eyedropper selects, enter a high percentage.
diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060300.xhp index 77cf43fec7..809cb9ad5d 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060300.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060300.xhp @@ -54,32 +54,32 @@ Flip - + Verticallysee bug 106420;Writer uses VERT for HOR and HORZ for VERT Flips the selected graphic vertically. - + Horizontally Flips the selected graphic horizontally. - + On all pages Flips the selected graphic horizontally on all pages. - + On left pages Flips the selected graphic horizontally only on even pages. - + On right pages Flips the selected graphic horizontally only on odd pages. Link Inserts the graphic as a link. - + File name Displays the path to the linked graphic file. To change the link, click the browse button (...) and then locate the file that you want to link to. - + ... Locate the new graphic file that you want to link to, and then click Open. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060700.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060700.xhp index a06a58cd00..467d52abdb 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060700.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060700.xhp @@ -46,7 +46,7 @@
- + Macro Specifies the macro to run when you click a graphic, frame, or an OLE object.
@@ -382,12 +382,12 @@ Macro name Lists the available macros. Select the macro that you want to assign to the selected event, and then click Assign. - - + + Assign Assigns the selected macro to the selected event. - - + + Remove Removes the macro assignment from the selected entry. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060800.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060800.xhp index ff638acd8e..adefef293e 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060800.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060800.xhp @@ -56,27 +56,27 @@
Link to Set the link properties. - + URL Enter the complete path to the file that you want to open. - + Browse Locate the file that you want the hyperlink to open, and then click Open. The target file can be on your machine or on an FTP server in the Internet. - + Name Enter a name for the hyperlink. - + Frame Specify the name of the frame where you want to open the targeted file. The predefined target frame names are described here. Image Map Select the type of ImageMap that you want to use. The ImageMap settings override the hyperlink settings that you enter on this page. - + Server-side image map Uses a server-side image map. - + Client-side image map Uses the image map that you created for the selected object. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060900.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060900.xhp index 09e5079d3d..12ca3a06eb 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060900.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060900.xhp @@ -52,43 +52,43 @@ Name Specifies the name of the selected item, and associated links. - + Name Enter a name for the selected item. Assign an object, graphic or frame a meaningful name, so that you can quickly locate it afterwards in long documents. - + Alternative text (floating frames, graphics, and objects only) Enter the text to display in a web browser when the selected item is unavailable. Alternate text is also used to assist people with disabilities. - - + + Previous link Displays the item (object, graphic, or frame) that comes before the current item in a linked sequence. To add or change the previous link, select a name from the list. If you are linking frames, the current frame and the target frame must be empty. - - + + Next link Displays the item (object, graphic, or frame) that comes after the current item in a linked sequence. To add or change the next link, select a name from the list. If you are a linking frames, the target frame must be empty. Protect Specifies protection options for the selected item. - + Protect Contents Prevents changes to the contents of the selected item. You can still copy the contents of the selected item. - + Protect Position Locks the position of the selected item in the current document. - + Protect Size Locks the size of the selected item. Properties Specifies print and text options for the selected item. - + Editable in read-only document (frames only) Allows you to edit the contents of a frame in a document that is read-only (write-protected). - + Print Includes the selected item when you print the document. - + Text flow Specifies the preferred text flow direction in a frame. To use the default text flow settings for the page, select Use superordinate object settings from the list. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05090100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05090100.xhp index a67ba9d5f6..48df8f71bc 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05090100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05090100.xhp @@ -57,46 +57,46 @@ Properties - + Name Enter an internal name for the table. You can use this name to quickly locate the table in the Navigator. - + Width Enter the width of the table. This check box is only available if the Automatic option in the Alignment area is not selected. - + Relative Displays the width of the table as a percentage of the page width. Alignment Set the alignment options for the selected table. - + Automatic Extends the table horizontally to the left and to the right page margins. This is the recommended setting for tables in HTML documents. - + Left Aligns the left edge of the table to the left page margin. - + Left margin Aligns the left edge of the table to the indent that you enter in the Left box in the Spacing area. - + Right Aligns the right edge of the table to the right page margin. - + Centered Centers the table horizontally on the page. - + Manual Horizontally aligns the table based on the values that you enter in the Left and Right boxes in the Spacing area. $[officename] automatically calculates the table width. Select this option if you want to specify the individual column widths. Spacing - + Left Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the left page margin and the edge of the table. This option is not available if the Automatic or the Left option is selected in the Alignment area. - + Right Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the right page margin and the edge of the table. This option is not available if the Automatic or the Right option is selected in the Alignment area. - + Above Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the top edge of the table and the text above the table. - + Below Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the bottom edge of the table and the text below the table. To insert a paragraph before a table at the beginning of a document, header or footer, place the cursor before any content in the first cell, and then press Enter. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05090200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05090200.xhp index 4aec33bfc4..d237dcc5d9 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05090200.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05090200.xhp @@ -50,29 +50,29 @@
- + Adapt table width Maintains the current width of the table when you change the width of a column. This option is not available if Automatic is selected in the Alignment area on the Table tab. - + Adjust columns proportionally Resizes the table width in relation to the column width that you enter. This option is not available if Automatic is selected in the Alignment area on the Table tab. - + Remaining space Displays the amount of space that is available for adjusting the width of the columns. To set the width of the table, click the Table tab. Column width Specify the column widths for the table. - - - - - - + + + + + + Column widths Enter the width that you want for the column. - + Left Arrow Displays the table columns found to the left of the current column. - + Right Arrow Displays the table columns found to the right of the current column. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05090300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05090300.xhp index 13eee1d961..915dd9ec6e 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05090300.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05090300.xhp @@ -62,31 +62,31 @@ UFI: sw.features "Vertical formatting of individual table cells"; dedr: reviewed Text flow - + Break Select this check box, and then select the type of break that you want to associate with the table. - + Page Inserts a page break before or after the table. - + Column Inserts a column break before or after the table on a multi-column page. - + Before Inserts a page or column break before the table. - + After Inserts a page or column break after the table. - + With Page Style Applies the page style that you specify to the first page that follows the page break. - + Page Style Select the page style that you want to apply to the first page that follows the break. - + Page number Enter the page number for the first page that follows the break. - + Allow table to split across pages and columns Allows a page break or column break between the rows of a table. @@ -94,13 +94,13 @@ UFI: sw.features "Vertical formatting of individual table cells"; dedr: reviewed Allow row to break across pages and columns Allows a page break or column break inside a row of the table. This option is not applied to the first row in a table if the Repeat Heading option is selected. - + Keep with next paragraph Keeps the table and the following paragraph together when you insert the break. - + Repeat heading Repeats the table heading on a new page when the table spans more than one page. - + The first ... rows Enter the number of rows to include in the heading. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05110100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05110100.xhp index a2a90b069a..cd764474df 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05110100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05110100.xhp @@ -51,10 +51,10 @@
- + Height Enter the height that you want for the selected row(s). - + Fit to size Automatically adjusts the row height to match the contents of the cells. You can also right-click in a cell, and then choose Row - Optimal Height. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05120100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05120100.xhp index 44a642b355..216211e6ce 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05120100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05120100.xhp @@ -54,10 +54,10 @@ Width - + Columns Enter the column number of the column you want to change the width of. - + Width Enter the width that you want for the selected column(s).removed 2 sentences, see #i64155 diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05120400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05120400.xhp index 34a478c61e..e130569bba 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05120400.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05120400.xhp @@ -49,22 +49,22 @@ Inserts a column into the table. - + Insert Columns/Rows Inserts a row or column into the table. This command is only available when the cursor is in a table.
- + Insert Enter the number of columns or rows that you want. Position Specifies where to insert the columns or rows. - + Before Adds new columns to the left of the current column, or adds new rows above the current row. - + After Adds new columns to the right of the current column, or adds new rows below the current row. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05130000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05130000.xhp index a5efdaacd2..9990f074f5 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05130000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05130000.xhp @@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ DEDR: Reviewed The following information concerns Writer styles that you can apply using the Styles and Formatting window. If you want, you can edit the styles of the current document, and then save the document as a template. To save the document as template, choose File - Templates - Save. - + Style Category These are the different categories of formatting styles. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05130100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05130100.xhp index b14c635c2b..f9d2a1d779 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05130100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05130100.xhp @@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ The header text now has the attributes you specified in the Header Paragraph Style, while the other parts of the document have the attributes defined in the business letter conditional Paragraph Style.The "Text body" Style was created as a conditional style. Therefore, any styles you derive from it can be used as conditional styles.The Paragraph Style applied to the context is used when exporting to other formats (RTF, HTML, and so on). - + Conditional style Check this box to define a new style as a conditional style. @@ -84,14 +84,14 @@ Here you can see the $[officename] predefined contexts, including outline levels 1 to 10, numbering/bullets levels 1 to 10, table header, table contents, section, border, footnote, header and footer. Applied Style Here you can see the list of all Paragraph Styles applied to a context. - + Styles A list of all Paragraph Styles which can be assigned to a context is contained in the list box. - + Remove Click here to remove the current context assigned to the selected style. - + Assign Click Assign to apply the selected Paragraph Style to the defined context. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05150101.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05150101.xhp index 952a46e109..52ec977d9d 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05150101.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05150101.xhp @@ -70,10 +70,10 @@ Click OK. - + Format Lists the available formatting styles for tables. Click the format that you want to apply, and then click OK. - + Add Adds a new table style to the list. @@ -90,30 +90,30 @@ In the Add AutoFormat dialog, enter a name, and then click OK. - + Delete Deletes the selected table style. - + More Displays more formatting options for tables. Click again to hide the options. Formatting Select the formatting attributes that you to include in the selected table style. - + Number format Includes numbering formats in the selected table style. - + Font Includes font formatting in the selected table style. - + Alignment Includes alignment settings in the selected table style. - + Border Includes border styles in the selected table style. - + Pattern Includes background styles in the selected table style. - + Rename Changes the name of the selected table style. You cannot rename the "Standard" table style. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05150104.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05150104.xhp index 827dde4af8..0d92607832 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05150104.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05150104.xhp @@ -44,8 +44,8 @@ Combine - - + + Minimum Size Enter the minimum length for combining single-lined paragraphs as a percentage of the page width. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05170000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05170000.xhp index f412ef0ae3..728bd38b09 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05170000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05170000.xhp @@ -51,35 +51,35 @@
- + Categories Lists the available template categories. Click a category to view its contents in the Templates list. - + Templates Lists the available templates for the selected category. - + Text Loads the paragraph and the character styles from the selected document into the current document. - + Frame Loads the frame styles from the selected document into the current document. - + Page Loads the page styles from the selected document into the current document. - + Numbering Loads the numbering styles from the selected document into the current document. - + Overwrite Replaces styles in the current document that have the same name as the styles you are loading. Styles with identical names are automatically overwritten. - + From file Locate the file containing the styles that you want to load, and then click Open. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05190000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05190000.xhp index c6776c8197..072a48f34c 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05190000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05190000.xhp @@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ - + Split Table Splits the current table into two separate tables at the cursor position. You can also access this command by right-clicking in a table cell. @@ -58,16 +58,16 @@ Mode - + Copy heading Includes the first row of the original table as the first row of the second table. - + Custom heading (apply style) Inserts a blank header row in the second table that is formatted with the style of the first row in the original table. - + Custom heading Inserts an additional blank row in the second table. - + No heading Splits the table without copying the header row. When you split a table that contains formulas, the formulas may be affected. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05200000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05200000.xhp index b8eeaa0596..9a177a2609 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05200000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05200000.xhp @@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ - + Merge Table Combines two consecutive tables into a single table. The tables must be directly next to each other and not separated by an empty paragraph. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06030000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06030000.xhp index 398ddbb768..3d950d5c6f 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06030000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06030000.xhp @@ -75,20 +75,20 @@ +Ctrl +Minus sign(-). To hide custom hyphens, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids, and then clear the Custom hyphens check box. Word - + Word Displays the hyphenation suggestion(s) for the selected word. - - + + Left / Right Arrow Set the position of the hyphen. This option is only available if more than one hyphenation suggestion is displayed. - + Next Ignores the hyphenation suggestion and finds the next word to hyphenate. Hyphenate Inserts the hyphen at the indicated position. - + Remove Rejects the hyphenation suggestion. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06060000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06060000.xhp index 5404c2286c..7f39f93209 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06060000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06060000.xhp @@ -63,8 +63,8 @@ Select the predefined numbering style that you want to assign to the selected outline level. Save As Opens a dialog where you can save the current settings for the selected outline level. You can then load these settings from another document. - -Save As + +Save As Click a numbering style in the list, and then enter a name for the style. The numbers correspond to the outline level that the styles are assigned to. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06060100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06060100.xhp index 96529d02fd..244d04e54f 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06060100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06060100.xhp @@ -50,15 +50,15 @@
- + Level Click the outline level that you want to modify, and then specify the numbering options for the level. To apply the numbering options, except for the paragraph style, to all of the levels, click "1-10". Numbering Specify the formatting for the select outline level. - + Paragraph Style Select the paragraph style that you want to assign to the selected outline level. If you click "None", the selected outline level is not defined. - + Number Select the numbering style that you want to apply to the selected outline level.
@@ -140,19 +140,19 @@
- + Character Style Select the format of the numbering character. - + Show sublevels Select the number of outline levels to include in the chapter numbering. For example, select "3" to display three levels of chapter numbering: 1.1.1 - + Separator Before Enter the text that you want to display before the chapter number. For example, type "Chapter " to display "Chapter 1". - + Separator After Enter the text that you want to display after the chapter number. For example, type a period (.) to display "1." - + Start at Enter the number that you want to restart the chapter numbering at. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06080100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06080100.xhp index 5d16ca061d..8182a5f6bf 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06080100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06080100.xhp @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ To set additional option for footnotes and endnotes, choose Format - Page, and then click the Footnote tab. AutoNumbering - + Numbering
Select the numbering style that you want to use for footnotes or endnotes. @@ -125,7 +125,7 @@
- + Counting Select the numbering option for the footnotes. @@ -163,44 +163,44 @@
- + Start at Enter the number for the first footnote in the document. This option is only available if you selected "Per Document" in the Counting box. - + Before Enter the text that you want to display in front of the footnote number in the note text. For example, type "To " to display "To 1". - + After Enter the text that you want to display after the footnote number in the note text. For example, type ")" to display "1)". Position - + End of page Displays footnotes at the bottom of the page. - + End of document Displays footnotes at the end of the document as endnotes. Styles To ensure a uniform appearance for the footnotes in your document, assign a paragraph style to the footnotes. - + Paragraph Select the paragraph style for the footnote text. - + Page Select the page style that you want to use for footnotes. This option is only available if the End of Document check box is selected in the Position area. Character Styles You can assign styles to footnote anchors and text. You can use the predefined footnote styles, or use a different style. - + Text area Select the character style that you want to use for footnote anchors in the text area of your document. - + Footnote area Select the character style that you want to use for the footnote numbers in the footnote area. Continuation notice - + End of Footnote Enter the text that you want to display when the footnotes are continued on the next page, for example, "Continued on Page ". $[officename] Writer automatically inserts the number of the following page. - + Start of next page Enter the text that you want to display on the page where the footnotes are continued, for example, "Continued from Page ". $[officename] Writer automatically inserts the number of the previous page. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06080200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06080200.xhp index e30227c66b..1d0301dbfe 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06080200.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06080200.xhp @@ -51,32 +51,32 @@
- + AutoNumbering - + Start at Enter the number for the first endnote in the document. This is useful if want the endnote numbering to span more than one document. - + Before Enter the text that you want to display in front of the endnote number in the note text. For example, type "re: " to display "re: 1". - + After Enter the text that you want to display after the endnote number in the note text. For example, type ")" to display "1)". Styles To ensure a uniform appearance for the endnotes in your document, assign a paragraph style to the footnotes. - + Paragraph Select the paragraph style for the endnote text. - + Page Select the page style that you want to use for endnotes. Character Styles You can assign styles to endnote anchors and text. You can use the predefined endnote styles, or use a different style. - + Text area Select the character style that you want to use for endnote anchors in the text area of your document. - + Endnote area Select the character style that you want to use for the endnote numbers in the endnote area. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06090000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06090000.xhp index 18beb3247a..cb5b82f02f 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06090000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06090000.xhp @@ -56,41 +56,41 @@ The options available in this dialog depending on the type of conversion. Separate text at A separator, such as a tab, marks the column boundaries in the selected text. Each paragraph in the selection is converted into a row in the table. Similarly, when you convert a table into text, the column markers are changed to the character that you specify, and each row is converted into a separate paragraph. - + Tabs Converts the text to a table using tabs as column markers. - + Semicolons Converts the text to a table using semi-colons (;) as column markers. - + Paragraph Converts the text to a table using paragraphs as column markers. - + Other: Converts the text to a table using the character that you type in the box as a column marker. - + Text box Type the character that you want to use as a column marker. - + Equal width for all columns Creates columns of equal width, regardless of the position of the column marker. - + AutoCorrect Options - + Heading Formats the first row of the new table as a heading. - + Repeat heading Repeats the table header on each page that the table spans. - + The first ... rows Repeats the first n rows as a header. - + Don't split table Does not divide the table across pages. - + Border Adds a border to the table and the table cells. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06100000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06100000.xhp index c8f05fc716..52b77d9701 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06100000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06100000.xhp @@ -59,65 +59,65 @@ Sort criteria - - - + + + Keys 1 to 3 Specifies additional sorting criteria. You can also combine sort keys. - - - + + + Column 1 to 3 Enter the number of the table column that you want to use as a basis for sorting.removed a para - - - + + + Key type 1 to 3 Select the sorting option that you want to use. Order Ascending - - - + + + Sorts in ascending order, (for example, 1, 2, 3 or a, b, c). - - - + + + Descending Sorts in descending order (for example, 9, 8, 7 or z, y, x). Direction - + Columns Sorts the columns in the table according to the current sort options. - + Rows Sorts the rows in the table or the paragraphs in the selection according to the current sort options. Separator Paragraphs are separated by nonprinting paragraph marks. You can also specify that tabs or a character act as separators when you sort paragraphs. - + Tabs If the selected paragraphs correspond to a list separated by tabs, select this option. - - + + Character Enter the character that you want to use as a separator in the selected area. By using the separator, $[officename] can determine the position of the sorting key in the selected paragraph. - + ... Opens the Special Characters dialog, where you can select the character that you want to use as a separator. - + Language Select the language that defines the sorting rules. Some languages sort special characters differently than other languages. - + Match case Distinguishes between uppercase and lowercase letters when you sort a table. For Asian languages special handling applies. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06180000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06180000.xhp index 4b6ea9109c..c9afb997e8 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06180000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06180000.xhp @@ -54,44 +54,44 @@
- + Show numbering Adds line numbers to the current document. View Set the properties of the line numbering. - + Character Style Select the formatting style that you want to use for the line numbers. - + Format Select the numbering style that you want to use. - + Position Select where you want the line numbers to appear. - + Spacing Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the line numbers and the text. - + Interval Enter the counting interval for the line numbers. Separator You can enter a separator character to display between line numbers if the counting interval is more than one. - + Text Enter the text that you want to use as a separator. - + Every Enter the number of lines to leave between the separators. Separators are only displayed in lines that are not numbered. Count Specify whether to include empty paragraphs or lines in text frames in the line count. - + Blank lines Includes empty paragraphs in the line count. - + Lines in text frames Adds line numbers to text in text frames. The numbering restarts in each text frame, and is excluded from the line count in the main text area of the document. In linked frames, the numbering is not restarted. - + Restart every new page Restarts line numbering at the top of each page in the document. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge00.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge00.xhp index 2f9ee0a09f..304c299865 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge00.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge00.xhp @@ -44,7 +44,7 @@
- + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge01.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge01.xhp index 5d200b7e95..649b44776c 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge01.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge01.xhp @@ -47,28 +47,28 @@ Mail Merge Wizard - Starting Document Specify the document that you want to use as a base for the mail merge document.
- + Use the current document Uses the current Writer document as the base for the mail merge document. - + Create a new document Creates a new Writer document to use for the mail merge. - + Start from existing document Select an existing Writer document to use as the base for the mail merge document. - + Browse Locate the Writer document that you want too use, and then click Open. - + Start from a template Select the template that you want to create your mail merge document with. - + Browse Opens the Templates and Documents dialog. - + Start from a recently saved starting document Use an existing mail merge document as the base for a new mail merge document. - + Select the document. Mail Merge Wizard - Document type diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge02.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge02.xhp index f6e661876f..1c69f3628b 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge02.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge02.xhp @@ -47,10 +47,10 @@ Mail Merge Wizard - Document Type Specify the type of mail merge document to create. -Letter +Letter Creates a printable mail merge document. E-mail message -Creates mail merge documents that you can send as an e-mail message or an e-mail attachment. This feature needs Java Mail. If Java Mail is not installed, you can download the software from http://java.sun.com/products/javamail/. +Creates mail merge documents that you can send as an e-mail message or an e-mail attachment. This feature needs Java Mail. If Java Mail is not installed, you can download the software from http://java.sun.com/products/javamail/. Mail Merge Wizard - Addresses diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge03.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge03.xhp index 1bf18337f8..7544c6627f 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge03.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge03.xhp @@ -51,25 +51,25 @@ The Mail Merge wizard opens to this page if you start the wizard in a text document that already contains address database fields. If the wizard opens directly to this page, the Select address list button is called Select different address list. The title of this page is Address block for letters and Address list for e-mail messages. - + Select address list Opens the Select Address List dialog, where you can choose a data source for the addresses, add new addresses, or type in a new address list. When you edit some records in a Calc spreadsheet data source that is currently in use for a mail merge, those changes are not visible in the mail merge.ufi: see i9899 - + This document shall contain an address block Adds an address block to the mail merge document. Select the address block layout that you want to use. - + Suppress lines with just empty fields Enable to leave empty lines out of the address. - + More Opens the Select Address Block dialog. - + Match fields Opens the Match Fields dialog. - - + + (Browse buttons) Use the browse buttons to preview the information from the previous or next data record. Mail Merge Wizard - Create a salutation diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge04.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge04.xhp index da6a588ec9..d68e330aec 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge04.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge04.xhp @@ -49,40 +49,40 @@ Mail Merge Wizard - Create a Salutation Specify the properties for the salutation. If the mail merge database contains gender information, you can specify different salutations based on the gender of the recipient. - + This document should contain a salutation Adds a salutation. - + Insert personalized salutation Adds a personalized salutation to the mail merge document. To use the default salutation, clear this check box. - + Female Select the personalized greeting for a female recipient. - + New Opens the Custom Salutation (Female recipient) dialog. - + Male Select the personalized greeting for a male recipient. - + New Opens the Custom Salutation (Male recipient) dialog. - + Field name Select the field name of the address database field that contains the gender information. - + Field value Select the field value that indicates the gender of the recipient. - + General salutation Select the default salutation that is used when you do not specify a personalized salutation. Preview Displays a preview of the salutation. - + Match fields Opens the Match Fields dialog. - - + + (Browse buttons) Use the browse buttons to preview the information from the previous or next data record. Mail Merge Wizard - Adjust layout diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge05.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge05.xhp index 2b28d16aa7..38d636d4ac 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge05.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge05.xhp @@ -49,22 +49,22 @@ Mail Merge Wizard - Adjust Layout Specify the position of the address blocks and salutations on the documents. - + Align to text body Aligns the frame that contains the address block to the left page margin. - + From left Enter the amount of space to leave between the left edge of the page and the left edge of the address block. - + From top Enter the amount of space to leave between the top edge of the page and the top edge of the address block. - + Up Moves the salutation up. - + Down Moves the salutation down. - + Zoom Select a magnification for the page preview. Use the commands in the context menu of the preview to move the view up and down. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge06.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge06.xhp index 205d2c190e..c712694f6e 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge06.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge06.xhp @@ -49,18 +49,18 @@ Mail Merge Wizard - Edit Document Browse through the document previews, exclude single recipients, and edit the main document. - + Recipient Enter the address record number of a recipient to preview the mail merge document for the recipient. - - - - + + + + Use the browse buttons to scroll through the address records. - + Exclude this recipient Excludes the current recipient from this mail merge. - + Edit Document Minimizes the wizard so that you can edit the main mail merge document for all recipients. To return to the wizard, click the Return to Mail Merge Wizard button. Mail Merge Wizard - Personalize document diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge07.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge07.xhp index 8a9f167e94..8118a32b65 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge07.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge07.xhp @@ -48,22 +48,22 @@ Edit documents for each recipient. The Mail Merge Wizard creates a single merged document with page breaks between each recipient. When you reach this page of the wizard, the names and the addresses of the recipients are contained in the document. - + Edit individual document Minimizes the wizard so that you can edit the mail merge document for a single recipient. After you made your changes, click the Return to Mail Merge Wizard button. - + Search for Enter the text that you want to search for in the merged document, for example, the name of a recipient. - + Find Click to start the search. - + Whole words only Searches for whole words only and not parts of larger words. - + Backwards Searches from the current cursor position to the top of the document. - + Match case Distinguishes between uppercase and lowercase characters in the search. Mail Merge Wizard - Save, print or send diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge08.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge08.xhp index 6dcf28af96..419d4cf27c 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge08.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge08.xhp @@ -50,74 +50,74 @@ Specifies the output options for mail merge documents. The appearance of this page depends on the option that you select. After you specify the settings, click Finish to exit the wizard. - + Save starting document Saves the starting document that contains the database fields. - + Save starting document Saves the current document. - + Save merged document Saves the merged document. - + Save as single document Saves the merged document as a single file. - + Save as individual documents Saves the merged document as a separate file for each recipient. The file names of the documents are constructed from the name that you enter, followed by an underscore, and the number of the current record. - + From Selects a range of records starting at the record number in the From box and ending at the record number in the To box. UFI: used for saving and printing - + From Enter the number of the first record to include in the mail merge.UFI: also used for printing - + To Enter the number of the last record to include in the mail merge.UFI: also used for printing - + Save Documents Saves the documents. - + Print merged document Prints the output for all or some recipients. - + Printer Select the printer. - + Properties Changes the printer properties. - + Print all documents Prints documents for all recipients. - + Print Documents Prints the mail merge documents. - + Send merged document as e-mail Sends the output as e-mail messages to all recipients. - + To Select the database field that contains the e-mail address of the recipient. - + Copy to Opens the Copy To dialog where you can specify one or more CC or BCC addresses. - + Subject Enter the subject line for the e-mail messages. - + Send as Select the mail format for the e-mail messages. The Plain text and HTML message formats are sent in the body of the message, whereas the *.odt, *.doc, and *.pdf formats are sent as attachments. - + Properties Opens the E-Mail Message dialog where you can enter the e-mail message for the mail merge files that are sent as attachments. - + Name of the attachment Shows the name of the attachment. - + Send all documents Select to send e-mails to all recipients. - + Send Documents Click to start sending e-mails. Mail Merge Wizard diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_copyto.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_copyto.xhp index 9f857d0ad8..cb15bf35e7 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_copyto.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_copyto.xhp @@ -45,10 +45,10 @@ Copy To Specify additional e-mail recipients for the mail merge document. - + CC Enter the recipients of e-mail copies, separated by a semicolon (;). - + BCC Enter the recipients of e-mail blind copies, separated by a semicolon (;). diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_cusgrelin.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_cusgrelin.xhp index 9300b12d56..2d52177958 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_cusgrelin.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_cusgrelin.xhp @@ -48,24 +48,24 @@ Salutation elements Select a field and drag the field to the other list. - + > Adds the selected field from the list of salutation elements to the other list. You can add a field more than once. - + < Removes the selected field from the other list. - + Drag salutation elements into the box below Arrange the fields by drag-and-drop or use the arrow buttons. - + Customize salutation Select a value from the list for the salutation and the punctuation mark fields. Preview Displays a preview of the first database record with the current salutation layout. - - - - + + + + (Arrow Buttons) Select an item in the list and click an arrow button to move the item. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_emabod.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_emabod.xhp index 7c9b313def..4a74408a41 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_emabod.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_emabod.xhp @@ -45,34 +45,34 @@ E-Mail Message Type the message and the salutation for files that you send as e-mail attachments. - + This e-mail should contain a salutation Adds a salutation to the e-mail. - + Insert personalized salutation Adds a personalized salutation. To use the default salutation, clear this check box. - + Female Select the personalized greeting for a female recipient. - + New Opens the Custom Salutation dialog for a female recipient. - + Male Select the personalized greeting for a male recipient. - + New Opens the Custom Salutation dialog for a male recipient. - + Field name Select the field name of the address database field that contains the gender information. - + Field value Select the field value that indicates the gender of the recipient. - + General salutation Select the default greeting to use if a personalized salutation cannot be created. - + Write your message here Enter the main text of the e-mail. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_seladdblo.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_seladdblo.xhp index 7155c816cd..d602be2045 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_seladdblo.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_seladdblo.xhp @@ -47,24 +47,24 @@ Select, edit, or delete an address block layout for mail merge. Select the address block which you want to use Select the block in the list that you want to use for mail merge addresses, and click OK. - + Never include country/region Excludes country or regional information from the address block. - + Always include country/region Includes country or regional information in the address block. - + Only include country/region if it is not: Only includes country or regional information in the address block if the value differs from the value that you enter in the text box. - + Enter the country/region string that shall not be printed. - + New Opens the New Address Block dialog where you can define a new address block layout. - + Edit Opens the New Address Block dialog where you can edit the selected address block layout. - + Delete Deletes the selected address block layout. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_seladdlis.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_seladdlis.xhp index b76795837b..89dfc47c21 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_seladdlis.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_seladdlis.xhp @@ -48,19 +48,19 @@ ufi: added help id for the table control, else the Help button does not work Select Address List Select the address list that you want to use for mail merge, then click OK. - + Add Select the database file that contains the addresses that you want to use as an address list. If the file contains more than one table, the Select Table dialog opens. - + Create Opens the New Address List dialog, where you can create a new address list. - + Filter Opens the Standard Filter dialog , where you can apply filters to the address list to display the recipients that you want to see. - + Edit Opens the New Address List dialog, where you can edit the selected address list. - + Change Table Opens the Select Table dialog, where you can select another table to use for mail merge. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_seltab.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_seltab.xhp index f15b12e813..438b1673b0 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_seltab.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_seltab.xhp @@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ Select Table Select the table that you want to use for mail merge addresses. -Preview +Preview Opens the Mail Merge Recipients dialog. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/selection_mode.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/selection_mode.xhp index d81ed59a5d..155b016afc 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/selection_mode.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/selection_mode.xhp @@ -44,13 +44,13 @@
-Selection Mode +Selection Mode Choose the selection mode from the submenu: normal selection mode, or block selection mode.
-In normal selection mode, you can select multi-line text including the line ends. -In block selection mode, you can select a rectangular block of text. +In normal selection mode, you can select multi-line text including the line ends. +In block selection mode, you can select a rectangular block of text. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/10070000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/10070000.xhp index a1b689e0d3..622046982c 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/10070000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/10070000.xhp @@ -44,7 +44,7 @@
- + @@ -66,9 +66,9 @@
After clicking the Page Preview: Multiple Pages icon, the Multiple pages dialog opens. Use the two spin buttons to set the number of pages to be displayed. -Rows +Rows Defines the number of rows of pages. -Columns +Columns Defines the number of pages shown in columns. The settings you choose in the dialog can also be set using the mouse: Click the arrow next to the Page Preview: Multiple Pages icon. Now move the mouse over the desired number of rows and columns. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/10110000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/10110000.xhp index 8ffaf38e29..9f6744d3fd 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/10110000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/10110000.xhp @@ -68,33 +68,33 @@ Distribution Determines the number of rows and columns to print, as well as the print size. You can also choose to print several document pages on one printed page. - Rows + Rows Defines the number of rows of pages (horizontally stacked document pages). - Columns + Columns Defines the number of pages shown in columns (vertically tiled document pages). Margins The print margins can be determined in this area. - Left + Left Specifies the left margin width. - Top + Top Specifies the top margin height. - Right + Right Specifies the right margin width. - Bottom + Bottom Specifies the bottom margin height. Spacing The spacing section is used to determine the horizontal and vertical distances between the reduced document pages on one page. - Horizontal + Horizontal Determines the horizontal distance between document pages. - Vertical + Vertical Determines the vertical distance between document pages. Format Determines what print format to use. - Landscape + Landscape Prints the page in landscape format. - Portrait + Portrait Prints the page in portrait format. - Default + Default Specifies that the system will not use a fixed number of rows and columns when printing out the page view, but rather uses what was originally shown in the page view. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/19010000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/19010000.xhp index 9c8d32e33c..28e3e4d042 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/19010000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/19010000.xhp @@ -44,7 +44,7 @@
- + Insert Header Displays the header of an HTML document if headers are enabled on the Format - Page - Header tab page.help text still visible in Customize - Toolbars, so do not remove
diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/19020000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/19020000.xhp index a6b4e2f71f..5a58f6bc6b 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/19020000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/19020000.xhp @@ -44,7 +44,7 @@
- + Insert Footer Displays the footer of an HTML document if footers are enabled on the Format - Page - Footer tab page.help text still visible in Customize - Toolbars, so do not removename is wrong, see bug #105568#
-- cgit v1.2.3